Prisma P Catalogue

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 344

Low Voltage electric distribution

Prisma P
Cubicles up to 4000 A

Catalogue 2013

Presentation

Prisma P electrical switchboards

Prisma P - a comprehensive range of enclosures and cubicles


PB384620.eps

Prisma P - a tried and tested modular system

A dependable electrical installation The total compatibility of Schneider Electric devices with the Prisma P system is a key advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability. System design has been validated by type tests as per standards IEC 61439-1 and IEC 61439-2 and benefits from the combined experience of Schneider Electric customers over many years. An upgradeable electrical installation Thanks to modular design, Prisma P switchboards can be modified easily to integrate new functions as needed. Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and straight-forward due to easy access to devices. Total safety for personnel Work in a Prisma P switchboard is risk-free when carried out by qualified persons in compliance with all applicable safety regulations. Devices are installed behind protective front plates and only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal separations protect against direct contact with live parts. Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NSX and Compact INS/ INV devices in Prisma P enclosures.

24

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00100

Presentation

Prisma P electrical switchboards


IP30/31/55 cubicles

b Applications: v indoor cubicles for main or subdistribution low-voltage switchboards for commercial and industrial applications v supplied in kit form, can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back b In (A): 4000 A b Degree of protection: v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket v IP55: with IP55 cover panels b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts: v IK07 with cover frame v IK08 (with IP30 door) v IK10 with IP55 door b Framework dimensions: v four widths: -- W = 300: cable compartment -- W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment -- W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment -- W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment v two depths: 400, 600 mm v height: 2000 mm.

PD390180_SE.eps

400E00100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

25

Presentation

Electrical switchboards up to 4000 A

The Prisma P functional system


PD391298.eps

The Prisma P functional system can be used for all types of low-voltage distribution switchboards (main, subdistribution and final) up to 4000 A, in commercial and industrial environments. Switchboard design is very simple. A metal structure The switchboard is made up of one or more frameworks combined side-by-side or back-to-back, on which a complete selection of cover panels and doors can be mounted. A distribution system Horizontal busbars or vertical busbars positioned in a lateral compartment or at the rear of the cubicle are used to distribute electricity throughout the switchboard. Complete functional units Each device is part of a functional unit comprising: b a dedicated mounting plate for device installation b a front plate to block direct access to live parts b prefabricated busbar connections b devices for on-site connections. Each functional unit contributes to a function in the switchboard. The functional units are modular and are arranged rationally, one on top of another, within the enclosure. The system includes everything required for functional unit mounting, supply and onsite connection. The components of the Prisma P and those of the functional units in particular have been designed and tested taking into account device characteristics. This design approach ensures a high degree of reliability in system operation and optimum safety for personnel.

PD390150_SE_R.eps

Functional units are arranged rationally, one on top of another.

26

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E10020

Presentation

Electrical switchboards up to 4000 A

Prisma P enclosures
PD390381_SE.eps

b Steel sheet metal b Electrophoresis treatment + hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder, white colour RAL 9001 b Can be dismantled b Can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back b Degree of protection: v IP30: with IP30 cover panels including a door or a cover frame v IP31: with IP30 cover panels including a door + gasket v IP55: with IP55 cover panels b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts: v IK07: with cover frame v IK08: with IP30 door v IK10: with IP55 door b Framework dimensions: v four widths: - W = 300: cable compartment - W = 400: cable compartment or device compartment - W = 650: device compartment or cable compartment - W = 800: device compartment with busbar compartment or cable compartment v two depths: 400, 600 mm v height: 2000 mm b Indoor cubicles.

Advantages of Prisma P switchboards

A dependable electrical installation The total compatibility of Schneider Electric devices with the Prisma P is a key advantage in ensuring a high level of installation dependability. System design has been validated by type tests as per standards IEC 61439-1 and 2 and benefits from the combined experience of Schneider Electric customers over many years. An upgradeable electrical installation Thanks to modular design, Prisma P switchboards can be modified easily to integrate new functional units as needed. Maintenance operations, carried out with the switchboard de-energised, are fast and straight-forward due to easy access to devices. Total safety for personnel Work in a switchboard must be carried out by authorised persons in compliance with all applicable safety regulations. To increase the safety of personnel, devices are installed behind protective front plates; only the operating handles are accessible. Additional internal protection (partitions, barriers) is available to create form 2, 3 or 4 separation to protect against direct contacts with live parts. Terminal shields are mandatory for installation of Compact NSX and INS/INV devices in Prisma P enclosures. Electrical switchboards built using the Prisma P functional system and Schneider recommendations fully comply with international standards IEC61439-1 and 2.

Electrical characteristics

Use of the components in the Prisma P functional system ensures the creation of switchboards complying with standards IEC 50298, EN 50298, IEC 61439-1 and 2, EN 61439-1 and 2, as well as local versions with the following electrical characteristics: b rated insulation level of main busbars: 1000 V b InA (A): 3250 A b rated peak withstand current Ipk: 220 k b rated short-time withstand current Icw: 100 kA rms / 1 second b frequency: 50/60 Hz. 16/04/2013 27

400E10020

Version : 3.0

Presentation

Prisma PH - LV Switchboards for harsh environments up to 4000 A


When demanding applications and severe conditions require the best, assure your success with Prisma PH
Reinforced solution for low voltage switchboards up to 4000 A More than Prisma, Prisma PH contributes to safety of persons as well as to reliability and continuity of service of the electrical installation. Thanks to its reinforced metal structure, it combines outstanding robustness with versatility and flexibility, by resisting to harsh environments and heavy loads. Prisma PH is ready to perform in any condition. As Prisma, Prisma PH is a solution of kit cubicles for low voltage electrical distribution switchboards: - the components (switchgear, busbars, etc.) are designed for joint operation - all the most demanding switchboard configurations have been tested and are IEC standard compliant. Total safety and reliability Prisma PH is designed to operate up to 4000 A. It is fully tested to perform in extreme conditions, and fully compliant with standards IEC 61439-1 & 2 and EN 61439-1 & 2, IEC 50298 and EN 50298. Prisma PH withstands seismic vibrations (Standard EDF CRT91C11200, AS1170, EAK 2000, ENDESA 1986, RPA 99 2003, Gore GR 63, Turkish Seismic Code, GOST 17516.1-90). Seismic tests are performed by an external laboratory, CESI Labs. All documentation required by local authorities and customers in order to get the approval are available. Seismic resistance: - for civil installations: 0.7 g APN (rms) and 3.5 g peak, without any extra accessories - for nuclear installations: 1 g APN (rms) and 5 g peak, with reinforcement accessories. Technical characteristics b High grade steel, durable epoxy painting techniques and ingenious design for a remarkable robustness. b Steel sheet metal, thickness 1.5 mm on panels and 1.8 mm on doors. b Electrophoresis treatment and hot-polymerised polyester epoxy powder. b White color RAL 9001. b Degree of protection: IP55 (IEC 60529). b Degree of protection against mechanical impacts: IK10 with door (IEC 62262). b Frame dimensions: v 2 widths: - 700 mm (for functional units) - 300 mm (for vertical busbars and cables ducts) v 2 depths: -500 mm (up to 1600 A) - 800 mm (up to 4000 A) v height: 2000 mm.

Prisma PH
PD391268b_SE.eps PD391264b_SE.eps

To know more b See the catalogue Prisma PH.


Low Voltage electrical distribution

Prisma PH

Catalogue 2010

28

Version : 1.0

16/04/2013

400E10060

Presentation

Solutions for continuity of service

Solutions for continuity of service in electrical installations with Prisma

The right level of continuity of service


All organizations have some sensitivity to the continuity of service of electrical power. For some power is a vital component to their ongoing success and viability. The required level of continuity of service must be considered for each application so that the electrical installation can be optimised accordingly. The stakes of continuity of service are high. Even a brief electrical distribution failure can have serious consequences on many activities. Continuity of service solutions for Operation, Maintenance, Evolution All solutions proposed comply with standards EN 61439-1 and EN 61439-2. The system solutions proposed include Schneider Electric products exclusively to fully ensure compatibility and operation. To ensure safety, solutions with switchgear mounted on plug-in bases, withdrawable chassis and disconnectable or withdrawable mounting plates include safety trip levers that open the circuit breaker if it is removed in closed position.

For highest continuity of services

Functional units with devices on live-disconnectable mounting plates


Disconnectable IS 223: (correspondence with standard IEC61439-2: WFD) - High continuity of service - Maximum time to restore power after maintenance: 1 hour - Live upgrading.

safety trip levers

safety trip levers

Functional units with devices on live-withdrawable mounting plates


Disconnectable IS 233: (correspondence with standard IEC61439-2: WWW) - High continuity of service - Maximum time to restore power after maintenance: 1/4 hr - Live upgrading.

Solutions for Continuity of Service in Prisma electrical installations


Solutions guide 2011

To know more b See the solution guide Solutions for Continuity of Service in Prisma electrical installations (COM-POWER-LVIS01EN). 400E10070 Version : 1.0 16/04/2013 29

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

Incomer
Compact NS1000 4P Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply via cables

Distribution
Linergy LGY busbars

Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection

Prefabricated connection Transferred to cable compartment,W = 300 mm

Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Linergy FC distribution block Connection Direct via cables Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Linergy FM 80 A Linergy FM 200 A Linergy FH Cable running Connection Cable straps Trunking Linergy TA in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm

Enclosure
Cubicle for devices Cable compartment
PD391172_SE_R.eps PD390382_SE_R.eps

W = 800 mm D = 400 mm W = 300 mm D = 400 mm

PD391298_SE_R.eps

Fixed Compact NS1000, front connected with cables.


PD390383.eps PD395097.eps

Prefabricated connection between an incoming device and Linergy LGY busbars.

Prefabricated connection between Linergy LGY busbars and an NSX250.

Connection transfer assembly for connection in a cable compartment.

30

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E10040

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

PD391299.eps

PD390385_SE_R.eps

Two vertically mounted Compact NSX250 devices supplied by a Linergy FC.


PB104997.eps PD390329R.eps

PD391300_SE_R.eps

Supply of a row of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices by a 200 A Linergy FM.

A device supplying a group of outgoers via an 80 A Linergy FM.

Linergy TA for Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices in the cable compartment.

400E10040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

31

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

Incomer
Compact NSX630 4P Fixed, front connection Motor mechanism Direct supply via cables

Distribution
Linergy BW busbars

Outgoing devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply 80 A Linergy FM 200 A Linergy FM Linergy FH comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Connection Linergy TA/TB + earth bar TA/TB at bottom of the switchboard

Enclosure
Cubicle, W = 650 mm, D = 400 mm

PB104999.eps

PB104998.eps

32

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

PD390563_SE_R.eps

400E10040

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

400E10040

PD390394_SE_R.eps

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

33

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

Incomer
Compact NS1000 4P Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply via Canalis

Distribution
Linergy LGY busbars

Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection

Prefabricated connection Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm

Prefabricated connection Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm

Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block at bottom of cubicle Motor protection devices Supply Comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm

Cubicle for devices Cable compartment

W = 800/650 mm D = 400 mm W = 300 mm D = 400 mm

PD390399.eps

Enclosure

PD390398_SE_R.eps

34

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E10040

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

Incomer
Masterpact NT1000 3P Drawout, front connection Supply via Canalis

Distribution
Linergy LGY busbars

Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection

Linergy FC distribution block Direct via cables

Prefabricated connection Transferred to cable compartment, W = 400 mm

Prefabricated connection Transferred to cable compartment, W = 400 mm

Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply 80 A Linergy FM Linergy FH comb busbars Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm Motor protection devices Supply Linergy FH comb busbars Cable running Cable straps Trunking Connection Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm Cable running

Enclosure
Cubicle for devices Cable compartment W = 800/650 mm D = 400 mm W = 300/400 mm D = 400 mm

400E10040

PD390407_SE_R.eps

PB105001.eps

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

35

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

DD384517.EPS

Incomer
Masterpact NW20 4P Drawout Upstream terminals: vertical rear connection Downstream terminals: front connection Supply via Canalis from the top

Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, front connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, front connection Rotary handle Supply Connection Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Cable running Connection Motor protection devices Supply Cable running

Flexible bars Direct via cables

Distribution
Vertical Linergy LGYE 2000 A busbars Horizontal Linergy LGYE 2000 A busbars

Enclosure
Cubicle for devices Cable compartment W = 650+150/800 mm D = 600 mm W = 300 mm D = 600 mm

Linergy FC distribution block Direct via cables

Flexible bars Transferred to cable compartment, W = 300 mm 200 A Linergy FM Trunking Terminal block in the cable compartment, W = 300 mm Comb busbars Cable strap

36

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E10040

Presentation

Examples of switchboard configurations

Dd384518.EPS

Incomer
Masterpact NW32 4P (1) Fixed Upstream terminals: front connection Downstream terminals: vertical rear connection Supply via cables from the bottom

Outgoing devices
Compact NSX250 Vertical Fixed, rear connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX250 Horizontal Fixed, rear connection Toggle Supply Connection Compact NSX400 Horizontal Fixed, rear connection Toggle Supply Connection Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices Supply Cable running Motor protection devices Supply Cable running

Linergy FC distribution block Direct via cables

Distribution
Vertical Linergy LGYbusbars Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars

Enclosure
Cubicle for devices W = 650+150/800 mm D = 1000 mm

Prefabricated connection Direct via cables

(1) For mounting a NW40, provide for a dedicated cubicle.

Prefabricated connection Direct via cables 200 A Linergy FM Trunking Linergy FH comb busbars Cable straps

400E10040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

37

Presentation

The functions of an electrical switchboard

PB105002.eps

1 2

Incoming function Connection via Canalis Distribution function Linergy LGY busbars in busbar compartment, W = 150 mm Horizontal busbars Linergy LGYE Linergy BW busbars

See page A-8 See page B-12 See page B-14 See page B-50 See page C-14 See page C-14 See page C-14 400E10050

3 4 5
38

Device compartment, W = 650 mm Connection compartment, W = 300 mm Connection compartment, W = 400 mm 16/04/2013

Version : 3.0

Presentation

The functions of an electrical switchboard

PB105003.eps

1 2 3 4 5 6
400E10050

Hinged front plate support frame Roof Rear panels Front doors Gland plates Side panels

See page C-14 See page C-15 See page C-15 See page C-14 See page C-18 See page C-15

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

39

Standards and Prisma P tested switchboards

Standards

IEC international standards


IEC member countries
Argentina Australia Austria Belarus Belgium Brazil Bulgaria Canada China Croatia Czech Rep. Denmark Egypt Finland France Germany Greece Hungary India Indonesia Iran Ireland Israel Italy Japan Korea (Rep. of) Luxemburg Malaysia Mexico Netherlands New Zealand Norway Pakistan Poland Portugal Rumania Russia Singapore Slovakia Slovenia South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Thailand Turkey Ukraine United Kingdom United States Yugoslavia

The IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) is a worldwide organisation for standardisation comprising all national electrotechnical committees (IEC National Committees). The object of the IEC is to promote international cooperation on all questions concerning standardisation in the electrical and electronic fields. To that end, the IEC publishes International Standards. Their preparation is entrusted to technical committees and any IEC National Committee interested in the subject dealt with may participate in the preparatory work.

National standards
DD383972.eps

Worldwide

In Europe The IEC documents are first studied by CENELEC, which establishes: b either a European standard (EN), often identical to the IEC standard, which then becomes the applicable national standard in all the member countries b or, in the event of differences, a harmonisation document (HD). Other IEC member countries Each country is autonomous and can accept the IEC standard as the national standard, with or without modifications. Even though they are IEC members, countries such as Japan and the United States continue to develop their own standardisation systems. Countries without a standardisation system It is possible to refer to an IEC standard in the framework of a project.

Dd381779.eps

Other IEC member countries

Countries

CEI / IEC Commission Electrotechnique Internationale CENELEC Comit Europen de Normalisation ELECtrotechnique UTE Union Technique de llectricit VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik, Elektronik und Informationstechnik e.v. (German electrotechnical, electronics and computer technology standardisation organisation) BSI British Standards Institution

40

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E35000

Standards and Prisma P tested switchboards

Standards

The different types of standards

There are different types of standards, including: b management standards b installation standards b product standards.

Dd381775.eps

Dd381776.eps

Management standards

ISO 9004: Quality-management systems - guidelines for performance improvements. Used in setting up a quality-management system. ISO 9001: Quality management systems - requirements. Used for certification audits.

Design and manufacture.


Dd381777.eps Dd381778.eps

Switchgear and controlgear assemblies.

ISO 14004: Environmental-management systems. General guidelines on the principles, systems and supporting techniques. ISO 14001: Environmental-management systems. Specification with guidance for use The majority of Schneider Electric development centres and factories are certified ISO 9001 and ISO 14001.

Installation standards
Switchgear and controlgear. Installation.

The set of IEC 60364-X standards defines the main principles and rules on: b determining general characteristics of installations b protection b selection and installation of equipment b verification and maintenance of installations.

Product standards

They apply to devices or assemblies and are aimed at ensuring correct operation and safety of the concerned products. b standards on low-voltage switchgear and controlgear: v IEC 60947-1 : general rules v IEC 60947-2 : circuit breakers v IEC 60947-3 : switches and disconnectors v IEC 60947-4 : contactors v IEC 62208 / EN 50298: empty enclosures. b standards on low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: v IEC 61439-1: general rules v IEC 61439-2: power switchgear and controlgear assemblies v IEC 61439-3: distribution boards v IEC 61439-4: assemblies for construction sites v IEC 61439-5: assemblies for power distribution v IEC 61439-6: busbar trunking systems.

Regulations in a given country may make certain standards legally binding and may also create additional safety requirements. In addition to providing proof of the conformity of its quality-management system, a product manufacturer can demonstrate the quality of products by providing proof that the design and manufacture comply with the requirements in the applicable standard. Proof of conformity may be a declaration by the manufacturer or a certificate supplied by an independent organisation.

400E35000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

41

Standards and Prisma P tested switchboards

Standards

e marking

e marking is a regulatory symbol attributed under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer and intended for the verification authorities of the European countries that enforce the European regulations. It allows free circulation of a product in the European Union and certifies that it complies with the basic requirements in all the applicable European directives. e marking is not a quality symbol and does not indicate conformity with a standard. The e declaration is intended exclusively for the authorities in charge of verifying compliance with the applicable regulations and it is drafted, signed and held for presentation to the authorities by the manufacturer. For the Prisma P range, the declaration is the responsibility of the Schneider Electric unit that has designed and developed the product. For LV switchboards, the declaration is the responsibility of the panelbuilder. The following products receive e marking: b all products that are liable to endanger the safety of persons, animals and property (LV directive) b all products likely to emit electromagnetic disturbances above a standardised threshold or to be disturbed during operation (EMC directive). Consequences: b the Prisma P range falls under the LV directive only b LV switchboards are covered by the LV directive and may also fall under the EMC directive, depending on the type of devices incorporated.

For the Prisma P range, e marking is applied: b on the packing of mechanical components b on the product itself for electrical components. For the LV assemblies created by the panelbuilder, e marking is applied: b on the packing b on the rating plate (if applicable) b on one of the documents accompanying the switchboard when it is shipped.

42

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E35000

Standards and Prisma P tested switchboards

Standards

Degree of protection

Standard IEC 60364-5-51 lists and codifies a large number of external influences to which electrical installations can be subjected, including the presence of water, solid objects, shocks, vibrations, corrosive substances, etc.

IP code

Standard IEC 60529 (IP code, February 2001) indicates the degrees of protection provided by an enclosure for electrical devices against access to hazardous parts, against penetration of solid foreign objects and against penetration of water. These standards do not apply for the protection against the risks of explosion or conditions such a humidity, corrosive vapour, fungus or vermin. The IP code is made up of two characteristic numerals and can include an additional letter when the actual protection for persons against access to the hazardous parts is better than that indicated by the first numeral. The first numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of solid foreign objects and the protection of persons. The second numeral characterises the protection provided against the ingress of water with harmful effects.

1st numeral Protection of persons


Dd381959.eps

Dd381959.eps

Dd381960.eps

Dd381963.eps

Dd381961.eps

Dd381961.eps

Dd381962.eps

Dd381962.eps

Dd381962.eps

Dd381964.eps

Dd381962.eps

Dd381965.eps

400E35000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

Dd381973.eps

Protected against the effects of continuous immersion in water

Dd381972.eps

Protected against the effects of temporary immersion in water

Dd381971.eps

Protected against access with a wire

Dust tight

Protected against powerful water jets from all directions

Dd381970.eps

Protected against access with a wire

Protected against dust (dust protected)

Protected against water jets from all directions

Dd381969.eps

Protected against access with a wire

Protection against solid foreign objects larger than 1 mm

Protected against splashing water from all directions

Dd381968.eps

Protected against access with a tool

Protection against solid foreign objects larger than 2.5 mm

Protected against spraying water up to 60 from vertical

Dd381967.eps

Protected against access with a finger

Protection against solid foreign objects larger than 12.5 mm

Protected against dripping water up to 15 from vertical

Dd381966.eps

Protected against access with back of hand

Protection against ingress of solid objects


Protection against solid foreign objects larger than 50mm

2nd numeral Protection against ingress of water

Protected against vertically dripping water (condensation)

43

Standards and Prisma P tested switchboards

Standards

Additional letter

The additional letter is used only if the actual protection of persons is higher than that indicated by the first characteristic numeral of the IP code. Additional letter
A B C D

Protection
Protected against access with back of hand Protected against access with a 12 mm diameter finger Protected against access with a 2.5 mm diameter tool Protected against access with a 1 mm diameter wire

If only the protection of persons is of interest, the two characteristic numerals are replaced by the letter X, e.g. IPXXB. Illustration of the above explanations:
Protection against solid foreign objects larger than 2.5 mm

IP30D

No protection Protected against access with a 1 mm diameter wire

Remarks b The degree of protection IP must always be read and understood numeral by numeral and not as a whole. For example, an IP31 wall-mount enclosure is suitable for an environment that requires a minimum degree of protection IP21. However an IP30 wall-mount enclosure is not suitable. b the degrees of protection indicated in this catalogue are valid for the enclosures as presented. However, the indicated degree of protection is guaranteed only when installation and device mounting are carried out in accordance with professional standards that conserve the initial degree of protection.

IK code
IK code
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

Standard IEC 62262 defines an IK code characterising the capacity of products to resist mechanical impacts from all sides. Impact energy (joules)
0.14 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.7 1 2 5 10 20

IK codes can be selected according to the risks of impacts on a given site. Site
No risk of major impact Significant risk of impact that can damage devices Maximum risk of impact that can damage the switchboard Technical premises Hallways Workshops

Recommended IK
07 08 (switchboard with door) 10

44

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E35000

Presentation

IEC 61439 standard

The switchboard, central to the electrical installation


Both the point of arrival of energy and a device for distribution to the site applications, the LV switchboard is the intelligence of the system, central to the electrical installation.
It plays an essential role in the availability of electric power, while meeting the needs of personal and property safety. Its denition, design and installation are based on precise rules; there is no place for improvisation. The IEC 61439 standard aims to better dene "low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies", ensuring that the specied performances are reached. It species in particular: > the responsibilities of each player, distinguishing those of the original equipment manufacturer; the organization that performed the original design and associated verication of an assembly in accordance with the standard, and of the assembly manufacturer - the organization taking responsibility for the nished assembly; > the design and verication rules, constituting a benchmark for product certication. All the component parts of the electrical switchboard are concerned by the IEC 61439-2 standard. Equipment produced in accordance with the requirements of this switchboard standard ensures the safety and reliability of the installation.

A switchboard must comply with the equirements of standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 to guarantee the safety and reliability of the installation. Managers of installations, fully aware of the professional and legal liabilities weighing on their company and on themselves, demand a high level of safety for the electrical installation. What is more, the serious economic consequences of prolonged halts in production mean that the electrical switchboard must provide excellent continuity of service, whatever the operating conditions.

Prisma P tested switchboards


The conformity of the switchboard has been tested and proven. A Prisma P switchboard is: > made up of Schneider Electric low-voltage devices and components that all comply with the applicable standards; > based on congurations in our catalogue; > made up of Prisma P mechanical and electrical components that have been subjected to the verication of original equipment manufacturer; > mounted and wired by a panelbuilder in compliance with professional standards; > subjected to the individual verication. Schneider Electric makes available to the panelbuilder everything required to create tested Prisma P switchboards, including the basic congurations in the low voltage distribution catalogue, all the documentation for switchboard design and mounting, calculation and design software, etc. Panelbuilders can demonstrate conformity with standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 by presenting the declarations or certicates of conformity for type tests carried out by independent laboratories (ASEFA, ASTA, KEMA, etc.) and supplied by Schneider Electric. The panelbuilder is responsible for the individual routine verication and delivers the corresponding declarations of conformity.

The Schneider Electric solution


> Specify switchboards that comply with standard IEC 61439-1 and 2. > guarantee a level of safety that has been 100% tested, from the day the switchboard is installed and throughout its service life. > ensure a lasting investment through easy upgrading of the installation in compliance with the standard. > guarantee that the switchboard complies with the technical specications.

400E35000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

45

Presentation

IEC 61439 standard

Original Manufacturer and Assembly Manufacturer:

Both involved in tested assemblies


Standard IEC 61439 clearly defines the type of verifications that must be conducted by both organisations involved in final conformity of the solution: the Original Manufacturer, guaranteeing assembly system design and the Assembly Manufacturer, responsible for the final conformity of the switchboard.

Specifier
> Species the needs and constraints for design, installation, operation and upgrading of the complete system. > Checks that its requirements have been fully integrated by the Assembly Manufacturer. Depending on the application, the specier could be the end-user or a design ofce.

se As

y ly S mb

tem

Tes t

Assembly Manufacturer (Panel builder)


The organisation (whether or not the same as the OM) responsible for the completed assembly.

ed

As

Proje

ct spe

sem

Original Manufacturer
The organisation that has carried out the original design and the associated verication of an assembly system.
He is responsible for the "Design verications" listed by IEC 61439-2 including many electrical tests.

cica

tion*

bly

He is responsible for "Routine verications" on each panel produced, according to the standard. If he derivates from the instructions of the original manufacturer he has to carry out again design verications.

End-User
Should ask for a certied LV switchboard. By systematically requesting routine verications, he ensures that the assembly system used is compliant.

* Schneider Electric has developed a specication guide.

46

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E35000

Presentation

IEC 61439 standard

The main 10 functions of standard IEC 61439


For each of the following 10 functions, the standard IEC 61439 requires design verifications from the system manufacturer - mainly through type-tests - and routine verifications on each panel from the Panel Builder to achieve 3 basic goals: safety, continuity of service and compliance with end-user requirements. Safety
Voltage stresses withstand capability
To withstand long term voltages, and transient and temporary overvoltages according to the insulation coordination principles and requirements.

Current-carrying capability
To protect against burns and to withstand temperature rise: > when any circuit is continuously loaded, alone, to the specied current > when the assembly is loaded to the specied current according to the specied load pattern (between circuits and/or as a function of the time).

Short-circuit withstand capability


To withstand the stresses resulting from the prospective short-circuit current and from the associated data (High forces between conductors, temp. rise in a very short time, air ionization, overpressure).

Protection against electric shock


> Hazardous-live-parts not to be accessible (basic protection) > Accessible conductive parts not to become hazardous-live (fault protection).

Protection against risk of fire or explosion


> Resistance to internal glowing elements > Note: Protection of persons, and optional protection of the assembly, against arcing due to internal fault can be specied through a "special test" according to IEC 61641.

Continuity of service
Maintenance and modification capability
Capability to preserve continuity of supply without impairing safety during assembly maintenance or modication > Electrical condition of the assembly or various circuits > Speed of exchange of the functional units > Test facilities

Electro-Magnetic compatibility
To properly function (immunity) and not to generate EM disturbances (emission) in specied environmental conditions: > Industrial networks or locations (Environment A) > Domestic, commercial, and light industrial locations (Environment B).

Compliance with end-user requirements


Capability to operate the electrical installation
To properly function, according to: > The electrical diagram of the overall system and related information (voltages, coordination) > The specied operating facilities (e.g. free or restricted access to Man Machine Interfaces, isolation of the outgoing circuits, ).

Capability to be installed on site


> To withstand handling, transport, storage and installation constraints > Capability to be erected and connected (type of enclosure, type, material and cross sectional areas of external conductors).

Protection of the assembly against mechanical and atmospheric environmental conditions


> Presence of water or solid foreign bodies (IP according to IEC 60529) > External mechanical impacts (optional IK according to IEC 62262) > Indoor or outdoor installation (humidity, UV).

400E35000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

47

Presentation

IEC 61439 standard


IEC 61439-1 paragraph 11.4

Protection against electric shocks and integrity of protection circuits


The following should be checked visually: > Presence of protective shields against direct and indirect contacts on live parts; > Presence of the PE conductor. The continuity of protection circuits is ensured by compliance with the assembly instructions delivered with each product.

Standard individual check sheet


in accordance with the IEC 61439-1 and 2 standard from the assembly manufacturer (panelbuilder)
Job No.: ....................................................................................... Switchboard No.: ............................................................................ Drawing No./Rev. No.: .......................................................................

IEC 61439-1 paragraph 11.5

Integration of incorporated components


The assembly manufacturer must comply with the instructions of the original equipment manufacturer for installation and wiring of the components used.
IEC 61439-1 paragraph 11.6

Chapter
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures Insulation clearances and creepage distances Protection against electric shocks and integrity of protection circuits Integration of incorporated components Internal electric circuits and connections Terminals for external conductors Mechanical operation Dielectric properties Wiring, operating performance and function 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7 11.8 11.9 11.10

Verified

Internal electric circuits and connections


Schneider Electric recommends marking the nut with a tinted acrylic lacquer, indelible and temperature-resistant. This allows: > not only self-checking to check effective tightening to torque; > but also identication of any loosening.

IEC 61439-1 paragraphe 11.9

Dielectric properties
The main circuits, and the auxiliary and control circuits connected to the main circuit, shall be subjected to the test voltage in accordance.
IEC 61439-1 paragraph 11.10

Date of verication: ............ / ............ /.............

Verications performed by: ..........................................................................

Wiring, operating performance and function


Verication of wiring and marking conformity with the drawings, parts list and diagram.

48

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E35000

400E35000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

49

Determining cat. no. and configuration assistance


Cat. no. selection

Typical configuration with catalogue numbers

PD391304_SE_R.eps

50

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E20030

Determining cat. no. and configuration assistance


Cat. no. selection

Typical configuration with catalogue numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Framework, W = 800, D = 400 Framework, W = 300, D = 400 Side panel, D = 400 Rear panel, W = 800 Rear panel, W = 300 Roof, W = 800, D = 400 Roof, W = 300, D = 400

08407 See page C-12 08403 See page C-12 08750 See page C-15 08738 See page C-15 08733 See page C-15 08438 See page C-15 08433 See page C-15 08497 See page C-18 08493 See page C-18 08566 See page C-12 08538 See page C-14 08513 See page C-14

14 Front plate for vertical Compact 03690 See page A-14 15 Connection for fixed Compact 16 17 18 19 20
NS630b/1600 NS630b/1250, 4P Connection for horizontal Compact NSX250 Connection transfer assembly for Compact NSX250 Linergy FC distribution block for 4P fixed Compact NSX250 devices with toggles Linergy BW busbars, 250 A, 4P, W = 1000 200 A Linergy FM, 4P 04486 See page A-14 04424 See page A-23 04426 See page A-23 04403 See page B-62 04122 See page B-51 04014 See page B-61 04004 See page B-60 04239 See page B-77 04243 See page B-77 04257 See page B-79 04504 See page B-18 04651 See page B-19

IP30 gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 9 IP30 gland plate, W = 300, D = 400 10 Hinged front plate support frame

21 80 A Linergy FM, 4P 22 12 horizontal cable straps 23 4 covers for horizontal cable


straps

11 Transparent door, W = 800 12 Plain door, W = 300


Compact NS630b/1600

24 4 horizontal trunking sections,


60 x 30 25 1000 A Linergy BS busbars

13 Mounting plate for vertical fixed 03482 See page A-14

26 Linergy BS busbar supports

400E20030

PD391303_SE_R.eps

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

51

Determining cat. no. and configuration assistance


Cat. no. selection

Determining catalogue numbers

Starting with the electrical diagram: IP30 switchboard

DD384086.eps

NSX250 NS1000

NSX250

NSX250

INS

C60 or iC60

C60 or iC60

GV2

DD381987.eps

Order: b connection components b mounting plates and front plates b busbar connections.

Dd380822.eps

DD380878.eps

See page A-14

DD381986.eps

Install the incomer

Front conn. using cables

2
DD380870.eps

Device installation

Device

No of Mounting vert. plate mod

Cut-out front plate

Upstream front plate

Downstream front plate

Fixed device
front conn.

DD381988.eps

3
DD380871.eps

Linergy BB connection

Front connectors

Prefabricated connection

Capot for BB connectors

Fixed device

DD383964.eps

Install the Compact devices


See page A-23
Dd380823.eps

1
DD383867.eps

Installation

Device

No of vertical modules

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


NSX100/250

DD383965.eps

DD380873.eps

Order: b mounting plates and front plates b busbar connections b connection accessories.

Linergy LGY connection

Device NSX100/250 NSX400/630

Prefabricated connection

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

DD383966.eps

3
DD380874.eps

Connection

Front connection or

Rear connection Short terminal shields

Fixed Compact NSX


NSX100/250 NSX400/630 LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV429515 LV429516 LV432591

Order: b mounting plates and front plates b distribution block b connection accessories.

Dd380824.eps

DD383967.eps DD383968.eps DD383969.eps

1
DD380875.eps

Installation

Fixed Compact NSX


NSX100/160 NSX250

2
DD380876.eps

Linergy LGY connection

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


NSX100/250

3
DD380877.eps

Connection

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


NSX100/250 NSX400/630 LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594 LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592

52

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E20040

Determining cat. no. and configuration assistance


Cat. no. selection

Determining catalogue numbers

DD385313.eps DD381996.eps DD382007.eps DD382006.eps DD382005.eps DD382004.eps DD383973.eps DD382002.eps DD385314.eps DD382000.eps DD381998.eps DD381997.eps

Install the modular devices


Order the mounting plates and front plates taking into account: b supply to the rows b cable running.
Dd385315.eps

1
DD385316.eps

Multi 9 or Acti 9 See page A-36

All Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices

Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A

2
Dd381919.eps

GV2 circuit breaker See page A-62

b Linergy FH distribution block, see page A-41 b cable running, see page B-76

Determine the size of the switchboard


b count the number ofmodules occupied b determine the number of cubicles b order the additional plain front plate.

32 modules 1 cubicle
Plain front plate

The capacity of a cubicle is 36 modules.

See page A-75

Plan the distribution system


Dd385317.eps

1
DD380880.eps

Linergy LGY busbars

6mm

10mm

6mm

10mm

6mm

10mm

6mm

10mm

2
DD380881.eps

Linergy BW busbars See page B-50

Select the enclosures


Dd380827.eps

Frameworks

2 3 4 5 6 7
400E20040

Hinged front plate support frame Doors

Rear panels

Side panels Rooves

Plinth, gland plates, finishing parts, etc.

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

53

54

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E20040

Functional units

Contents

Presentation 22

Circuit breakers
Dedicated cubicle Dedicated cubicle

Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Masterpact NT06 to NT16


Toggle and motor mechanism

A-4
A-6 A-7 A-8

A-4 A-7 A-8

Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - 3P dedicated cubicle Compact NS630b to NS1600


Vertical mounting

A-10 A-13
A-13 A-15

Compact NS630b to NS1000


Horizontal mounting

A-15 A-19 A-21 A-23

Compact NS1600b to 3200 Presentation of Compact NSX circuit breakers for Prisma P Compact NSX100 to NSX630
Horizontal - Toggle - Fixed Vertical - Toggle - Fixed Horizontal - Toggle - Plug-in Vertical - Toggle - Plug-in Horizontal - Rotary handle, motor mechanism - Fixed, plug-in Vertical - Rotary handle, motor mechanism - Fixed, plug-in Horizontal - All controls - Withdrawable Vertical - All controls - Withdrawable

A-23 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-27 A-28 A-29 A-30

Easypact CVS100/630 Horizontal fixed mounting Easypact CVS 100/630 Vertical fixed mounting Easypact EZC100
Vertical - Fixed - Toggle

A-31 A-32 A-33


A-33

Easypact EZC250/EZCV250 - Easypact EZC400

Multi 9 or Acti 9 A-35 Modular devices - Multi 9 or Acti 9 y 63A A-36 80/160A A-37 Modular devices - NG125 circuit breaker A-38 Linergy BW busbars A-39 Modular devices - Rear Linergy BS busbars A-40 Modular devices - Distribution A-41

A-34

Switch-disconnectors A-42
Source-changeover systems - Compact / Masterpact
Source-changeover systems Possible combinations Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 - Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32 Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1000 Compact NS630b/1600 - Masterpact, NT06/16, NW08/32 Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16 Manual source-changeover systems - Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 Front direct rotary handle Manual source-changeover systems - Compact INS250 to 630 A-43 A-43 A-44 A-45 A-46 A-46 A-48 A-49

A-42

Compact INS-INV630b to 2500 - Compact INS-INV2000-2500 Compact INS-INV250 to 630


Horizontal - Front handle Vertical - Front handle

A-50 A-51
A-51 A-52

Switch-disconnectors A-51

Fusegear A-53
Fupact ISFL
Vertical - 3P Vertical - 3P

A-53

A-53 A-55

Fupact ISFT Fupact INF

A-55 A-57

Horizontal A-57 Vertical A-58 16/04/2013

400E50010

Version : 2.0

A-1

Contents

Others A-59
Power factor correction equipment
VarplusCan A-60

A-59

Industrial control devices A-62 Metering A-64


3-phase kilowatt-hour meters Metering - Single-phase kilowatt-hour meters - Class 2 Metering - 3-phase kilowatt-hour meters - Class 2 Human-switchboard interface - 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices Human-switchboard interface 144 x 144 mm devices - 22.2 mm diameter lamps, pushbuttons A-64 A-65 A-66 A-67 A-70 A-70

Reserve space Fixing accessories Prisma G adapter Other devices

Mounting on lateral and longitudinal cross-members Mounting on a plain backplate Mounting on a slotted plate Mounting on a modular rail

A-75 A-76 A-78 A-79


A-79 A-80 A-81 A-82

Switchboard lighting

A-83

Distribution B-1 Enclosures C-1 Additional information D-1

A-2

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E50010

400E50010

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-3

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Masterpact NW08 to NW32

Front connection
Dd383680.eps

Note: connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.

Cable connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps

Device NW08/32

Fixed/drawout device
b

Vertical rear connectors

Terminal extension bar support 04694 x 3

Cable cover 04861

Dd383681.eps

Canalis connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps Dd383684.eps Dd380832.eps

Device

Vertical rear connectors

Terminal extension bar support

Canalis support

NW08/16 3P 4P NW20/25 3P 4P NW32 3P 4P

Fixed/drawout device
b b b b b b

Canalis/ device interface + connection 04715 04716 04725 04726 04735 04736

Canalis cover

04694 x 3 04694 x 3 04694 x 3 04694 x 3 04694 x 3 04694 x 3

03561 03561 03561 03561 03561 03561

04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861 04871 + 04861

Dd383682.eps

Rear connection

Cable connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps

Device

NW08/32

Fixed/drawout device
b

Vertical rear connectors

Terminal extension bar support 04694 x 2

Cable cover

04863

Dd383683.eps

Canalis connection
Dd380838.eps Dd380830.eps Dd383684.eps Dd380832.eps

Device

Vertical rear connectors

Terminal extension bar support

Canalis support

NW08/16 3P 4P NW20/25 3P 4P NW32 3P 4P

Fixed/drawout device
b b b b b b

Canalis/ device interface + connection 04715 04716 04725 04726 04735 04736

Canalis cover

04694 x 2 04694 x 2 04694 x 2 04694 x 2 04694 x 2 04694 x 2

03561 03561 03561 03561 03561 03561

04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863 04871 + 04863

A-4

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21100

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Masterpact NW08 to NW32

Dd383686.eps

Device installation
Dd380834.eps Dd383685.eps Dd380833.eps Dd380835.eps

Device

No. of Mounting vert. plate mod. cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis 18 27 14 16 19 28 14 16 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500

Cut-out front plate

Upstream front plate

Downstream front plate

Fixed device
NW08/16 front conn. NW08/16 rear conn. NW20/32 front conn. NW20/32 rear conn. 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03711 03804 03805 + 03804 x 2 03804 + 03803 03805 03804 + 03805 x 2 03804 + 03803 03804 03804 x 3 03805 03805 03805 03804 + 03803 03805 03805 + 03804 x 2 03804 + 03803 03805 03805 03805

03805 03805 03805

Drawout device
NW08/16 front conn. NW08/16 rear conn. NW20/32 front conn. NW20/32 rear conn. cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis cables Canalis 19 27 15 17 20 28 15 17 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03500 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710 03710

03805 03805 03805

Distribution
Dd383687.eps

Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY or Linergy BS


Dd380839.eps Dd380837.eps Dd380840.eps

Device

Front connectors 3P 4P b b b b

Connection

Free support for BB connection

Cover for BB connection 04926 + 04927 04926 + 04927 04926 + 04927 04926 + 04927

Fixed/drawout device
NW08/16 (3) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1) must be made (2) 04662 x 2 (1)

NW20/32 (4)

3P 4P

(1) For an Icw u 75 kA rms, use three free supports (04662 x 3). (2) For the connection to flat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase: b 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640) b 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641) (3) For LGYE and NW08/25 use a duct of 150 mm. (4) For LGYE and NW32/40 use an extension of 300 mm. Note: To make measurements: b install the CTs preferably upstream, on the supply terminal extension bars b or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection). In this case, add one module and a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18 Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20 Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.

DD383808.eps

400E21100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-5

Functional system

Functional units
Circuit breakers
Mounting
400 650 150

Masterpact NW08 to NW40


Dedicated cubicle

Dedicated cubicle

Dd384530.eps

Devices

Fixed device

Drawout device

Masterpact NW08/32
No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] cut-out upstream (1) downstream 1 36 03500 03711 [9] 03808 [8] 03808 [8] + 03803 [3]

Masterpact NW40 (3)


(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)

Masterpact NW08/32
1 36 03500 03710 [10] 03808 [8] 03808 [8] + 03802 [2]

Dd384531.eps

Masterpact NW40 (3)


(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)

(1) One or two 3-module front plates for 72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm measurement devices can be installed just above the cut-out front plate: bb 1 3-module front plate + 1 plain front plate 03807 (9 modules) bb 2 3-module front plates + 1 plain front plate 03806 (6 modules) (2) Please consult Schneider Electric.

Human-switchboard interface, see page A-67. Distribution Connection to horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars Connection to horizontal Linergy BS copper busbars

Fixed/drawout device Front connection

Masterpact NW08/16 3P/4P b

Dd384529.eps

Masterpact NW20/25 3P/4P b

Masterpact NW32/40 3P/4P b

Masterpact Masterpact NW08/25 3P/4P NW32 3P/4P b b

Spacing rods for flat bars

04690 x 2

04690 x 2

04690 x 2

04690 x 2

04690 x 2

Connection

04602 (2) + 04605 (2) 04604 (2) + 04605 (2) 04607 (2) + 04642 04637 (3) + must + must be made + must be made + must be made be made 04860 04860 04860 04860

04637 (3) + 04642 + must be made 04860

Busbar cover (1)

(1) The cover is compulsory behind front plates designed for measurement devices. (2) Catalogue numbers 04604, 04605 and 04607 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (3) Catalogue number 04637 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

A-6

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

401E21101

Functional system

Functional units
Circuit breakers
Connection

Masterpact NW08 to NW40


Dedicated cubicle

Bottom using cables

Horizontal busbars
DD384610.eps

Fixed/drawout device Vertical rear connection

Masterpact NW08/32 b

Dd384528.eps

Masterpact NW40 3/4P


(3)

Terminal extension bars for connection

must be made (2)

(3)

Terminal extension bar supports

04694 x 2

(3)

Cable cover (1) Connection adapters 4000 A (up and downstream)

04861 -

(3)

b (3)

Busbar supports for connection between device / busbars Connection between device / busbars -

(3)

must be made (2)

(1) Form 1 cable cover. (2) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. (3) Please consult Schneider Electric.

401E21101

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

A-7

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Masterpact NT06 to NT16


Toggle and motor mechanism

Front connection
Dd380794.eps

Cable connection
Dd380841.eps Dd380842.eps Dd380843.eps Dd380844.eps Dd380845.eps

Device

Front conn. 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P b b b b b b b b

Arc-chute cover 47335 47336 47335 47336

Vert. conn. adapters 33642 33643 33642 33643 33642 33643 33642 33643

Cable-lug adapters

Spacing rods

Cable cover 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852 04852

Fixed device
NT06/10 NT12/16 33644 33645 04691 04691

Drawout device
NT06/10 NT12/16 33644 33645

04691 04691

Dd380795.eps

Canalis connection
Dd380841.eps Dd380842.eps Dd383684.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380847.eps

Device

Front conn.

Arc-chute cover

Canalis support

Canalis interfaces

Canalis/ device connection 04711 04712

Canalis cover

Fixed device
NT06/12 3P 4P b b 47335 47336

03561 03561

04703 04704

Drawout device
NT06/12 3P 4P b b

04871 + 04852 04871 + 04852 04871 + 04852 04871 + 04852

03561 03561

04703 04704

04711 04712

Rear connection
Dd380796.eps

Cable connection
Dd380849.eps Dd380850.eps

Device

Vertical rear connectors

NT06/16 b 04693 x 2 04854 must be made (1) (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.

Fixed/drawout device

Terminal extension bar support

Cable cover

Connection

Dd380797.eps

Rear connection
Dd380850.eps Dd385307.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380849.eps Dd380847.eps

Device

Vertical Terminal Canalis rear extension support conn. bar support

Canalis Canalis/ interfaces device connection

Canalis Connection cover

04871 + must be made 04854 (1) 4P b 04693 x 2 03561 04704 04714 04871 + must be made 04854 (1) (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. NT06/16 3P b

Fixed/drawout device

04693 x 2

03561

04703

04713

A-8

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21110

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Masterpact NT06 to NT16


Toggle and motor mechanism

Device installation
DD380647.eps Dd380852.eps Dd380853.eps Dd380836.eps Dd380854.eps

Device

NT06/10 front conn. NT12 front conn. NT16 front conn. NT06/16 rear conn.

Fixed device

No. of Mounting vert. plate mod. 12 17 14 17 14 11 16 03484 03484 03484 03484 03484 03484 03484

Cut-out front plate

Upstream front plate

Downstream front plate

cables Canalis cables Canalis cables cables Canalis

03692 03692 03692 03692 03692 03692 03692

03802 03804 + 03803 03804 03804 + 03803 03804 03801 03806

03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803

NT06/10 front conn. NT12 front conn. NT16 front conn. NT06/16 rear conn.

Drawout device

cables Canalis cables Canalis cables cables Canalis

13 18 15 18 15 11 16

03483 03483 03483 03483 03483 03483 03483

03691 03691 03691 03691 03691 03691 03691

03802 03804 + 03803 03804 03804 + 03803 03804 03805

03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803

Distribution
DD380648.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Dd380855.eps Dd380856.eps

Device

Front connectors Prefabricated connection 3P 4P 3P 4P b b b b 04475 04476 04489 04490

Cover for BB connection 04926 04926 04926 04926

NT06/12 NT16

Fixed device

NT06/12

3P b 04477 04926 4P b 04478 04926 NT16 3P b 04491 04926 4P b 04492 04926 Note: to make measurements: b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18.

Drawout device

DD380649.eps

Linergy BS busbars
Dd380855.eps Dd380857.eps DD380840.eps

Device

Front connectors Connection

NT06/16

Fixed device Drawout device

Free support for Cover for BB BB connection connection 04662 x 2 04926

must be made

NT06/16 b must be made 04662 x 2 04926 Note: to make measurements: b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.

400E21110

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-9

Functional system

400 mm wide functional units


Circuit breaker
Mounting
400
400

Masterpact NT06 to NT16 3P dedicated cubicle

Devices No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate

Masterpact NT Fixed
1 36 03489

Dd382506.eps

Drawout
1 36 03488 03699 [12] 03723 [12] 03722 [12] 03722 [12]

Front plate cut-out 03698 [12] [no. of vert. upstream (1) cut-out 03723 [12] mod.] for 72 x 72 mm or 96 x 96 mm meters or plain 03722 [12] downstream (1) plain 03722 [12]

(1) Hinged or reversible (left or right-hand opening) front plates connect directly to the framework, without a front-plate support frame.

Measurement-device installation

Measurement devices are installed on a front plate (03723) using plastic mounting plates with cut-outs. The front plate can hold: b six 72 x 72 mm cases b or four 96 x 96 mm cases + 2 switches.

Measurement-device
Dd382670.eps Dd382633.eps
60 60 40 10 0 40 10 0

Devices

Plastic mounting plate with cut-outs

Plain plastic mounting plate (blanking plate)

for 72 x 72 mm devices
Catalogue numbers Characteristics 03902

for 96 x 96 mm devices
03903

for 72 x 72 mm holes
03900

for 96 x 96 mm holes
03901

b Installation of three devices (72 x 72 mm cases) using plastic mounting plates (03902) and two devices (96 x 96 mm cases) + a switch using plastic mounting plates (03903) on a hinged front plate (03723). b The plain mounting plates have knock-outs for lamps, pushbuttons, switches or devices. Knock-outs for 03900: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45 x 45 mm device. Knock-outs for 03901: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45 x 45 or 72 x 72 mm device.

A-10

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

401E21900

Functional system

400 mm wide functional units


Circuit breaker
Distribution

Masterpact NT06 to NT16 3P dedicated cubicle

LGYE horizontal-busbar connections

Linergy BS horizontal-busbar connections

Devices Front connection

Fixed/drawout device Masterpact NT06/16 b

DD384519.EPS

Fixed/drawout device Masterpact NT06/16 b

Flat busbars rods

04692 x 2

04692 x 2

Barrier (1)

04855

04855

Horizontal-busbar connections 60/80 5 mm thick 50/60/80 10 mm thick

04602 (2) -

must be made 10mm thick 04636 (3) + connection must be made 10 mm thick

Distribution

Linergy LGY or LGYE or BS vertical-busbar connections

Devices Front connection

Fixed/drawout device Masterpact NT06/16 b

Flat busbars rods

04662

Barrier (1)

04855

Connection

must be made

Free support 04662 (1) A barrier must be installed behind front plate 03723 when measurement devices are installed. (2) Catalogue number 04602 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (3) Catalogue number 04636 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Connection between device and horizontal busbars must be made by the customer. Selection of Linergy BS bars for the connection: see pages B-26 - B-27. Selection of Linergy LGY or LGYE bars for the connection: see pages B-14 to B-17.

401E21900

DD383814.eps

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

A-11

Functional system

400 mm wide functional units


Circuit breaker
Connection Front using cables
Dd382672.eps

Masterpact NT06 to NT16 3P dedicated cubicle

Devices Front connection

Fixed Masterpact NT06/16 b

Withdrawable Masterpact NT06/16 b

Arc-chute cover

47335

Vertical connector adapters Cable-lug adapters Spacing rods

33642 33644 04691

33642 33644 04691

Accessories
Dd382513.eps Dd382514.eps

W = 400 4 cable tie supports for framework 08774

D = 400 08794

Dd382669.eps

D = 600 08794 + 08796

A-12

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

401E21900

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NS630b to NS1600


Vertical mounting
Toggle, rotary handle and motor mechanism

Front connection
DD383692.eps

Cable connection
Dd380842.eps Dd380843.eps Dd380844.eps Dd380845.eps

Device

Front conn.

Arc-chute cover

Vert. conn. adapters

Cable-lug adapters

Spacing rods

Cable cover

NS630b/1000 3P 4P NS1250/1600 3P 4P NS630b/1000 3P 4P NS1250/1600 3P 4P


DD383693.eps

Fixed device

b b b b b b b b

Drawout device

33596 33597 33596 33597

33642 33643 33642 33643 33642 33643 33642 33643

33644 33645

04691 04691

04851 04851 04851 04851 04852 04852 04852 04852

33644 33645

04691 04691

Canalis connection
Dd380846.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380842.eps Dd380847.eps

Device

Front conn.

Arc-chute cover

Canalis support

Canalis interfaces

NS630b/1250 3P 4P

Fixed device

Canalis/ device connection 04711 04712

Canalis cover

b b

33596 33597

03561 03561

04703 04704

NS630b/1250 3P

Drawout device
4P

04871 + 04851 04871 + 04851 04871 + 04852 04871 + 04852

b b

03561 03561

04703 04704

04711 04712

Cable connection
DD383694.eps Dd380849.eps

Device

Vertical rear connectors

NS630b/1600

Fixed device

Terminal extension bar support 04693 x 2 04693 x 2

Dd380850.eps

Cable cover

Connection

b b

NS630b/1600

Drawout device

04853 04854

must be made (1) must be made (1)

(1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.

DD383695.eps

Canalis connection
Dd380849.eps Dd380850.eps Dd380846.eps Dd380848.eps Dd380847.eps

Device

NS630b/1600 3P 4P

Fixed device

Vert. rear Terminal conn. extension bar support b b 04693 x 2 04693 x 2

Canalis support

Canalis interfaces

Canalis/ device connection 04713 04714

Canalis cover

03561 03561

04703 04704

NS630b/1600 3P 4P

Drawout device

04871 + 04853 04871 + 04853 04871 + 04854 04871 + 04854

b b

04693 x 2 04693 x 2

03561 03561

04703 04704

04713 04714

400E21130

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-13

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NS630b to NS1600


Vertical mounting
Toggle, rotary handle and motor mechanism

Device installation
Dd380836.eps Dd380853.eps Dd383549.eps Dd380852.eps Dd380854.eps

Device

NS630b/1000 cables front conn. Canalis NS1250 front cables conn. Canalis Fixed Compact NS.
Dd383700.eps

Fixed device

No. of Mounting vert. plate mod. 12 17 14 17 14 10 16 03482 03482 03482 03482 03482 03482 03482

Cut-out front plate

Upstream front plate

Downstream front plate

NS1600 front cables conn. NS630b/1600 cables rear conn. Canalis

03690(1) / 03701(2) 03802 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 + 03803 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 + 03803 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03804 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03690(1) / 03701(2) 03806

03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803

NS630b/1000 cables front conn. Canalis NS1250 front cables conn. Canalis NS1600front cables conn. NS630b/1600 cables rear conn. Canalis Withdrawable Compact NS.

Drawout device

13 18 15 18 15 11 16

03483 03483 03483 03483 03483 03483 03483

03691 03691 03691 03691 03691 03691 03691

03802 03804 + 03803 03804 03804 + 03803 03804 03805

03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803 03803

(1) For toggle and rotary handle (in this case, the front plate should be removed when handling the plate supporting frame). (2) For motor mechanism.

Distribution
Dd383701.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Dd380855.eps Dd380856.eps

Device

NS630b/1250 NS1600

Fixed device

Front connectors 3P 4P 3P 4P b b b b

Prefabricated connection 04485 04486 04487 04488

Cover for BB connection 04926 04926 04926 04926

3P b 04477 04926 4P b 04478 04926 NS1600 3P b 04491 04926 4P b 04492 04926 Note: to make measurements: vv install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values vv or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate downstream (03801). Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. NS630b/1250
Dd383702.eps

Withdrawable device

Linergy BS busbars
Dd380855.eps Dd380857.eps Dd380840.eps

Device

Front connectors b

Connection

Free support for BB connection

Cover for BB connection 04926

NS630b/1600

must be made (1) 04662 x 2

04926 NS630b/1600 b must be made (1) 04662 x 2 Note: to make measurements: vv install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values vv or install the CTs on the horizontal busbars; in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate downstream (03801). (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.

A-14

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21130

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NS630b to NS1000


Horizontal mounting
Toggle and rotary handle

Connection
Dd383550.eps

Front connection in 400 mm deep framework


Device

Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000

Connection transfer assembly + cover

3P 04483 (1) 4P 04484 (1) (1) Three 300 mm or six 185 mm cables can be connected per phase with lugs that are not of the two-metal type.

Rear connection in 800 mm deep framework (2x400mm)


Device Rear connection cover 3P 4P 04844 04844

Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 Connection transfer assembly.

Installation
Dd383551.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Fixed Compact NS
NS630b/1000 3P/4P 7 (1) 03480 03687 (1) Mounting of 03480 + connection transfert assembly 04483 or 04484 needs 8 vertical modules (use of one complementary front plate 1 module 03801).

Distribution
Dd383552.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device Prefabricated connection Connection cover Arc-chute cover 33596 33597

Fixed Compact NS
3P 04473 04842 4P 04474 04842 Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. NS630b/1000

Prefabricated connection + cover.


Dd383553.eps

Linergy LGYE and Linergy BS busbars


Device NS630b/1000 Connection Connection cover Arc-chute cover

Fixed Compact NS, front connection


3P must be made (1) 04842 33596 04842 33597 4P must be made (1) (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.

400E21130

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-15

Functional system

400 mm wide functional units


Circuit breakers

Compact NS630b/1600 Dedicated cubicle

Mounting
400
400

Dedicated cubicle

Devices

Toggle, rotary handle and motor mechanism

Fixed Compact NS630b/1600 3/4P


No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] cut-out upstream front plate (1) cut-out for 72 x 72 mm or 96 x 96 mm meters or plain downst. front plate (1) plain 1 36 03487 03697 [12] 03723 [12]

DD382506.eps

Withdrawable Compact NS630b/1600 3P


1 36 03488 03699 [12] 03723 [12]

03722 [12] 03722 [12]

03722 [12] 03722 [12]

(1) Hinged or reversible (left or right-hand opening) front plates connect directly to the framework, without a front-plate support frame.

Measurement-device installation

Measurement devices are installed on a front plate (03723) using plastic mounting plates with cut-outs. The front plate can hold: b six 72 x 72 mm cases b or four 96 x 96 mm cases + 2 switches.

Measurement-device
Dd382670.eps Dd382633.eps
60 60 40 10 0 40 10 0

Devices

Plastic mounting plate with cut-outs

Plain plastic mounting plate (blanking plate)

for 72 x 72 mm devices
Catalogue numbers Characteristics 03902

for 96 x 96 mm devices
03903

for 72 x 72 mm holes
03900

for 96 x 96 mm holes
03901

b Installation of three devices (72 x 72 mm cases) using plastic mounting plates (03902) and two devices (96 x 96 mm cases) + a switch using plastic mounting plates (03903) on a hinged front plate (03723). b The plain mounting plates have knock-outs for lamps, pushbuttons, switches or devices. Knock-outs for 03900: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45x45 mm device. Knock-outs for 03901: 4 dia. 16 mm, 5 dia. 22 mm or one for a 45x45 or 72x72 mm device.

A-16

Version : 1.1

16/04/2013

401E21910

Functional system

400 mm wide functional units


Circuit breakers
Distribution

Compact NS630b/1600 Dedicated cubicle

Linergy LGY or LGYE horizontal-busbar connections

Copper horizontal-busbar connections

Devices
Front connection

Fixed Compact NS630b/1600 3P/4P


b

DD384519.EPS

Withdrawable Compact NS630b/1600 3P


b

Fixed Compact NS630b/1600 3P/4P


b

Withdrawable Compact NS630b/1600 3P


b

Flat busbars rods

04692 x 2

04692 x 2

04692 x 2

04692 x 2

Barrier (1)

04855

04855

04855

04855

Horizontal-busbar connections 60/80 5 mm thick 50/60/80 10 mm thick

04602 (2) -

04602 -

must be made (4) 10mm thick 04636 (3) + connection must be made (4) 10 mm thick

must be made (4) 10mm thick 04636 + connection must be made (4) 10 mm thick

Distribution

Linergy LGY or LGYE or BS vertical-busbar connections

Devices
Front connection

Fixed Compact NS630b/1600 3P/4P


b

DD383814.eps

Withdrawable Compact NS630b/1600 3P


b

Flat busbars rods

04662

04662

Connection

must be made (4)

must be made (4)

Barrier (1)

04855

04855

Free support 04662 (1) A barrier must be installed behind front plate 03723 when measurement devices are installed. (2) Catalogue number 04602 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (3) Catalogue number 04636 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase. (4) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric.

04662

Connection between device and horizontal busbars must be made by the customer. Selection of Linergy BS bars for the connection: see pages B-26 - B-27. Selection of Linergy LGYE or LGY bars for the connection: see pages B-14 or B-17. 401E21910 Version : 1.1 16/04/2013 A-17

Functional system

400 mm wide functional units


Circuit breakers
Connection Front using cables
Dd382672.eps Dd382669.eps

Compact NS630b/1600 Dedicated cubicle

Devices Front connection

Compact NS630b/1600 fixed b

Compact NS630b/1600 withdrawable b

Arc-chute cover

3P: 33596 4P: 33597

Vertical connector adapters Cable-lug adapters Spacing rods

3P: 33642 4P: 33643 3P: 33644 4P: 33645 04691

3P: 33642 3P: 33644 04691

Accessories
Dd382513.eps Dd382514.eps

W = 400 4 cable tie supports for framework 08774

D = 400 08794

D = 600 08794 + 08796

A-18

Version : 1.1

16/04/2013

401E21910

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NS1600b to 3200

Connection
Dd383546.eps

Front connection using cables


DD380830.eps Dd380851.eps

Device

Front connectors

Verticalconnection adapters

Terminal extension bar support

Cubicle depth (mm)

Fixed device
3P b 33975 04694 400 4P b 33976 04694 400 NS2000/2500 3P b 33975 04694 600 4P b 33976 04694 600 600 NS3200 3P b must be made (1) 04694 600 4P b must be made (1) 04694 (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. NS1600b Compact NS3200.

Device installation
Dd383547.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 14

Mounting plate

Cut-out front Upstream plate front plate

Downstream front plate

Fixed device
NS1600b/3200 03501 03716 03802 03804

Compact NS1600b.

400E21120

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-19

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NS1600b to 3200

Dd383548.eps

Distribution

Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY or Linergy BS busbars


Device Connection Free support for BB connection Cover for BB connection

Fixed device
3P must be made 04662 x 2 04926 (1) (2) 4P 04926 + 04927 NS2000/2500 3P must be made 04662 x 2 (1) (2) 4P 04926 + 04927 NS3200 3P must be made 04662 x 2 (1) (2) 4P (1) For the connection to flat busbars > 1600 A, order one joint per phase: b 1 joint for busbars, W = 50/60 mm (04640) b 1 joint for busbars, W = 80/100 mm (04641). (1) Connections must be made following bars drawings supplied by Schneider Electric. NS1600b Note: to make measurements: b install the CTs on the horizontal busbars (busbar connection); in this case, an additional module is required; add a plain front plate (03801) b or install a Micrologic control unit capable of displaying the values. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-14. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-26.

Compact NS1600b on Linergy LGY.

A-20

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21120

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Presentation of Compact NSX circuit breakers for Prisma P


The latest generation of a range that has set the standard in moulded-case circuit breakers, Compact NSX steps even further ahead to meet your needs in continuity of service and optimised energy use.

PB103371-25.eps

A high-performance range for each application


Breaking capacity at 415V 25 kA 36 kA 50 kA 70 kA 100 kA 150 kA

PB103354-25.eps

Performance level

NSX-B NSX-F NSX-N NSX-H NSX-S NSX-L

Applications
Usual applications with low short-circuit levels, e.g. service sector applications, retail stores, etc. Small industrial installations High performance at a reasonable cost Demanding applications, e.g. merchant marine, metallurgy, etc.

A range of intelligent circuit breakers


PD391292.eps

Compact NSX improves management of electrical installations


In addition to protection functions, the new generation of Compact NSX moulded case circuit breakers provides new features (analysis, measurements and communication) with access to information: b either directly on the LCD screen of the trip unit to set the circuit breaker or read the main electrical values, including U, I, f, P(W) and E (kWh) b or on the FDM 121 display on the front of the Prisma P switchboard (duct door with special front plate) for quick access to a greater wealth of information. A cable connects the display to the trip unit without any special settings or configuration, making it easy to personalise alarms and displays or read event logs and maintenance indicators.

400E00035

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-21

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Presentation of Compact NSX circuit breakers for Prisma P

Integration of Compact NSX in Prisma P


PB391288-65.eps

The Compact NSX range is perfectly interchangeable with Compact NSX. As for Compact NS, installation of Compact NSX devices in a Prisma P functional switchboard is very easy, based on the same functional-unit system: b same mounting plates as for the Compact NS b same power connections (Linergy FC distribution block and prefabricated connections) b identical control connections b identical partitioning (form 2b to 4b) b same modularity (taking into account the safety clearances). This greatly facilitates extension, maintenance and retrofitting operations in Prisma P switchboards. b Only the front plates have been changed for this new range.

A new front plate for a new circuit breaker


PB391289-135.eps

The front of Compact NSX circuit breakers has an eye-pleasing curved profile, making Prisma P switchboards even more attractive. This change is perfectly in step with the new cut-out for Prisma P front plates (the same cut-out for all types of controls).

Toggle

Motor mechanism module

Rotary handle

Installation architectures for the measurement function


PB391290-60.eps

As mentioned above, Compact NSX circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic 5/6 A or E trip units provide measurements that can be read on the FDM121 display module or directly on the circuit breaker. This makes it possible to optimise the space required by the functional unit. Installation times have also been reduced with respect to system with current transformers. What is more, installation and connections are made easier because the FDM121 is installed just like the 96 x 96 mm Power Meter PM devices: b direct cut-out in a plain door b on a front for one or four 96 x 96 devices in the functional unit or the 300 mm wide duct door.
Note: a single 24 V DC power supply is required to power both the FDM121 display and the Micrologic trip unit.
DD384027.eps

PB391291-57.eps

OK e

Mod

OK e

Mod

OK e

Mod

OK e

Mod

For more information on the communication functions of Compact NSX, see the ULPsystem user manual, doc. no. TRV99100, and the Compact NSX catalogue, doc. no. LVPED208001_EN.

A-22

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00035

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Horizontal Toggle Fixed
Device

Installation
DD383868.eps

No. of vertical modules 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3 4 3 4 4 5

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Fixed Compact NSX, Vigicompact NSX or ammeter


NSX100/250 NSX100/250 + ammeter or Vigicompact NSX400/630 03411 03412 03411 03412 03451 03452 03604 03606 03604 03606 03643 03644

Busbar connection
DD380513.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device NSX100/250 NSX400/630 3P 4P 3P 4P Prefabricated connection 04423 04424 04453 04454

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Prefabricated connection.
DD380693.eps

Linergy LGYE or Linergy BS busbars


Device NSX100/250 Connection Short terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P must be made 4P must be made NSX400/630 3P must be made 4P must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64.

Short terminal shields.

DD380694.eps

Connection
Device

Front connection Long terminal or Connection transfer shields assembly 3P 4P 3P 4P LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594 04425 04426 04455 04456

Rear connection Short terminal shields

Fixed Compact NSX


NSX100/250 NSX400/630 LV429515 (1) LV429516 (1) LV432591 (1) LV432592 (1)

Fixed Vigicompact NSX


Vigi NSX100/250

Connection transfer assembly.

3P LV429517 04429 (2) + LV429515 LV429515 (1) 4P LV429518 04430 (2) + LV429516 LV429516 (1) Vigi NSX400/630 3P LV432593 04459 (2) + LV432591 LV432591 (1) 4P LV432594 04460 (2) + LV432592 LV432592 (1) (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42. (2) No connection.

400E21150

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-23

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Vertical Toggle Fixed
Device

Installation
DD380506.eps

No. of devices

No. of vertical modules (1) 6 7 11 11 13 13

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Upstream Downstream front plate front plate

Fixed Compact NSX


NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX400 NSX630 NSX630 3/4 3/4 1 2 1 2 03420 03420 03461 03461 03461 03461 03243 03243 03275 03663 03275 03663 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803

Fixed Vigicompact NSX

03801 03802 03802 03803

Dd383554.eps

Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 8 03420 03241 03801 03802 Vigi NSX250 3/4 9 03420 03241 03802 Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297 03802 03802 Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297 03801 03803 Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 (1) For the Compact NSX100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Linergy FC distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream plain front plate (03802).

Accessories
Dd381339.eps

Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.

Busbar connection
DD380508.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device NSX100/250 No. of devices 4 x 3P 3 x 4P Linergy FC with connection 04403 04404

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Linergy LGYE and Linergy BS busbars


Device NSX100/250 No. of devices 4 x 3P 3 x 4P Linergy FC without connection 04407 04408

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Accessories
Linergy FC distribution block with connection. Linergy FC tooth-caps Linergy FC distribution block: see page B-62.

Cat. no.
04809

Connection
DD380696.eps

Device NSX100/250

Front connection Long terminal shields

Rear connection Short terminal shields

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P LV429517 LV429515 (1) 4P LV429518 LV429516 (1) NSX400/630 3P LV432593 LV432591 (1) 4P LV432594 LV432592 (1) (1) Size reduced one module downstream. Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.

Front connection with terminal shields.

A-24

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21150

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Horizontal Toggle Plug-in
Device

Installation
DD383869.eps

No. of vertical modules 3P 4P 3P 4P 3 4 4 5

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


NSX100/250 NSX400/630 03413 03414 03453 03454 03604 03606 03643 03644

Busbar connection
DD384325.eps

Linergy busbars
Device NSX100/250 3P 4P 3P 4P Prefabricated connection 04431 04432 04461 04462 Adaptator + terminal shields LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

NSX400/630

Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.


Dd383557.eps

Linergy Evolution and copper flat busbars


Device NSX100/250 Connection Adaptator + terminal shields LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432591 LV432585 + LV432592

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P must be made 4P must be made NSX400/630 3P must be made 4P must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64.

Terminal shields.

Dd383558.eps

Connection
Device

Front connection Adaptator + long or transfer assembly terminal shields (w/o connection) + adaptator + long terminal shields 3P 4P LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594 04429 + LV429306 + LV429517 04430 + LV429307 + LV429518 04459 + LV432584 + LV432593 04460 + LV432585 + LV432594

Rear connection Long insulated terminals

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


NSX100/250 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585

NSX400/630 Transfer assembly (w/o connection) + long terminal shields.

3P

4P

400E21150

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-25

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Vertical Toggle Plug-in
Device

Dd383559.eps

Installation

No. of devices

NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX400 NSX630 NSX630

Plug-in Compact NSX


3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 1 2 1 2

No. of Mounting Cut-out vertical plate front plate (2) modules 9 10 7 8 11 11 13 13 03421 (1) 03421 (1) 03423 03423 03461 03461 03461 03461 03243 03243 03243 03243 03275 03663 03275 03663

Upstream front plate

Downst. front plate 03801 03802 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803

03421.
DD383621.eps

Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 11 03421 (1) 03241 03801 + 03802 03801 Vigi NSX250 3/4 12 03421 (1) 03241 03801 + 03802 03802 Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 9 03423 (2) 03241 03801 03801 Vigi NSX250 3/4 10 03423 (2) 03241 03801 03802 Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297 03802 Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666 03802 03802 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297 03801 03803 Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 (1) Not compatible with Linergy FC distribution block. For feeding by cables, add an upstream plain front plate of 2 modules (03802). (2) Compatible with Linergy FC distribution block.

Plug-in Vigicompact NSX

03801 + 03802 03801 + 03802 03801 03801 03801 03802 03802 03803

DD383620.eps

Accessories
Dd381339.eps

03423. Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.

Busbar connection
Dd383560.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device No. of devices

4 x 3P 04405 (1) LV429306 LV429307 3 x 4P 04406 (1) (1) Catalogue number 04924 is recommended when installing those references. NSX100/250

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Linergy FC (with connection)

Adaptator

Linergy LGYE and Linergy BS busbars


Device No. of devices

NSX100/250

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


4 x 3P 3 x 4P

Linergy FC (w/o connection) 04407 04408

Adaptator

LV429306 LV429307

Linergy FC distribution block with connection.

Linergy FC tooth-caps Linergy FC distribution block: see page B-62.

Accessories

04809

Cat. no.

Dd383561.eps

Connection
Device NSX100/250 3P 4P NSX400/630 3P 4P

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594

Front connection Rear connection Adaptator + long terminal shields Long insulated terminals LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585

Front connection with long terminal shields.

A-26

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21150

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Horizontal Rotary handle, motor mechanism Fixed, plug-in
Device NSX100/250 3P 4P 3P 4P No. of vertical modules Mounting plate 03413 03414 03453 (2) 03454 (2) Cut-out front plate 03604 03606 03643 03644

Installation
Dd383562.eps

Collar and raiser

Fixed or plug-in Compact NSX


3 4 4 5

NSX400/630 (1)

NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604 LV429285 Rotary handle 4P 4 03414 03606 LV429285 NSX100/250 3P 3 03413 03604 LV429285 Motor mech. 4P 4 03414 03606 LV429285 NSX400/630 (1) 3P 4 03453 03643 LV429285 Rotary handle 4P 5 03454 03644 LV429285 (1) NSX400/630 3P 4 03453 03643 LV429285 Motor mech. 4P 5 03454 03644 LV429285 (1) For direct installation under horizontal busbars, the busbars must be covered: see page B-38. (2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism.

Fixed or plug-in Vigicompact NSX

Busbar connection
Dd383563.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device NSX100/250 NSX400/630 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P Prefabricated connection 04427 04428 must be made must be made 04427 04428 must be made must be made Terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 LV429306 + LV429515 LV429307 + LV429516 LV432584 + LV432591 LV432585 + LV432592

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

NSX100/250 NSX400/630

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Prefabricated connection + terminal shields.


Dd383564.eps

Linergy LGYE and Linergy BS busbars


Device NSX100/250 NSX400/630

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P 4P 3P 4P must be made must be made must be made must be made

Connection

Terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 LV429306 + LV429515 LV429307 + LV429516 LV432584 + LV432591 LV432585 + LV432592

Terminal shields.

3P must be made 4P must be made 3P must be made NSX400/630 4P must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64. NSX100/250

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Connection
Dd383565.eps

Device

NSX100/250 3P Vigi NSX100/250 4P NSX400/630 3P Vigi NSX400/630 4P NSX100/250

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594

Front connection Adaptator + or transfer assembly long terminal (w/o connection) shields + adaptator + long terminal shields 04429 + LV429515 04430 + LV429516 04459 + LV432591 04460 + LV432592 04429 + LV429306 + LV429517 04430 + LV429307 + LV429518 04459 + LV432584 + LV432591 04460 + LV432585 + LV432592

Rear connection Short Long insulated terminal terminals shields

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P LV429306 + LV429517

LV429515 (1) LV429516 (1) LV432591 (1) LV432592 (1) LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 LV432476 + LV432585

Transfer assembly (w/o connection) + long terminal shields. NSX400/630

4P LV429307 + LV429518 3P LV432584 + LV432593 4P LV432585 + LV432594

400E21150

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-27

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Vertical Rotary handle, motor mechanism Fixed, plug-in
Device No. No. of Mount. dev. vert. plate mod.(1) 6 7 11 11 13 13 8 9 13 13 15 15 03422 03422 03461 (2) 03461 (2) 03461 (2) 03461 (2) 03422 03422 03461 03461 03461 03461 03421 03421 03461 (2) 03461 (2) 03461 (2) 03461 (2) Cut-out front plate 03243 03243 03275 03663 03275 03663 03244 03244 03297 03666 03297 03666 03243 03243 03275 03663 03275 03663 Upst. front plate

Dd383566.eps

Installation

NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX400 NSX630 NSX630

Fixed Compact NSX


3/4 3/4 1 2 1 2 3/4 3/4 1 2 1 2

Downst. Collar and raiser front plate 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3) LV429285 + LV429316 (3)

Vigi NSX100/160 Vigi NSX250 Vigi NSX400 (rot.) Vigi NSX400 (rot.) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 NSX400 NSX630 NSX630
Dd383567.eps

Fixed Vigicompact NSX

03801 03802 03802 03803

Plug-in Compact NSX


3/4 3/4 1 2 1 2

03801 03802 03802 03802 03802 03801 03803 03803 03803 03801 03801 03801 03802 03802 03803 03801 03802 03801 03802 03802 03803

Vigi NSX100/160 3/4 9 03421 03244 03801 03801 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX250 3/4 10 03421 03244 03801 03802 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 1 13 03461 03297 03802 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX400 (rot.) 2 13 03461 03666 03802 03802 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 1 15 03461 03297 03801 03803 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) Vigi NSX630 (rot.) 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 LV429285 + LV429316 (3) (1) For the Compact NSX100/250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Linergy FC distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add an upstream plain front plate (03802). (2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism. (3) For ammeter, take LV429285 + LV429318 catalogue numbers. Blanking plate for vertical NSX100/250 (03249), Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate (03222): see page C-23.

Plug-in Vigicompact NSX

7 8 11 11 13 13

Accessories

Busbar connection
Dd383568.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device No. of devices

Linergy FC (with connection) Fixed device

Linergy FC (with connection) Plug in device

Adaptator

4 x 3P 04405 + LV429306 04405 (1) 04406 + LV429307 3 x 4P 04406 (1) (1) Catalogue number 04924 is recommended when installing those references. NSX100/250

Fixed or plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Linergy LGYE and Linergy BS busbars


Device No. of devices Linergy FC (w/o connection) Fixed device

Linergy FC (w/o connection) Plug in device + +

Adaptator

Linergy FC distribution block with connection.

NSX100/250

Fixed or plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


4 x 3P 3 x 4P 04407 04408 04407 04408

LV429306 LV429307

Dd383569.eps

Connection

Linergy FC tooth-caps Linergy FC distribution block: see page B-62. Device NSX100/250 NSX400/630 NSX100/250 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P Front connection Adaptator + long terminal shields LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594

Accessories

Cat. no.
04809

Fixed Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

Rear connection Short terminal Long insulated shields terminals LV429515 (1) LV429516 (1) LV432591 (1) LV432592 (1) LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585

Plug-in Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432595 4P

Front connection with long terminal shields.

NSX400/630

3P 4P

A-28

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21150

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Horizontal All controls Withdrawable
Device No. of devices 1 1

Installation
DD383870.eps

No. of vertical modules 5 6

Mounting plate 03415 03462 (1)

Cut-out front plate 03618 03657

Downstr. front plate LV429284 LV432534

Compact NSX
NSX100/250 NSX400/630

Vigicompact NSX

Vigi NSX100/250 1 5 03415 03618 LV429285 03657 LV429285 Vigi NSX400/630 1 6 03462 (1) toggle, rotary handle (1) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism.

Busbar connection
Dd383571.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device NSX100/250 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P 3P 4P Prefabricated connection 04427 04428 must be made must be made 04431 04432 04461 04462 Adaptator + long terminal shields LV429306 + LV429515 LV429307 + LV429516 LV432584 + LV432591 LV432585 + LV432592

Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

D C B A

NSX400/630

Toggle Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


G F E D C B A

NSX100/250 NSX400/630

Prefabricated connection + long terminal shields.


Dd383572.eps

Linergy LGYE and Linergy BS busbars


Device NSX100/250 Connection Adaptator + long terminal shields LV429306 + LV429515 LV429307 + LV429516 LV432584 + LV432591 LV432585 + LV432592

Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P must be made 4P must be made NSX400/630 3P must be made 4P must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64.

Long terminal shields.

Connection
Dd383573.eps

Device

Front connection Adaptator + long terminal shields

Rear connection or transfer assembly Long insulated (w/o connection) terminals + adaptator + long terminal shields 04429 + LV429306 + LV429517 04430 + LV429307 + LV429518 04459 + LV432584 + LV432591 04460 + LV432585 + LV432592 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585

NSX100/250

Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX


3P LV429306 + LV429517

4P NSX400/630 Transfer assembly (w/o connection) + long terminal shields. 3P 4P

LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594

400E21150

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-29

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Compact NSX100 to NSX630


Vertical All controls Withdrawable
Device No. of devices

Installation
Dd383574.eps

No. of Mounting Cut-out vert. plate front mod. plate 8 9 11 11 11 13 13 13 10 11 03421 03421 03461 03243 03243 03275

Upstream Downst. front front plate plate 03802 03802 03801 03801 03802 03802 03802 03803 03802 03802 03801 03802 03801 03801 03802 03802 03802 03803 03801 03802

Collar and raiser (1 per device) LV429284 (1) LV429284 (1) LV432534

Compact NSX
NSX100/160 NSX250 NSX400 toggle NSX400 rotary handle, motor mech. NSX400 NSX630 toggle NSX630 rotary handle, motor mech. NSX630 Vigi NSX100/160 Vigi NSX250 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2

03461 (2) 03275 03461 (2) 03663 03461 03275 03461 (2) 03275 03461 (2) 03663 03421 03421 03244 03244

LV432534 (1) LV432534

LV432534 (1) LV429285 + LV429284 (1) LV429285 + LV429284 (1) LV429285 + LV432534 LV429285

Vigicompact NSX

Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 03297 03802 toggle 03297 03802 Vigi NSX400 1 13 03461 rotary handle Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 03666 03802 03802 LV429285 toggle + LV432534 03666 03802 03802 LV429285 Vigi NSX400 2 13 03461 rotary handle, motor mech. 03803 LV429285 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 03297 03801 + LV432534 toggle 03297 03801 03803 LV429285 Vigi NSX630 1 15 03461 rotary handle Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 03666 03803 03803 LV429285 toggle + LV432534 03666 03803 03803 LV429285 Vigi NSX630 2 15 03461 rotary handle, motor mech. (1) For devices with toggle only. (2) Catalogue number 03460 is recommended when installing an Compact NSX with a motor mechanism.

Connection
Dd383575.eps

Device NSX100/250 3P 4P NSX400/630 3P 4P

Front connection Adaptator + long terminal shields LV429306 + LV429517 LV429307 + LV429518 LV432584 + LV432593 LV432585 + LV432594

Rear connection Long insulated terminals LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429306 LV429235 + LV429236 + LV429307 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432584 LV432475 + LV432476 + LV432585

Withdrawable Compact NSX and Vigicompact NSX

A-30

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21150

Functional system

Functional units and distribution


Circuit breakers
Mounting
650

Easypact CVS100/630 Horizontal fixed mounting

Horizontal fixed
DD383868.eps

Devices

Toggle

Easypact CVS100/250 Easypact Vigi CVS100/250


3P Number of devices per plate No. of vertical modules Mounting plates Cut-out front plate [No. of vertical modules] Short terminal shields (1) 1 3 03411 03611 [3] LV429515 4P 1 4 03412 03612 [4] LV429516 LV429518

Easypact CVS400/630 Easypact Vigi CVS400/630


3P 1 4 03451 03651 [4] LV432591 LV432593 4P 1 5 03452 03652 [5] LV432592 LV432594

LV429517 Long terminal shields (1) (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning.

Mounting
650

Horizontal fixed
Dd383562.eps

Devices

Rotary handle

Easypact CVS100/250 Easypact Vigi CVS100/250


3P Number of devices per plate No. of vertical modules Mounting plates Cut-out front plate [No. of vertical modules] Collar and raiser (1) Short terminal shields (2) Long terminal shields (2) 1 3 03413 03604 [3] LV429285 LV429515 LV429517 4P 1 4 03414 03606 [4] LV429285 LV429516 LV429518

Easypact CVS400/630 Easypact Vigi CVS400/630


3P 1 4 03453 03643 [4] LV429285 + LV429527 LV432591 LV432593 4P 1 5 03454 03644 [5] LV429285 + LV429527 LV432592 LV432594

(1) Vigi CVS only. (2) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning. Note: temperature derating values for Easypact CVS: see page D-45.

401E21151

Version : 1.1

16/04/2013

A-31

Functional system

Functional units and distribution


Circuit breakers
Mounting
650

Easypact CVS 100/630 Vertical fixed mounting

Vertical fixed
DD380506.eps

Devices No. of devices per plate No. of vertical modules Mounting plates Front plates with cut-out [No. of vertical upstream modules] downstream Short terminal shields (1) Long terminal shields Divisible blanking plate for CVS

Toggle

Easypact CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 9 03420 03243 [5] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] 3P: LV429515 4P: LV429516 3P: LV429517 4P: LV429518 03249

Vigi CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 11 03420 03241 [7] 03802 [2] 03802 [2]

Easypact CVS400/630 3P/4P


1 13 03461 03273 [9] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] 3P: LV432591 4P: LV432592 3P: LV432593 4P: LV432594

03249 + 03221

Divisible blanking plate for CVS Vigi (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning.

Mounting
650

Vertical fixed
Dd383566.eps

Devices No. of devices per plate No. of vertical modules Mounting plates Front plates with cut-out [No. of vertical upstream modules] downstream Collar and raiser Short terminal shields (1) Long terminal shields

Rotary handle

Easypact CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 9 03422 03243 [5] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] 3P: LV429515 4P: LV429516 3P: LV429517 4P: LV429518

Vigi CVS100/250
4 x 3P / 3 x 4P 11 03422 03244 [7] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] LV429285

Easypact CVS400/630 3P/4P


1 13 03461 03275 [9] 03802 [2] 03802 [2] 3P: LV432591 4P: LV432592 3P: LV432593 4P: LV432594 -

Divisible blanking plate for CVS 03249 (1) Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning.

A-32

Version : 1.1

16/04/2013

401E21151

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Easypact EZC100
Vertical Fixed Toggle
Device

Installation
DD383576.eps

No. of devices No. of vertical Mounting per row modules plate

Cut-out front plate

Long terminal shields (set of 2)

Easypact
EZC100 15 x 1P 5 x 3P 3 x 4P 5 5 5 03502 03502 03502 03303 03303 03303 EZATSHD3P EZATSHD4P

Accessories Designation
1 divisible blanking plate, H = 85 mm, W = 147 mm colour: white RAL 9001

Cat. no.
03249

Easypact EZC100 1P.


Dd383577.eps

Easypact EZC100 3P.

400E21151

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-33

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Easypact EZC250/EZCV250 Easypact EZC400

Installation
DD384003.eps

Vertical devices
Device No. of devices per row 4 x 3P 3 x 4P 2 x 3P 2 x 4P No. of vertical modules 7 7 10 10 Mounting plate Cut-out front plate Long terminal shields (set of 2) EZETSHD3PN EZETSHD4PN EZ4TSHD3P EZ4TSHD4P

Easypact
EZC250/EZCV250 EZC400

03504 03504 03505 03505

03305 03305 03307 03307

Easypact EZC250/EZCV250.
DD384004.eps

Horizontal devices
Device No. of devices per row 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P No. of vertical modules 4 4 5 5 Mounting plate Cut-out front plate Long terminal shields (set of 2) EZETSHD3P EZETSHD4P EZ4TSHD3P EZ4TSHD4P

Easypact
EZC250/EZCV250 EZC400

03504 03504 03505 03505

03304 03304 03306 03306

Easypact EZC400.

A-34

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21151

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Modular devices
Multi 9 or Acti 9
NG160, NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breakers INS40/160 switch-disconnectors
Presentation
A rigid modular rail Made using an aluminium alloy, the rail design is extremely rigid. The rail supports are crimp mounted. Fast mounting The rail supports have positioning studs to guide the rail on the framework. Only two mounting screws are required. Multiple functions A number of devices clip directly onto the rails, including 80 A and 200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks, all horizontal cable-running accessories such as cable straps and trunking supports, as well as the supports for Linergy TB earth bars. What is more, for cable running to the Linergy TB terminal block at the top or bottom of the cubicle, the supports are designed to allow the passage to two vertical trunking sections on the left and right. Supply from all directions Supply to the rows, using Linergy FH or Linergy FM distribution blocks, can be via: b Linergy BS or Linergy BW insulated busbars installed behind the devices b Linergy BS or Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY, Linergy BS busbars installed in a busbar compartment.

Presentation
PB105004.eps

Distribution
80 and 200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks b fast and secure front connection using spring terminals b reliable connections, will not loosen over time, insensitive to vibrations and thermal b variations b all types of modular devices can be mixed b easy balancing of phases b interchangeable devices b easy installation upgrades b fully insulated (IPxxB).
Compact NSX400 with motor mechanism, supplying rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices via Linergy BW insulated busbars.

Linergy FH b direct connection to device terminals or via a connector b fully insulated b can be cut to length.

PB105005.eps

Cable running
Straps b easy and fast to install b low cost b perfectly organised and integrated cable running b professional finish. Trunking b Traditional solution.

400E21400

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-35

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Modular devices

Multi 9 or Acti 9 y 63A

Multi 9 or Acti 9 type modular devices


Dd380771.eps

Device

All Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices

No. of vertical modules

Modular rail

Modular front plate 03204

All supply systems (Linergy FH, Linergy 4 FM) with cable straps and trunking sections

03401

Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A


Connection via 63/80 A Linergy FM or Linergy FH with cable straps 3 03401 03203

Capacity of modular rail: 48 modules (9 mm).


200 A Linergy FM. Cable running: trunking. Mounting requires 4 vertical modules. Note: For a modular row with a 160 A (half row) and 200 A Linergy FM distribution block positioned directly below a non-modular mounting plate (Compact, etc.), or at the top of a switchboard: add one module (i.e. 4 + 1) and a plain upstream front plate (03801).

Dd380772.eps

Linergy FH. Cable running: cable straps. Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.
Dd381305.eps

80 A Linergy FM. Cable running: cable straps. Mounting requires 3 vertical modules.

3 rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices


Device
Dd382443.eps

No. of vertical modules

Modular rail

Designation
3 rows of Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A supply via Linergy FH or Linergy FM distribution blocks (63/80 A) Cable running using cables straps 8 03401 x 3

Modular front plate 3 rows 03223

Capacity of modular rail: 48 modules (9 mm).

A-36

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21400

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Modular devices
80/160A
NG160, NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breakers INS40/160 switch-disconnectors

NG160 circuit breaker


DD380769.eps

Device

NG160, Vigi NG160 5 03402 + 04227 (1) To add modular devices to the row, order a raised DIN rail (04227).

NG160 circuit breaker

No. of vertical modules

Modular rail adjustable (1)

Modular front plate 03205

Capacity of modular rail: 48 modules (9 mm).


Note: Width of NG160 circuit breakers: NG160 3P: 10 modules NG160 4P: 14 modules Vigi NG160 3P: 24 modules Vigi NG160 4P: 27 modules

NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breaker


Dd382416.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules

Modular rail

Modular front plate

NG125, C120 or iC120 circuit breaker


NG125, Vigi NG125 C120 or iC120, Vigi C120 or Vigi iC120 5 03401 03205

Direct supply via cables. Capacity of modular rail: 48 modules (9 mm).


Note: width of NG125 circuit breakers: NG125 3P: 9 modules NG125 4P: 12 modules Vigi NG125 3P y 63 A: fixed sensitivity 18 modules adjustable sensitivity 20 modules > 63 A: fixed sensitivity 20 modules adjustable sensitivity 20 modules Vigi NG125 4P y 63 A: fixed sensitivity 21 modules adjustable sensitivity 23 modules > 63 A: fixed sensitivity 23 modules adjustable sensitivity 23 modules C120 or iC120 3P: 9 modules C120 or iC120 4P: 12 modules Vigi C120 or Vigi iC120 3P: 19 modules Vigi C120 or Vigi iC120 4P: 22 modules

INS switch-disconnector
DD380770.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 4 5

Modular rail

Modular front plate 03204 03205

INS160
INS40/160 INS100/160 with long terminal shields 03401 03401

Direct supply via cables. Capacity of modular rail: 48 modules (9 mm).


Note: width of devices: INS40/80: width 10 modules INS100/160: width 15 modules

400E21400

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-37

Functional units W = 400 mm


Circuit breakers

NG125 circuit breaker NSA125/160 circuit breaker INS40/160 switch-disconnector

Modular devices

Multi 9 or Acti 9 type modular devices


Dd382519.eps

Device

All supply systems (Linergy FH, 63/160 A 1/2 4 row Linergy FM) with cable straps and trunking sections Supply via 63 A Linergy FM or Linergy FH with cable straps

All Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices

No. of vertical modules

Modular rail (adjustable) 03404

Modular front plate 03214

Multi 9 or Acti 9 devices y 40 A

03404

03213

Capacity of modular rail: 20 modules (9 mm).

NG125 circuit breaker


Dd382520.eps

Device

NG125 circuit breaker Vigi 3/4P NG125 3P

Designation

No. of vertical modules 5

Modular rail (adjustable)

Modular front plate

Downstream front plate

03404

03214

03811

Capacity of modular rail: 20 modules (9 mm).


Note: to mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 or Acti 9 modular devices, order (with the device) the symmetrical rail + raiser set (28041). Width of devices: NG125 3P: 9 modules NG125 4P: 12 modules Vigi NG125 3P y 63 A: fixed sensitivity 18 modules adjustable sensitivity 20 modules > 63 A: fixed sensitivity 20 modules adjustable sensitivity 20 modules

NSA125/160 circuit breaker


Dd382521.eps

Device

Designation

No. of vertical modules 5

Modular rail (adjustable)

Modular front plate

Downstream front plate

03404

03214

03811

Capacity of modular rail: 20 modules (9 mm).


Note: to mix an NSA125/160 circuit breaker with Multi 9 or Acti 9 modular devices, order (with the device) the symmetrical rail + raiser set (28041). Width of devices: NSA125/160 3P: 10 modules NSA125/160 4P: 14 modules

Compact INS40/160 switchdisconnector


Dd382522.eps

Device

Compact INS40/160 switch4 disconnector Compact INS100/160 switch5 disconnectorwith long ter. shields

Designation

No. of vertical modules

Modular rail (adjustable)

Modular front plate

Downstream front plate

03404 03404

03214 03214 03811

Capacity of modular rail: 20 modules (9 mm).


Width of devices: Compact NS40/80: width 10 modules Compact INS100/160: width 15 modules

A-38

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21400

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Modular devices
Linergy BW busbars
Connections

Dd381306.eps

Universal power supply block for the Linergy BW insulated busbars.

Presentation The Linergy BW insulated busbars are mounted using a System G adapter (03595) made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members. The busbars can be positioned at precisely the desired spot, to the left (preferably), in the middle or to the right of the row of devices. The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism, etc.). For busbars: b y 800 mm long, order one Prisma G adapter (03595) b > 800 mm long, order two Prisma G adapters (03595 x 2). Cat. no. selection Designation
Linergy BW insulated busbars Prisma G adapter, W= 500 mm (03595)
Dd383289.eps

Dd381162.eps

Dd381161.eps

Distribution via Linergy BW busbars

Dd381160.eps

Linergy BW tap-off blocks.

200 A Linergy FM connection (04021).

see page B-50 see page A-78

One-piece device/Linergy BW connection

Respects the degree of protection IpxxB on both busbar and device ends. Neutral is clearly indicated (blue). NG160 incoming device (located on left-hand side), NG125, INS160, C120 or iC120 One-piece 3/4 P fast connection to busbars, equipped with male fittings one end for tunnel terminals . Designation Cat. no.
One-piece connection, 160A, W = 150 mm 04147

A multi-purpose connection for: bb supply to Linergy BW busbars from a switchboard incomer bb supply to a row incomer from Linergy BW busbars.
Dd383274.eps

NG160 Vigi incoming device (located on left-hand side) NG160 (without Vigi) incoming device (located in the middle) NG125, INS160, C120 or iC120
One-piece 3/4 P fast connection to busbars, equipped with male fittings one end for tunnel terminals . Designation Cat. no.
One-piece connection, 160A, W = 440 mm
Dd383276.eps

Dd383290.eps

04148

400E21400

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-39

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Modular devices

Rear Linergy BS busbars

Distribution via rear Linergy BS busbars


Dd381163.eps

Installation Solution 1 The rear Linergy BS busbars are mounted using a Prisma G adapter (03595) made up of four lateral cross-members and two longitudinal cross-members. The depth adjustment of the longitudinal cross-members facilitates connections for all types of devices (fixed/withdrawable, toggle/rotary handle/motor mechanism, etc.). The number of adapters that must be ordered depends on the required number of supports. Solution 2 The support for the busbars clips to the rear of the modular rail. Cat. no. selection Designation
Rear Linergy BS busbars Prisma G adapter, W = 500 mm (03595) see page B-53 see page A-78

A-40

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21400

Functional units
Circuit breakers

Modular devices
Distribution

Linergy DX distribution block


Dd381308.eps

Designation
Linergy DX 4P distribution block 125 A 6 modules 52 holes See page B-55.

Cat. no.
04045 04046

Linergy FM distribution blocks


DD380675.eps

Designation
Linergy FM 4P distribution block 63 A 12 modules 20 holes Linergy FM, 80 A Linergy FM, 80 A, 4P Linergy FM 4P distribution block 160 A 12 modules 27 holes Linergy FM 2P distribution block 200 A 24 modules 24 holes Linergy FM 3P distribution block 200 A 24 modules 42 holes Linergy FM 4P distribution block 200 A 24 modules 54 holes 4P connection Linergy BW insulated BB/Linergy FM distribution block 200 A 4 connections NG160/Linergy FM distribution block 160 A See page B-60.

Cat. no.
04008 04000 04004 04018 04012 04013 04014 04021 04030

Linergy FH comb busbars


DD380755.eps

For C60 or iC60 circuit breakers Designation


1P 2P 3P 4P 24-module Linergy FH comb busbar (9 mm modules) Two 48-module Linergy FH comb busbars (9 mm modules) 24-module Linergy FH comb busbar (9 mm modules) Two 48-module Linergy FH comb busbars (9 mm modules) 24-module Linergy FH comb busbar (9 mm modules) Two 48-module Linergy FH comb busbars (9 mm modules) 24-module Linergy FH comb busbar (9 mm modules) Two 48-module Linergy FH comb busbars (9 mm modules)

Cat. no.
14881 14891 14882 14892 14883 14893 14884 14894

For C120 or iC120 and NG125 circuit breakers Designation


1P 2P 3P 4P (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) (W = 430 mm, 16 poles) (W = 430 mm, 16 poles)

Cat. no.
14811 14812 14813 14814 14818

Thoot caps (set of 20)

Cable running
DD380811.eps

Designation
Cable straps 12 vertical cable straps 2 covers, 1-meter long, for vertical cable straps 12 horizontal cable straps 4 covers, 430 mm long, for horizontal cable straps Trunking 4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, W = 450 mm 12 horizontal trunking supports 10 adaptable support for horizontal trunking Vertical section, 80 x 60 mm, W = 2 m See page B-76.

Cat. no.
04262 04263 04239 04243 04257 04255 04256 04267

Blanking plates
DD384029.eps

Designation
Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, W = 1 m 4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, W = 90 mm See page C-23.

Cat. no.
03220 03221

400E21400

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-41

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Source-changeover systems Compact / Masterpact

Source changeover
Dd381669.eps

General

To ensure the supply of energy at all times, certain electrical installations are connected to two sources: bb the normal source bb the replacement source that steps in to supply the installation if the normal source is not available. A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Compact or Masterpact switch-disconnectors or circuit breakers (or a mixture) avoids simultaneous connection of the two sources during switching. The source-changeover system can be: bb manual when the devices are mechanically interlocked bb remote operated when there is also an electrical interlocking system bb automatic, by adding an automatic controller that manages switching from one source to another according to a number of external parameters.

Manual source-changeover system

This is the most simple system. A human operator is required and consequently, the transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is delayed. A manual source-changeover system comprises two or three manually controlled devices (circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors) that are mechanically interlocked. The interlocking system avoids simultaneous connection (even transient) of the two sources.

Remote-operated source-changeover system

This is the most commonly used system. No human intervention is required. The transfer from the normal to the replacement source is managed electrically. A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three devices linked by an electrical interlocking system implemented in a number of manners. Device control is backed up by a mechanical interlocking system that protects against the consequences of an electrical malfunction and inhibits incorrect manual operation.

Automatic source-changeover system

When a remote-operated source-changeover system is combined with an automatic controller, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes. This solution provides optimum energy management: bb switching to a replacement source depending on any external conditions bb management of sources bb regulation bb emergency source replacement, etc. A communications function for dialogue with a supervisor is available for the automatic controller. See the catalogue dedicated to Compact and Masterpact sourcechangeover systems (ref. ABTEDA-3901149EN).

A-42

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21160

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Source-changeover systems

Possible combinations Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32


All possibilities for manual source-changeover systems
Keylock Rotary handle On base plate Cable-type Cable-type Cable-type wirh 2 devices with 3 devices with 2 devices (2) (2) side-by-side side-by-side one above another

Manual source-changeover
Type of device
Complete assembly INS250 (ratings 100 to 250) INV100 to INV250 (1) INS320 to INS630 INV320 to INV630 (1) NSX100 to NSX250 NSX400 to NSX630 NS630b to NS1600 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW32 (1) Visible break function. (2) In 2 or 3 cubicles.
Dd383703.eps

Type of interlocking
Toggle

b b b b b b

b b b b b b b

b b b b b b b b

Devices side by side in two adjacent cubicles.

Remote-operated sourcechangeover systems Mechanical interlocking system


DD383809.eps

Combination of Compact Normal and Replacement source devices


Normal N Replacement R
NSX100 NSX100 Ratings 12.5... 100 A NSX160 Ratings 12.5... 160 A NSX250 Ratings 12.5... 250 A NSX400 Ratings 160... 400 A NSX630 Ratings 250... 630 A b b b NSX160 b b b NSX250 b b b b b b b NSX400 NSX630

Horizontal Compact NSX100/630.


Dd383578.eps

Combination of Normal and Replacement source devices (interlocking via cables)


Normal N
NS630b to NS1600 NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW32

Replacement R
NS630b to NS1600 b b b b b NT06 to NT16 NW08 to NW40

Compact NS630b/1600 device one above the other, mechanical interlocking using cables.

400E21160

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-43

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Manual source-changeover systems


Interlocking of rotary handles

Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1000

Compact NSX100 to 630


DD381529.eps

The devices are equipped with a rotary handle. They are mounted on a dedicated mounting plate: bb vertically for Compact NSX100/250 bb horizontally for Compact NSX400/630.
No. of vertical Mounting modules plate NSX100/250 NSX400/630 Cut-out front Upstream plate front plate 03245 03659 03802 Downstream front plate 03803

ON I

reset

O OFF

Compact NSX, rotary handle


10 10

03428 03458

Incoming and busbar connections to be made.


Designation Compact NSX100/250. NSX100/250 NSX400/630
DD383810.eps

3P 4P 3P 4P

Front connection long terminal shields LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594 For 3P device LV432595 Catalogue number LV429369 LV432621 For 3P device LV429358 LV432619

Rear connection short terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 For 4P device LV432596

Designation Devices Shields for spreaders NSX400/630 Designation Mechanical interlock Designation Coupling accessory
A

Devices NSX100/250 NSX400/630 Devices NSX100/250 NSX400/630

For 4P device LV429359 LV432620

Compact NSX400/630.

Horizontal Compact NS630b to 1000


Dd381534.eps

Interlocking of direct rotary handles


No. of vertical modules NS630b/1000 13

The devices are equipped with a direct rotary handle. They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
Mounting plate 03491 Cut-out front plate 03695

Compact NS rotary handle, front connection Incoming and busbar connections to be made.
Designation Long terminal shields Mechanical interlock Devices NS630b/1000 NS630b/1000 For 3P device 33628 33890 For 4P device 33629 33890

Compact NS630b/1000.

A-44

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21160

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Manual source-changeover systems


Compact NS630b/1600 Masterpact, NT06/16, NW08/32

Compact NS630b/1600 Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32


Dd383579.eps

Source-changeover system with 2 devices one above the other or side-by-side in two combined cubicles
bb These configurations correspond to two standard incoming devices in terms of: v selection of functional units v number of modules To determine the number of modules required for installation of two devices one on top of another, add the number of modules required for each. vv incoming and busbar connection vv partitions and covers Devices mounted vertically bb type of interlocking: vv mechanical interlocking using cables vv interlocking of rotary handles (for Compact NS630b/1600 only) For possible combinations and details concerning installation, see the catalogue dedicated to Compact and Masterpact source-changeover systems (ref. ART 29770).

Note: does not operate with 2 NW40s placed one above the other.

Compact NS630b/1600 See page A-13. Masterpact NT06/16 See page A-8. Masterpact NW08/40 See page A-4. All combinations of Masterpact NT and NW fixed and drawout devices are possible.

400E21160

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-45

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Remote-operated sourcechangeover
Device installation

Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16


The devices are equipped with motor mechanisms. They are mounted horizontally on a dedicated mounting plate.
No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Cut-out front plate

Compact NSX100/630
DD383811.eps

NSX100/250 8 03417(1) 03616 NSX400/630 10 03457(2) 03656 (1) Order mounting plate + IVE electrical interlocking unit for NSX100/250 (cat. no. 29350 for AC or 29351 for DC version). (2) Order mounting plate + IVE electrical interlocking unit for NSX400/630 (cat. no. 32610 for AC or 32611 for DC version).

Compact NSX, fixed or withdrawable/socle

Incoming and busbar connections to be made.


Compact NSX100/250.
DD383812.eps

Designation NSX100/250 NSX400/630 3P 4P 3P 4P

Front connection long terminal shields LV429517 LV429518 LV432593 LV432594

Rear connection short terminal shields LV429515 LV429516 LV432591 LV432592 For 4P device LV432596 For 4P device LV429359 LV432620

Designation Shields for spreaders

Devices For 3P device NSX400/630 LV432595

Designation Devices For 3P device Coupling accessory NSX100/250 LV429358 NSX400/630 LV432619

Compact NSX400/630.

Compact NS630b/1600 Masterpact NT06/16, NW08/32


Dd383704.eps

Source-changeover system with 2 devices one above the other or side-by-side in two combined cubicles
bb These configurations correspond to two standard incoming devices in terms of: vv selection of functional units vv number of modules

To determine the number of modules required for installation of two devices one on top of another, add the number of modules required for each. vv incoming and busbar connection vv partitions and covers. Devices mounted vertically. Mechanical interlocking using cables + electrical interlocking. For possible combinations and details concerning installation, see the catalogue dedicated to Compact and Masterpact source-changeover systems (ref. LVPED211022EN).
Note: does not operate with 2 NW40s placed one above the other.

In case of connection on a vertical busbar protected by a form 2 partitioning, a form 2 restoration kit is mandatory (see form 2 partitioning page B-36). Compact NS630b/1600 see page A-13. All fixed and all withdrawable combinations are possible. Masterpact NT06/16 see page A-8. All fixed, drawout and fixed + drawout combinations are possible. Masterpact NW08/32 see page A-4. All fixed, drawout and fixed + drawout combinations are possible. All combinations of Masterpact NT and NW fixed and drawout devices are possible.

A-46

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21160

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Remote-operated sourcechangeover systems

Compact NSX100/630, NS630b/1600 Masterpact NW08/32, NT06/16


When a UA, BA or UA150 automatic controller is added together with an ACP mounting plate, the sources can be controlled automatically according to a number of programmed operating modes.
No. of vertical modules 4 Mounting plate 03417 Cut-out front plate 03671

Addition of an automatic controller


DD383813.eps

UA or BA controller

UA or BA controller

MERLIN GERIN MERLIN GERIN

400E21160

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-47

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Manual source-changeover systems


Interpact INS-INV250 to 630 Front direct rotary handle
Compact INS-INV250
Devices mounted vertically
Device No. of vertical modules 9 Mounting plate 03428 Cut-out front plate Upstream front plate 03802 Downstream front plate 03802

Manual source-changeover system with mechanical interlocking


DD381537.eps

INS-INV250

Switch-disconnector INS-INV, front connection

03235

Designation Long terminal shields (set of 2) Mechanical interlock Coupling accessory

Cat. No 29324 31073 LV429358 (for 3P device) LV429359 (for 4P device)

Compact INS-INV250.

Dd383707.eps

Compact INS-INV320/630
Devices mounted horizontally
Device No. of vertical modules 10 Mounting plate 03458 Cut-out front plate 03659

INS-INV320/630

Switch-disconnector INS-INV

Designation Long terminal shields (set of 2) Mechanical interlock Coupling accessory

Cat. No 32565 31074 LV432619 (for 3P device) LV432620 (for 4P device)

Compact INS-INV320/630.

A-48

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21250

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Manual source-changeover systems


Compact INS250 to 630
Compact INS250

Devices mounted vertically


Dd381539.eps

Device

INS250

Switch-disconnectors INS
9 Designation

No. of vertical modules

Mounting plate 03428 Rating 100 A 160 A 200 A 250 A

Cut-out front plate 03247

Upstream front plate 03802

Downstream front plate 03802

For 3P device For 4P device 31140 31144 31142 31146 31141 31145 31143 31147

Complete sourcechangeover assembly

Designation Coupling accessory Long terminal shields (set of 2)

Cat. No 29358 (for 3P device) 29359 (for 4P device) 29324

Dd383708.eps

Compact INS320/630
Device

Devices mounted horizontally


No. of vertical modules 10 Mounting plate 03458 Cut-out front plate 03661

INS320/630

Switch-disconnectors INS
Designation Rating 320 A 400 A 500 A 630 A

For 3P device For 4P device 31148 31150 31152 31154 31149 31151 31153 31155

Complete sourcechangeover assembly Compact INS-INV320/630. Designation Coupling accessory Long terminal shields (set of 2)

Cat. No 32619 (for 3P device) 32620 (for 4P device) 32625

400E21250

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-49

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Compact INS-INV630b to 2500 Compact INS-INV2000-2500

Connection
Dd383580.eps

Cable connection
Device Vertical connection adapters 31301 31302 Vertical connection adapters Cable-lug adapters Terminal extension bar support

INS-INV630b/ 1600 INS-INV20002500

Compact INS-INV
3P 4P 3P 4P

33975 33976

33644 33645

Depending on the type of front connection, an Compact INS-INV2000-2500 can be mounted in a 400 mm or 600 mm deep enclosure. For rear connection, a 600 mm deep enclosure is required.

04694 04694

Compact INS-INV630b/1600.

Device installation
Dd383581.eps

Device

INS-INV630b/ 1600

Compact INS-INV

No. of modules 14 14 16

Mounting plate 03501 03501 03501

Cut-out front Upstream plate front plate 03713 03714 03715 03804 03804 03803

Downstream front plate 03804 03804 03803

INS-INV20002500

3P 4P 3P/4P

Distribution
Dd383582.eps

Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY or Linergy BS busbars


Device Connection Free supports

INS-INV630b/ 1600

Compact INS-INV

Cover for BB connection 04926 (1) 04926 (1) 04926 (1)

INS-INV20002500 (1) Partitioning of devices must be made. Selection of Linergy LGY busbars: see page B-18. Selection of Linergy LGYE busbars: see page B-20. Selection of Linergy BS busbars: see page B-28.

3P 4P 3P/4P

04481 (Linergy LGY) 04482 (Linergy LGY) must be made 04662 x 2

A-50

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21210

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Compact INS-INV250 to 630


Horizontal Front handle

Installation
DD380543.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 4 5

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 INS-INV320/630 03412 03452 03617 03658

Busbar connection
DD380544.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device Prefabricated connection Short terminal shields (set of 2) 29322 29322 32563 32563

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 INS-INV320/630 3P 4P 3P 4P 04427 04428 must be made must be made

DD381423.eps

Linergy LGYE or Linergy BS busbars


Device Connection Short terminal shields (set of 2) 29322 32563

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 INS-INV320/630 must be made must be made

Connection
DD380545.eps

Device

Front connection Long terminal shields (set of 2)

Rear connection (1) Short terminal shields (set of 2)

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 29324 29322 INS-INV320/630 32565 32563 (1) For rear connection, protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.

400E21200

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-51

Functional units
Switch-disconnectors

Compact INS-INV250 to 630


Vertical Front handle

Installation
DD380546.eps

Device

No. of devices

No. of vertical modules (1)

Mounting plate

Cut-out front Upstream plate front plate

Downstream front plate

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 1 7 03420 03248 03801 03801 03801 03801 INS-INV250 2/3 7 03420 03620 (2) INS-INV320/ 1 10 03461 03274 400 INS-INV500/ 1 11 03461 03274 03801 630 (1) For the Compact INS-INV250, the number of modules indicated is for supply via a Linergy FC distribution block. For supply via cables, two additional modules are required; add a plain front plate upstream (03802). (2) Front plate 03620 is intented for 2 or 3 Compact INS-INV250 devices.

Busbar connection
DD380547.eps

Linergy LGY busbars


Device Linergy FC (with connection) Long terminal shields

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 04404 INS-INV320/630 must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64. 32565

Accessories
Linergy FC tooth-caps

Cat. no.
04809

DD380548.eps

Linergy LGYE or Linergy BS busbars


Device Linergy FC (w/o connection) Long terminal shields

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 04408 INS-INV320/630 must be made Selection of flexible bars for the connection: see page B-64. 32565

Accessories
Linergy FC tooth-caps 04809

Connection
DD380549.eps

Device

Front connection Long terminal shields

Rear connection (1) Short terminal shields

Compact INS-INV switch-disconnector


INS-INV250 29324 29322 INS-INV320/630 32565 32563 (1) For rear connection, size reduced one module; a plain downstream front plate (03801) is not needed. Protection of terminals is ensured by Form 4 partitioning: see page B-42.

A-52

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E21200

Functional units
Fusegear

Fupact ISFL
Vertical 3P

Installation through cut-out front plate in a 650 mm wide cubicle


DD384443.EPS

Mounting principle

bb The fuses are installed on the horizontal bars which are in turn supported by a mounting plate bb The front plates are secured to the hinged front plate support frame bb The front may be covered either by a cover frame or a plain or transparent door bb Current transformers can be installed behind ISFL fuse-switch disconnectors. Cat. no. selection
Device Qty per row No. of Mounting plate + horizontal modules bars occupied 11 03545 +
(1)

Cut-out front plate

Fuse-switch disconnectors behind door or cover frame


ISFL160 9 03736 + LV480868 x 2

(1) The bars are made by the customer: for choice of bars, see pages B-26 and B-27.

DD384444.EPS

Installation through a 2/3 cut-out front plate in a 650 mm wide cubicle

Mounting principle

b The fuses are installed on the horizontal bars which are in turn supported by a mounting plate b The front of the cubicle is made up of two parts: v 2/3 cut-out front plate allowing introduction of the fuses v 1/3 front plate support frame (12 modules) on which the functional units are mounted b The front may be covered either by a cover frame or a plain or transparent door b Current transformers can be installed behind ISFL fuse-switch disconnectors. Cat. no. selection
Device No. of No. of Mounting plate + horizontal devices vertical bars per row modules occupied 10 24 03546 + LV480870 (1) + LV480854 (1) 03546 (1) + (2) x 5 x 5
(2)

2/3 front plate + 1/3 frame

Fuse-switch disconnectors behind 2/3 front plate


ISFL160 03735 (3) + LV480868 x 2

+ 03735 (3) + ISFL250 5 24 ISFL400 LV480868 x 2 ISFL630 (1) Adaptation accessories 49904 + 49852 used to: b install two ISFL160 devices on a mounting plate 03546 b mix ISFL devices. (2) The bars are made by the customer: for choice of bars, see page B-26. (3) The cat. number 03735 (IP20 front plate for ISFL, 185 mm between centres, W = 650 mm) replaces the cat. number 03733.

Accessories
Busbar barrier
DD384457.EPS

Cat. No. 04860

400E21222

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-53

Functional units
Fusegear

Fupact ISFL
Vertical 3P
Determining the busbars

Accessories
DD384445.EPS

Designation
Blanking plate for ISFL160 Blanking plate for ISFL250/630 (1) (1) Use 2 blanking plates per device.

Cat. no.
03740 03741

Determining the horizontal rear busbars for ISFT/ISFL devices


Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1070 1280 1280 1540 1800 50 C IP y 31 980 1160 1160 1400 1630 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 ISFL160 1 bar 60 x 10 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 1 bar 80 x 10 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 ISFL250/ 1 bar 80 x 10 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 400/630 1 bar 100 x 10 2050 1800 1930 1680 1800 1540 1680 1 bar 120 x 10 2390 2100 2250 1950 2100 1800 1950 b Connection impossible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 980 1160 1160 1400 1630

IP > 31 880 1030 1030 1240 1440

IP > 31 b b b b

A-54

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21222

Functional units
Fusegear

Fupact ISFT
Vertical 3P
Installation on mounting plate or busbars

Installation
Dd383589.eps

Device

No. of devices per row

No. of vertical modules occupied 6 8 6 9 9 10 8 6

Mounting Cut-out plate front plate

Downstream Long front plate terminal shields (qty per device)

ISFT160 on mounting plate.

ISFT100 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT100N (installation on mounting plate) ISFT160 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT250 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT400 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT630 (installation on mounting plate) ISFT100N (installation on busbars) ISFT160 (installation on busbars)

5 8 4 2 2 1 6 4

03554 03553 03556 03557 03557 03557 03555 03555

03320 03325 03321 03322 03323 03324 03325 03321 49869 x 2 03802 49869 x 2 49872 x 2 49875 x 2 49876 x 2

Accessories
Linergy FH for ISFT100 for 2 devices for 3 devices for 4 devices Coupler to connect 2 busbars Tooth cover Set of 3 connectors (25 to 95 mm) Set of 3 distribution connectors 3 x 10 mm
Dd383590.eps DD382484.eps

49861 49862 49863 49890 49864 49865 49860

ISFT630.

Busbar connection

Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY or Linergy BS busbars

Connection made by the customer. Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection: see page B-64.

Connection

Cable-tie supports: see page B-65.

400E21221

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-55

Functional units
Fusegear

Fupact ISFT
Vertical 3P
Determining the busbars

Determining the horizontal rear busbars for ISFT devices


Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 730 680 680 630 630 570 40 C IP y 31 570 45 C IP y 31 510 50 C IP y 31 450

Section/phase ISFT160/ISFT100N 1 bar 30 x 10 b connection not possible.

IP > 31 510

IP > 31 450

IP > 31 b

A-56

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21221

Functional units
Fusegear

Fupact INF
Horizontal
Extended rotary handle

Installation
DD384452.EPS

Device

No. of devices per row 1 x 3/4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P

No. of vertical modules 3 5 5 5 5 7 7 7 7 8 8 11 11

Mounting plate

Cut-out front plate

Long terminal shields

Switch-disconnector fuses
H G F
E

D
C

INF32/40 INF63
B

INF100/160
A B C

INF200 INF250 INF400

DD384453.EPS

INF630-800

03540 03541 03541 03541 03541 03534 03534 03534 03534 03535 03535 03536 03536

03313 03314 03314 03314 03314 03727 03727 03727 03727 03729 03729 03730 03730

49658 49658 x 2 49659 x 6 49659 x 8

F
E

Busbar connection
DD384454.EPS

F
E

D
C

400E21220

49257 x 6 49257 x 8

D
C

Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY or Linergy BS busbars

Connection made by the customer. Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection for INF y 630 A: see page B-64.

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-57

Functional units
Fusegear

Fupact INF
Vertical
Extended rotary handle

Installation
DD381858.EPS

Device

No. of devices per row 4 x 3P 3 x 4P 3 x 3P 2 x 4P 2 x 3P 2 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P 1 x 3P 1 x 4P

No. of vertical modules

Mounting Cut-out plate front plate

Upst. front plate

Downst. front plate

Long terminal shields (qty per device)

Switch-disconnector fuses
H G

F
E

INF32/40
D
C

INF63
A B C

INF100/160 INF200 INF250 INF400

DD381859.EPS

INF630-800

3 3 5 5 5 5 9 9 9 9 9 9 11 11

03540 03540 03541 03541 03541 03541 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537 03537

03312 03313 03314 03315 03315 03315 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728 03728

49658 49658 x 2 49659 x 6 49659 x 8 03801 03801 03801 03801 03801 03801 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03802 03803 03803

F
E

Busbar connection
DD381860.EPS

F
E

D
C

A-58

49257 x 6 49257 x 8

D
C

Linergy LGYE, Linergy LGY or Linergy BS busbars

Connection made by the customer. Choice of flexible bars to be used for the connection for INF y 630 A: see page B-64.

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21220

Functional units
Others

Power factor correction equipment

DD384603.eps

Presentation

Schneider Electric offers power factor correction equipment that integrates perfectly in Prisma P switchboards. The power factor correction modules are installed horizontally in a cubicle. The busbars are supplied by a protection device installed outside the cubicle. Special Prisma P cubicles are used for power factor correction, given the temperature rise inside the cubicles. They comply with and are tested according to standards IEC 61439-1 and 2.

Installation

Mounting plates ready to received the power factor correction modules, made up of a contactor, the corresponding protection fuses and a set of busbars. They are installed in a 650 mm wide cubicle that is either 400 or 600 mm deep depending on the depth of the switchboard to which it will be added. Each cubicle can be equipped with up to 5 VarplusCan power factor correction modules or up to four VarplusCan with self power factor correction modules, positioned one above the other. The cubicle has a ventilated roof that can be equipped with two fans. The door has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a filter.

DD384604.eps

Standard cubicle supplied via the bottom.

DD384605.eps

Cubicle with a 300 mm wide compartment for incoming cables via the top.

450E25000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-59

DD383660.eps

A-60
VarplusCan installation.

Others

Functional units

Device installation

DD384583.EPS

VarplusCan

VarplusCan with self VarplusCan without self

Type of equipment

Power factor correction equipment

The following table indicates the maximum number of VarplusCan modules that can be installed vertically in one cubicle (D=400 mm or 600 mm) without exceeding temperature rise limits.

Prisma P cubicles can be used for installation of the new VarplusCan power factor correction modules designed to improve power system quality and reduce consumption of reactive energy. These modules are made up of capacitors, contactors and special protection against internal faults. It is necessary to select each devices to create the powerfactor correction module according to the Panelbuilder guide of Power Factor correction number PFCED111008EN. Then, the module can be installed inside Prisma switchboard thanks to the following Prisma mounting plate reference XXXXX.

Version : 3.0
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France

Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France

4 5

16/04/2013
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France

No. of power factor correction modules per cubicle

03979 03979

G FE D C B A

Mounting plate cat. no.


200 kvar 600 kvar

Power range

450E25000

(Figure 2).

Functional units
Others

Power factor correction equipment

Door with cut-outs


DD384606.eps

Power factor correction equipment is mounted in special, 650 mm wide cubicles that are 400 or 600 mm deep. Standard cover panels are used. However, a special door is used (hinges on left only) that has cut-outs, one for the Varlogic power factor controller and another in the bottom for a filter. Designation
Door with cut-outs

Cat. no.
03970

When several cubicles are combined to build a form 2 switchboard, inter-cubicle partitions must be used. Cubicle depth Partition designation Cat. no.
400 mm Inter-cubicle partition, D = 400 mm 04911 600 mm Inter-cubicle partition, D = 600 mm 04931 (1) (1) For inter-cubicle partitioning of 600 mm depth cubicles, order partitions 04931 + 04911. Note: for further details, see page B-46.

IP30 / IP31 roof


DD382315.eps

A roof with a cut-out ensures forced ventilation of the equipment. It can also be equipped with one or two fans. It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust, condensation or falling objects. It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths. Selection guide Designation Front face cover Rear face cover Roof cover Configuration 200 kvar
Door fan IP55 rear panel IP30 2 natural airing devices without fan -

Cat. no. 600 kvar


Air intake grille IP55 rear panel + air intake grille IP30 2 fans + natural airing devices NSYCVF850M230P NSYCAG29LPF 08746 08746 + NSYCAG29LPF NSYCAC228RMF NSYCVF575M230MF

Cat. no. selection Designation


Roof W = 650 mm Fan Natural airing devices without fan Air intake grille D = 400 mm D = 600 mm

Cat. no.
08456 08656 NSYCVF575M230MF NSYCAC228RMF NSYCAG291LPF

Fan characteristics bb Power rating: 85 W bb Input voltage: 230 V bb Throughput via outlet grille: vv outlet grille: 350 m3/hr vv free with filter: 575 m3/hr bb Noise level: 64 dB.

450E25000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-61

Functional units
Others

Industrial control devices

Series D and K contactors


DD381159.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 3

Useful rail length

Modular rail (adjustable)

Plain front plate

Series D and K contactors y 40 A

432 mm

03402

03803

GV2/GV3 circuit breakers


Dd381164.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 3 3 5

Useful rail length

Modular rail

Cut-out front plate

GV2EM-GV2LE GV2L-GV2P GV3

432 mm 432 mm 432 mm

03401 03402 03402

03203 03203 03205

Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.


Dd381426.eps

Modular blanking plates: see page C-23.

GV2 + contactor combination


Dd381165.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 5

Useful rail length

Modular rail (adjustable)

Transparent front plate

Downstream front plate

Combination GV2 + Series D or K contactor y 40 A


GV2 + contactor 432 mm 03402 03342 03801

Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.

GV2 motor circuit breaker + Series K contactor combination.

TeSys U model
Dd381166.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules 5 4

Useful length of rail (mm) 432

Rear modular rail 03402

Cut-out front plate 03205

Front plate transparent or plain 03342 03804

TeSys U model
TeSys U model TeSys U model (1)

(1) Version without communication module, auxiliary contact and reversing module.

Width of devices without lateral auxiliaries: 45 mm.


DD384050.eps

A-62

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

400E21500

Functional units
Others

Industrial control devices

ATS01 soft starters


DD383842.eps

Device

ATS01N103/106FT ATS01N109/112FT ATS01N206 to 212 ATS01N222 to 232 ATS01N 230LY ATS01N 244LY ATS01N 244Q Width of devices:

On a modular rail

No. of vertical modules 4 5 5 6 5 5 5

Useful length of rail (mm) 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm 432 mm

Modular rail (adjustable)

Plain front plate

03402 03402 03402 03402 03402 03402 03402

03804 03805 03805 03806 03805 03805 03805

ATS01N103/106FT: 22.5 mm ATS01N109/112FT: 45 mm ATS01N206 to 212: 45 mm ATS01N222 to 232: 45 mm

ATS01N230LY: 180 mm ATS01N244LY: 180 mm ATS01N244Q: 180 mm

DD383817.eps

Device

ATS01N272LY ATS01N285LY ATS01N272Q ATS01N285Q

On a slotted plate

No. of vertical modules 6 6 6 6

Slotted mounting plate

Plain front plate

03572 03572 03572 03572

03806 03806 03806 03806 ATS01N272Q: 180 mm ATS01N285Q: 180 mm

Width of devices:

ATS01N272LY: 180 mm ATS01N285LY: 180 mm

Dd381169.eps

Alimentation and LV/LV transformer

Device

No. of vertical modules 4

Slotted mounting plate

Plain front plate

LV/LV transformer
ABL6-TS/TD up to 2500 VA ABL6-RT up to 960 W ABL6-RF up to 480 W 03571 03804

LV/LV alimentation
4 4 03571 03571 03804 03804

400E21500

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

A-63

Functional system

Functional units
Others
Mounting
400 650 150

Metering

3-phase kilowatt-hour meters

With 1 mounting plate


DD383112.eps DD383113.eps DD383114.eps

Devices No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] transparent or plain

Meter and connection block

Meter 3 Ph + N
2 6 03508 03343 [6] 03806 [6]

Connection block
2 6 03508 03343 [6] 03806 [6]

Meter + connection block


1+1 6 03508 03343 [6] 03806 [6]

Earthing wire, 6 mm: cat. no. 08911.

Mounting
400 650 150

With 2 mounting plates

DD383116.eps

Devices No. of devices per row No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Front plate [no. of vert. mod.] transparent or plain

Meter and connection block

Meter 3 Ph + N
4 12 2 x 03508 2 x 03343 [6] 2 x 03806 [6]

Meter + connection block


2+2 12 2 x 03508 2 x 03343 [6] 2 x 03806 [6]

Earthing wire, 6 mm: cat. no. 08911.

A-64

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

DD383117.eps

401E21020

Functional units
Others

Metering

Single-phase kilowatt-hour meters Class 2


Meters can be installed at different levels on the functional uprights of frameworks. Class 1: Depending on preferences and needs, meters can be installed directly on mounting plates equipped with earthing braids and combined with partitioning or front plates. The mounting plates can be raised using M5 spacers: see page A-77.

Installation
DD382954.eps

Meters behind front plate


DD382959.eps DD382960.eps DD382962.eps DD382963.eps

Device

No. per No. of row vertical modules 3 6

Mounting plate

Adapter

Insulating plate

Front plate transparent or plain 03343 03806

Ph + N

03157

03595

03154

Earthing wire, 6 mm: cat. no. 08911.

400E21020

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-65

Functional units
Others

Metering

3-phase kilowatt-hour meters Class 2


Meters can be installed at different levels on the functional uprights of frameworks. Class 1: Depending on preferences and needs, meters can be installed directly on mounting plates equipped with earthing braids and combined with partitioning or front plates. The mounting plates can be raised using M5 spacers: see page A-77.

Installation
DD382952.eps

Meters behind front plate


DD382964.eps DD382960.eps DD382965.eps DD382966.eps

Device

No. per No. of row vertical modules 2 9

Mounting plate

Adapter

Insulating plate

Front plate transparent or plain 03344 03807

3 Ph + N

03152

03595

03154

Earthing wire, 6 mm: cat. no. 08911.

A-66

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21020

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices

The human-switchboard interface mounting plates have been modified to ensure compatibility with the new front plates (catalogue numbers unchanged). The visor has also been changed to ensure compatibility with the new mounting plates. The old human-switchboard interface mounting plates and visor are not compatible with the new front plates.

Presentation

Device mounting
On an interface with plastic mounting plates, H = 150 mm (3 modules) The interface is made up of a metal front plate and plastic mounting plates that clip onto the front plate: b the devices are attached in the cut-outs of the plastic mounting plates and insulated from the front plate b a system at the rear of the mounting plates guides the wires b each mounting plate can receive an adhesive label b plain mounting plates are available to blank off any unused locations.
Dd381687.eps Dd381688.eps

Dd381705.eps

Dd381689.eps

The mounting plates have guides for auxiliary wires.

Mounting plates can be identified by a label.

On a metal front plate with cut-outs, H = 150 mm (3 modules) bb Devices are attached directly to the metal front plate bb Blanking plates are available to blank off any unused locations bb Economical solution.

Installation in a switchboard

The mounted assembly can be installed: b in the device zone of enclosures and cubicles, like a front plate b on a door with cut-outs in a 300 or 400 mm wide cubicle b on a partial door with cut-outs in wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures (except IP55). The degree of protection for installed devices is IP30.
Note: to maintain the IP55 degree of protection, the measurement devices must be installed behind a transparent door. If they are installed on a plain door, use the corresponding mounting plates.
Dd383642.eps Dd381684.eps

60 40 10 0

60 40 10 0

Mounting on a partial door with cut-outs.

60 40 10 0

60 40 10 0

Mounting on a 300 mm wide door in a cubicle

400E21080

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-67

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices

72 x 72 mm measurement devices
Dd381705.eps

On an interface with plastic mounting plates


Cat. no. selection Designation
Front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for 5 plastic mounting plates) Plastic mounting plate with cut-out (for 72 x 72 mm device) Plain plastic mounting plate

Cat. no.
03904 03902 03900

Dd382575.eps

The plain plastic mounting plates have knock-outs: b 4 holes, 16 mm diameter b 5 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm
Dd381689.eps

On a metal front plate with cut-outs


Cat. no. selection Designation
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for six 72 x 72 mm devices) Blanking plate (for 72 x 72 mm hole)

Cat. no.
03910 03907

Dd382637.eps

The blanking plates have knock-outs: b 3 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm

96 x 96 mm measurement devices
Dd382632.eps

On an interface with plastic mounting plates


Cat. no. selection Designation
Front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for 4 plastic mounting plates) Plastic mounting plate with cut-out (for 96 x 96 mm device) Plain plastic mounting plate (1) Not designed for Power meter PM700/800 installation.

Cat. no.
03904 03903 (1) 03901

Dd382633.eps

The plain plastic mounting plates have knock-outs: b 4 holes, 16 mm diameter b 5 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm b 1 hole, 72 x 72 mm

A-68

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21080

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface
72 x 72 and 96 x 96 mm devices

96 x 96 mm measurement devices
Dd381711.eps

On a metal front plate with cut-outs


Cat. no. selection Designation
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for four 96 x 96 mm devices) Blanking plate (for 96 x 96 mm hole)
Dd382634.eps

Cat. no.
03911 03908

The blanking plates have knock-outs: b 3 holes, 22 mm diameter b 1 hole, 45 x 45 mm b 1 hole, 72 x 72 mm.
DD383662.eps

On a metal front plate with cut-outs


Cat. no. selection Designation
Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for one 96 x 96 device)

Cat. no.
03913

The human-switchboard interface mounting plates have been modified to ensure compatibility with the new front plates (catalogue numbers unchanged). The visor has also been changed to ensure compatibility with the new mounting plates. The old human-switchboard interface mounting plates and visor are not compatible with the new front plates.
Dd382636.eps

Visor for measurement devices on an interface with plasstic mounting plates

Presentation A visor can be used to incline 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 mm devices by 30. The devices are mounted on a cut-out plastic mounting plate (see previous page) that clips directly to the visor. The visor can be installed on 300 and 400 mm wide doors with cut-outs in cubicles or on partial doors with cut-outs, in wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures. It is supplied with a drilling diagram for mounting on a plain door. Cat. no. selection
Visor
Dd380862.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
03928

40 10 0

60

40 10 0

60

40 10 0

60

40 10 0

60

40 10 0

60

400E21080

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-69

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface
144 x 144 mm devices 22.2 mm diameter lamps, pushbuttons

One 144 x 144 mm device + four 72 x 72 mm devices


Dd381712.eps

Installation Devices are installed in the device compartment on a metal front plate with cut-outs. Blanking plates clip onto the unused 72 x 72 mm holes. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
03912 03907

Metal front plate with cut-outs, 4 modules (for one 144 x 144 mm device + four 72 x 72 mm devices) Blanking plate (for 72 x 72 mm hole)
Dd382635.eps

The blanking plates have knock-outs (22 mm diameter) to install: b 1 to 2 lamps or pushbuttons b 1 switch b 1 emergency off (EPO) pushbutton.

Pushbuttons or lamps

Installation In the device compartment on a metal front plate with cut-outs. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
03914

Metal front plate with knock-outs (2 modules) for twelve 22 mm diameter lamps or pushbuttons

A-70

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21080

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface

Powerlogic system
Dd383019.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules

Cut-out front plate

Power meter PM400/500/700/800 3 (96 x 96 mm case) FDM121 3


m s t 1 1

Power meter PM

03911 03911

DD381716.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules

Mounting plate

Cut-out front Plain front plate plate

Circuit monitor CM3000 Circuit monitor CM4000


Powerlog 4000 CM ic system

Circuit monitor CM

4 6

03571 03572

03918 03918

03804 03806

Installation in the device compartment.


DD381694.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules

Cut-out front plate

com

Digipa

ct DMB3

00

DMB300 DMC300/400

DMB300/400

3 4

03916 03917

1 2 3 4
select

Installation in the device compartment.


03916.
DD381717.eps

Device

No. of vertical modules

Slotted mounting plate

Plain front plate

com

Alarm

Digipa

ct DM

C300

DC150 data concentrator + SC150 indication and control module CLS150, UM100, IM100 (72 x 72 mm cases)

Digipact

03571

03804

see page A-67

03917.
DD384028.eps

Installation in the device compartment or the connection compartment.


Dd380859.eps

Data concentrator in a 300 mm wide compartment.

400E21080

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-71

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface

Vigilohm system
Dd381754.eps

Installation in the device compartment.


Device No. of vertical modules Mounting plate Cut-out front plate

MERLIN
Vigirex RM12

GERIN

IM400 or XM300C

Vigilohm

with 3 XD301 or with 2 XD312 or with XD301 + XD312 XLI300 or XTU300 or XD308C with XL308 or with XL316

03930

03932

XML308/316 or XM300C with two interfaces 03930 + 03932.


Dd381698.eps

03931

03933

XML308/316 or XM300C

03931

03933

03931 + 03933.

Vigilohm
Dd381699.eps
60 40 10 0

Installation in the device compartment.


Device No. of vertical modules Modular rail Cut-out front plate

IM10 / IM10H IM20 / IM120H IM9, IM9-OL HV-IM20 / HVIM400 03934.

Vigilohm

4 3 3 4

03401 03401 03401

03934 03911 03203 03934

Vigirex
Dd381720.eps

Installation in the device compartment.


Device No. of vertical modules Modular rail Cut-out front plate

MERLIN

GERIN

Vigirex RH10M on Reset fault

Test
Test no trip

RH10/RH21/RH99 relays Modular device 72 x 72 mm cases RHU relay (72 x 72 mm cases) RMH relay and RM12T multiplexer RMH (modular devices) RM12T (72 x 72 mm cases)

Vigirex

3 see page A-67 see page A-67 3 see page A-67

03401

03203

03401

03203

A-72

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E21080

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface

Multi 9 or Acti 9 type modular devices


Dd381722.eps

Installation in the device compartment.


Device No. of vertical modules Modular rail Cut-out front plate

Lamps, pushbuttons, etc. Ammeter, voltmeter, etc.


2 3 4 5 3 4 5

Multi 9 or Acti 9 measurement device


2 3

03401 03401

03202 03203

Device behind transparent front plate


Dd383643.eps

Installation in the device compartment. 500 mm wide transparent front plate

Transparent front plate, 4 modules, H = 200 mm Transparent front plate, 6 modules, H = 300 mm Transparent front plate, 9 modules, H = 450 mm Transparent front plate, 12 modules, H = 600 mm

03342 03343 03344 03345

400E21080

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-73

Functional units
Others

Human-switchboard interface

Cable running
DD384630.eps

Cable trunking for doors, W = 2000 mm Flexible trunking for wiring to door Linergy MS auxiliaries terminal block 10 IN/20 out 10 grommets for wiring through front
Dd381641.eps DD384372.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
04233 04235 04228 04234

Auxiliary wiring on partial door with cut-outs.

Trunking for a door.

Flexible trunking to protect and guide wires.

DD381644.eps

Linergy TA terminal block for auxiliaries.

Dd383653.eps

Grommets.

Four-pole auxiliary Linergy TA bus duct


DD381602.eps

A duct for four conductors, 1755 mm long, for the distribution of auxiliary voltages from the power and regulation devices to the automatic relay, control and indication systems. Composition b Insulating duct. b Four brass conductors offering 166 tap-off points per linear meter via 6.35 mm tab terminals. b Two clamps for mounting on cable-tie supports. b One lateral clamp. Characteristics bb Rated insulation level: Ui = 660 V. bb Rated operational current (40 C): 32 A. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
04203

4P auxiliary bus duct L1755 Linergy TA

A-74

Version : 3.0

18/04/2013

400E21080

Functional units
Others

Reserve space

Device compartment, W = 650 mm


DD381583.eps

500 mm wide plain front plate


1 module (H = 50 mm) 2 modules (H = 100 mm) 3 modules (H = 150 mm) 4 modules (H = 200 mm) 5 modules (H = 250 mm) 6 modules (H = 300 mm) 9 modules (H = 450 mm) 12 modules (H = 600 mm)

Cat. no.
03801 03802 03803 03804 03805 03806 03807 03808

DD381582.eps

500 mm wide transparent front plate


4 modules (H = 200 mm) 6 modules (H = 300 mm) 9 modules (H = 450 mm) 12 modules (H = 600 mm)

Cat. no.
03342 03343 03344 03345

Dd383121.eps

9 modules (H = 450 mm) 12 modules (H = 600 mm)

500 mm wide vertical modulair front plate

Cat. no.
03228 03229

Lateral compartment W = 400 mm


DD381584.eps

250 mm wide plain front plate


1 module (H = 50 mm) 2 modules (H = 100 mm) 3 modules (H = 150 mm) 4 modules (H = 200 mm) 5 modules (H = 250 mm) 6 modules (H = 300 mm) 9 modules (H = 450 mm)

Cat. no.
03811 03812 03813 03814 03815 03816 03817

DD381585.eps

250 mm wide transparent front plate


4 modules (H = 200 mm) 6 modules (H = 300 mm) 9 modules (H = 450 mm)

Cat. no.
03352 03353 03354

400E21050

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-75

Functional units
Others

Fixing accessories

Clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates


DD381312.eps

These nuts are used to install various devices (contactors, transformers) on a slotted mounting plate. They can also be installed on the cable-tie supports in enclosures and cubicles, as well as on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles. Designation Cat. no.
20 clip-nuts for slotted mounting plates M4 M5 M6 03180 03181 03182

Clip-nuts for modular rails


Dd381313.eps

These nuts are used to install various devices on a modular rail. Designation
20 clip-nuts for modular rails M4 M5 M6

Cat. no.
03164 03165 03166

Clip-nuts for lateral and longitudinal cross-members


Dd381612.eps

These nuts can be installed on the universal lateral and longitudinal cross-members in cubicles, as well as on the functional uprights in IP30/55 wall-mounted and floorstanding enclosures. Designation Cat. no.
20 M6 captive nuts 03194

DD381576.eps

Pratic raiser

Colour RAL 9001. The raiser clips onto a slotted mounting plate or a modular rail. It is 27 mm wide and serves to raise a device 10 mm. It is made of an insulating material and can directly receive terminal blocks, modular devices, etc. Designation Cat. no.
5 Pratic raisers 04224

DD381314.eps

A-76

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00135

Functional units
Others

Fixing accessories

Hexagonal spacers

Designation
M5 hexagonal spacers 4 spacers H = 9 mm H = 23 mm H = 55 mm M6 hexagonal spacers 4 spacers H = 9 mm H = 23 mm H = 25 mm H = 55 mm M8 hexagonal spacers 4 spacers H = 40 + 10 mm
Dd380828.eps

Cat. no.
03185 03186 03187 03195 03196 03198 03197 03199

Universal angle brackets


DD381513.eps

The angle brackets are used to install terminal blocks, trunking, etc. Designation Cat. no.
4 angle brackets + screws 2 universal angle brackets 6 universal inserts System P 6 universal angle brackets
DD383657.eps DD381577.eps DD382920.eps

03580 03581 03582 03583

03580 Installation of a terminal block in a cubicle.


DD383078.eps

03581

03582

03583

400E00135

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-77

Functional units
Others

Prisma G adapter

Prisma G adapter
DD381603.eps

Kit with four lateral and two longitudinal cross-members that can be depth adjusted. It is used to install Prisma G components, notably the functional mounting plates, the Linergy BW insulated busbars and the 400 A rear Linergy BSbusbars. It is the means to enhance the flexibility of the Prisma P system. It is available in two widths: b 500 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment W = 650 mm) b 250 mm wide (for installation in a device compartment W = 400 mm). Cat. no. selection Designation
Prisma G adapter, W= 500 Prisma G adapter, W= 250 Note: the adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030.
Dd383591.eps

Cat. no.
03595 03596

CompactNSX250 circuit breaker installed with a Linergy DP distribution block.

The Linergy BW busbars can be positioned to the left, middle or right of the modular row. Depth adjustable, the busbars can be supplied by an Compact INS switch-disconnector or a fixed/withdrawable Compact NSX circuit breaker, whatever the type of operating system (toggle, rotary handle, motor mechanism). For Linergy BW busbars, order two adapters (03595 x 2).

A-78

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00135

Functional units
Others

Other devices

Mounting on lateral and longitudinal cross-members


Longitudinal cross-members Set of two longitudinal cross-members, W = 650 mm. They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150 mm). They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite). They are essentially used to position and support the cables of an incoming device or to install all types of devices. Lateral cross-members They are connected directly to the framework. They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of longitudinal cross-members. There are two lengths: b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm crossmembers for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed separately. Cat. no. selection Designation
Set of two lateral cross-members Set of two longitudinal cross-members W = 400 mm W = 200 mm W = 650 mm

Universal cross-members
Dd381173.eps

Longitudinal cross-members attached directly to the framework.

Dd381316.eps

Cat. no.
03584 03586 03587

Longitudinal cross-members mounted on lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm.


Dd381580.eps

Creation of a platform with two lateral and two longitudinal cross-members.


DD381581.eps

Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm.

400E00135

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-79

Functional units
Others

Other devices

Mounting on a plain backplate

Dd381174.eps

Plain backplate

Metal plain backplate, H = 1780 mm for 36 modules cubicle. Supplied with four angle brackets and two slide rails to facilitate mounting. The four angle brackets can be replaced by two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for depth adjustment. There are two wides b 510 mm wide for installation in a device compartment W = 650 mm or W = 800 mm (650 + 150) b 660 mm wide for installation for a cubicle W = 800 mm. Cat. no. selection Designation
Plain backplate, 36 modules 510 mm wide Plain backplate, 36 modules 660 mm wide

Cat. no.
03570 03569

2 slide rails + angle brackets


Dd381309.eps

For the installation and depth adjustment of plain backplates and slotted mounting plates. Cat. no. selection Designation
Set of 2 slide rails + angle brackets

Cat. no.
03593

Plain backplate mounted on slide rails.

A-80

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00135

Functional units
Others

Other devices

Mounting on a slotted plate

Dd381175.eps

Slotted mounting plates + 4 lateral cross-members

Galvanised, slotted metal mounting plate, supplied with four lateral cross-members. Installation b either in the device zone on the four lateral cross-members (depth adjustment is possible) b or vertically at the rear of a cable compartment, W = 300 mm (03571) or W = 400 mm (03572). In this case, use four universal angle brackets. Cat. no. selection Designation
Slotted mounting plate + 4 lateral cross-members H = 200 mm (4 modules) H = 300 mm (6 modules) 2 universal angle brackets

Cat. no.
03571 03572 03581

Slotted mounting plate in the device compartment.


Dd381176.eps

Dd381427.eps

Useful dimensions of the mounting plate Cat. number H (mm) W (mm) 03571 180 480 03572 280 480

Slotted mounting plate, H = 200 mm, installed vertically in a cable compartment, W = 300 mm, using four universal angle brackets. The height occupied is 600 mm (12 modules).

Dd381178.eps

Slotted mounting plate without lateral cross-members

Galvanised metal, slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm. Supplied with four angle brackets, they connect directly to the rear of a framework, W = 650 mm or 800 mm (650 + 150 mm). The mounting plate can also be installed using two sets of two slide rails (03593 x 2) for depth adjustment. Cat. no. selection Designation
Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm (12 modules)
Dd381177.eps

Cat. no.
03574

Slotted mounting plate attached to the rear of the framework.


Dd381179.eps

Useful dimensions of the mounting plate: H = 580 mm, W = 420 mm.


Dd381355.eps

Slotted mounting plate, H = 600 mm, installed on slide rails (03593 x 2).

Plain and transparent front plates, see page A-75.

400E00135

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

A-81

Functional units
Others

Other devices

Mounting on a modular rail

Modular rails
Dd380505.eps

Modular rail

Useful length (mm)

Cat. no.
03401 03402 04226

Modular rail 432 Modular rail (adjustable) 432 2 modular rails, with 4 holes, 1600 dia. 6.4 mm, 450 mm between centres
Dd381180.eps Dd381187.eps

Modular device rail (03401).


Dd381185.eps Dd381310.eps

Adjustable modular device rail (03402).

Modular device rail (04226).

Terminal block in a compartment on a modular device rail (04226).

Modular rail, W = 650 mm


Dd381186.eps

Designation
Modular device rail, W = 650 mm (supplied with two angle brackets for mounting on the framework)
Dd381355.eps

Cat. no.
03590

Plain and transparent front plates, see page A-75.

A-82

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00135

Functional units
Others

Switchboard lighting

Switchboard lighting
DD384098.eps

This system is generally used to illuminate the front of a switchboard. The kit is made up of: b a base b a neon tube b a front plate with cut-out (1 module) b a door contact. Characteristics b supply voltage: 220/240 V b power rating: 8 W. Cat. no. selection Designation
Switchboard lighting

No. of modules
1

Cat. no.
08964

Installation in a cubicle.

Switchboard portable lamp


DD381675.eps

Lamp with a magnetic base for installation behind a door or directly on the cubicle framework. Supplied without a power cord. It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard. Designation Cat. no.
Switchboard portable lamp 08965

Characteristics b supply voltage: 220/240 V b power rating: 11 W.

400E21090

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

A-83

Distribution

Contents

Presentation 22 Functional units A-1

Main distribution

Presentation of Linergy LGYE busbars 630 A to 4000 A Presentation of Linergy LGY busbars 630 A to 3200 A Presentation of Linergy LGY busbars Presentation of Linergy BS busbar Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A Horizontal busbars up to 4000 A Lateral Linergy LGY busbars up to 3200 A Lateral busbars up to 4000 A
Linergy LGY bars Linergy LGYE bars Linergy LGYE bars Horizontal and lateral busbars Lateral busbars

B-7

Horizontal/vertical B-7 New horizontal/vertical busbar B-8

B-7

B-10 B-12 B-13


B-10 B-13 B-14 B-16 B-18 B-20 B-25 B-26 B-27 B-28 B-30 B-31 B-35

B-14 B-16 B-18

Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A Linergy accessories Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A Horizontal busbars up to 3200 A
Linergy BS bars 10 mm thick Busbars 5 mm thick Busbars 10 mm thick For 300 mm width framework Linergy BS bars 5 mm thick Mounting hardware - Markers

Linergy LGYE bars - 3200-4000 A in 300 mm width framework

B-20 B-23 B-25 B-26 B-27

Rear Linergy BS busbars up to 1600 A - Busbars, 5 mm thick Form 1 electrical switchboards Form 2 partitioning Form 3 partitioning Form 4 partitioning Other partitions
Covering the supply terminals on the incoming device

B-32 B-34 B-36 B-40 B-42 B-46

400 A rear Linergy BS busbars Linergy DX distribution block Linergy DP distribution block 160/630 A Linergy BS multi-stage distribution block Linergy FM distribution block Linergy FC distribution block Insulated flexible bars Connection accessories Busbar accessories Linergy TR
Mounting hardware Cable-tie supports

Secondary distribution

B-50

B-53 B-55 B-58 B-59 B-60 B-62 B-64 B-65 B-67 B-69
B-67 B-65

Linergy TB terminal blocks B-73 Connection B-75 Cable running


Linergy BS connector Cable straps B-76 Trunking B-78 Trunking, accessories B-79

Introduction B-69 Terminal blocks B-70 Adjustable earth + neutral Linergy TB terminal blocks Spring or screw technology B-72 B-75

B-76

Linergy TB earth bars Linergy TB neutral bars Linergy PE conductor Linergy PEN conductor

B-80 B-81 B-82 B-83

Enclosures C-1 Additional information D-1 400E50020 Version : 2.1 16/04/2013 B-1

Linergy LGYE
Putting the latest technological innovation in your hands

B-2

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22600

Linergy LGYE
a breakthrough in busbar systems
Safe, reliable, exible, and exible with the highest level of performance
Schneider Electrics Prisma PTM is one of the leading switchboard enclosure systems on the market. Designed for use with Prisma P, the new Linergy LGYETM busbar system now includes horizontal busbars, for greater electrical switchboard enclosure performance, reliability, and costeffectiveness. Manufactured using a revolutionary process, patented Linergy LGYE busbars are unique on the market, taking your electrical switchboard installations a giant leap into the future.

Discover how Linergy LGYE can place the next generation of low-voltage switchboards in your hands.

400E22600

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-3

Innovative technology
from an energy expert you can trust
Patented Linergy LGYE is backed by Schneider Electrics decades of expertise in electrical distribution systems and is certified IEC61439-2 compliant by ASEFA.

Linergy LGYEs unique profile


was designed with the ratings you need, a commitment to performance backed by regular testing up to 4000 A.

Linergy LGYE busbars performances and conductivity are


identical or better than traditional all Linergy BS busbars.

Heat is dissipated by conduction


and radiation for performance only a market leader like Prisma P can bring you.

Unlike tin-plated aluminum busbars, rugged Linergy LGYE busbars are


resistant to scratching during assembly to ensure optimal connection quality and reliability.

High Velocity Oxy-Fuel, unique on the busbar market


Patented Linergy LGYE uses a supersonic high-temperature coating process for a robust copper contact surface.

B-4

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22600

A revolutionary design
for greater efficiency
The Linergy LGYE line now includes horizontal busbars, helping you achieve better electrical switchboard performance while optimizing busbar layout and facilitating assembly.
Schneider ElectricTM has drawn upon 30 years of expertise in electrical distribution systems and a decade of hands-on experience with the proven and reliable Linergy line of products. It brings you a revolutionary design featuring a high-quality copper contact surface that delivers even better results than traditional Linergy BS-to-Linergy BS connections. Linergy LGYE busbars offer a number of benets to help you enhance performance and boost your competitiveness.

Attractive

The revolutionary copper contact strips, anodized aluminum surface, and unique shapes give a modern appearance and a soft touch.

IEC standardscompliant
The latest standards were factored in from the early design stages to ensure that temperatures are kept below the IEC61439-2 standard requirements, for optimal performance regardless of the switchboard conguration.

Lightweight
Linergy is half the weight of equivalent-rated Linergy BS bars for more fuel-efcient transport, easier handling, and smoother installation.

Environmentallyfriendly
Instead of increasingly-scarce copper, Linergy LGYE is made from 70 % recycled raw materials offering the same performance as primary raw materials.

Higher-capacity
A single Linergy LGYE bar can withstand ratings up to 4000 A. It would take two or three Linergy BS bars per pole to achieve similar ratings.

Robust and flexible


Linergy LGYE bars are extruded for a unique prole that includes both closed and ribbed sections, improving rigidity, thermal dissipation, and resistance to short circuits, with a shortcircuit withstand capacity (lcw) of 100 kA/1s.

Cost-effective
Linergy LGYE helps you achieve cost savings now and provides protection against uctuating copper prices in the future, plus all the advantages of a raw material that is easy to purchase and store.

Boost Prisma P capacity

Increase short-circuit withstand capacity

Linergy LGYE is

from 3200 A to 4000 A

from 85 kA/1s to 100 kA/1s

50 % lighter than Linergy BS

and assembly times over


Linergy BS busbars

Reduce costs

400E22600

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-5

Linergy accessories are also

evolving!

Linergy LGYE is a full-featured busbar system that includes all the connections, screws, bolts, isolating supports, and other accessories you need for drill-free assembly.

Panel builders, weve thought of everything to make your life easier!


 Linergy LGYE busbars are lightweight, making them easy to transport and handle in the workshop.  With Linergy LGYE, you can continue to use the familiar Prisma P busbar supports you already know for Linergy BS bars. Theres no new system to learn.  Linergy LGYE offers single bars for each rating, making handling during installation faster and more convenient.  Linergy LGYE bars are fast and easy to position without drilling, thanks to a sliding bolt and track system.  Linergy screws let you add extra outgoing connections without drilling new holes or dismounting previous connections or busbar supports, saving you time and giving you greater flexibility in the event of last-minute changes.  Linergy LGYE busbars offer a unique shape with no sharp edges for safer, smoother handling and installationthe bars simply slide right in to the busbar supports.  Existing Linergy LGY vertical busbars are easy to connect to Linergy LGYE with ready-toinstall accessories like vertical connectors.  Linergy materials are easy to recycle via well-established aluminum recycling services already in use for materials like aluminum cans, coffee capsules, door and window frames, and engine blocks.
B-6 Version : 3.0 16/04/2013 400E22600

Distribution
Main distribution
NEW

Presentation of Linergy LGYE busbars 630 A to 4000 A


Horizontal/vertical

PD384623.eps

Linergy LGYE + Linergy LGY, a comprehensive offering


The Linergy solution, a complete set of horizontal and vertical busbars operational up to 4000 A: b 630 A to 4000 A b Icw of 85 kA/1 s for the 630 A to 1600A configurations b Icw of 100 kA/1 s for the 2500 A to 4000A configurations. More power in a given switchboard volume. No longer any need to drill, thanks to the Linergy concept, greater accessibility for connecting bars, ties and connecting plates. Winning solution in all the Linergy LGYE options chosen, allows the panelbuilder to: b achieve substantial time savings (procurement, handling, mounting, accessibility, changes, etc.) thanks to the aluminium material and the busbar design and connection b supply more efficient, less heavy switchboards without risk of vandalism on Linergy BS. Complete compatibility of Linergy LGYE with existing 630 to 1600 A Linergy BS vertical busbar. Replacement of high/low horizontal Linergy BS busbar with Linergy LGYE up to 4000 A. Re-use of the existing 1000 to 1600 A Linergy LGY and double Linergy busbars up to 3200 A or replacement with vertical 2000 to 4000 A Linergy LGYE.

Light Economical
H H

Mounting compatibility Multiple adaptations


F F C C H H

H H

Simplification Time saving

H H

G G

G G

F F

H H

H H

G G

F F

Direct connection Connection modularity Unchanged fasteners Easier access

400E22610

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

C C

C C

B-7

Distribution
Main distribution

Presentation of Linergy LGYE busbars 630 A to 4000 A


New horizontal/vertical busbar
Presentation Linergy LGYE profiles
DD384536.eps DD384537.eps DD384538.eps

The Linergy LGYE solution is based on: b the Linergy y 1600 A busbar concept (approved technology, trusted by industry specialists) b the already existing flat busbar mounting method (th. = 5 mm and 10 mm).

630 A.
DD384539.eps DD384540.eps

800 A.

1000 A.

1200 A.
DD385312.eps DD384542.eps

1600 A.

2000 A.
DD384543.eps DD384544.eps

2500 A.

3200 A.

4000 A.

B-8

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E22610

Installation The Linergy LGYE busbar can be installed either at the top or the bottom of a frame. b Size for 630 to 2500 A: 150 mm. b Size for 3200 to 4000 A: 200 mm. The mounting technique is the same as that for the Linergy BS busbar, sparing the installer any constraints. Busbar type b Horizontal busbar: v Functionalized profiled busbar L = 2000 mm v for 630 to 2500 A busbars, a single strip is incorporated over the entire length v for 3200 to 4000 A busbars, a double strip is incorporated over the entire length.

Dd384518.EPS

Horizontal busbars from 630 to 4000 A

Flexibility for upgrading existing switchboards It is possible to mount the Linergy LGYE busbar vertically for all ratings from 2000 to 4000 A. Busbar type b Vertical busbar: v functionalized profiled busbar L = 2000 mm to be re-cut to 1675 mm for connection with horizontal busbar from 1600 to 2500 A. Installation in duct W = 150 mm v functionalized profiled busbar L = 2000 mm to be re-cut to 1620 mm for connection with horizontal busbar from 3200 to 4000 A.Installation in duct W = 300 mm v for 2000 to 2500 A busbars, a single strip is incorporated over the entire height v for 3200 to 4000 A busbars, a double strip is incorporated over the entire height. NB: this busbar does not allow the use of Prisma P system prefabricated connections.

400E22610

DD384555.EPS

Vertical busbars from 2000 to 4000A

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

B-9

Distribution
Main distribution

Presentation of Linergy LGY busbars 630 A to 3200 A


Lateral busbars

PD391305_SE.eps

Linergy LGY busbars are installed in a busbar zone to the left or right of the device zone. The busbars are secured to the framework by supports that maintain the distances between busbars. All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the switchboard. The bars are channelled and the devices, installed on either side, can be connected at any height, without drilling.

Linergy LGY busbars up to 1600 A


PD390402R.eps PD390403R.eps

Sliding bolts enable connections at any height, without drilling.


PD390405R.eps PD391306.eps

All connection points are directly accessible from the front of the switchboard.

Prefabricated connections supply the devices mounted to the left or right of the busbars.

The bottom support maintains the bars in position.

B-10

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E22610

PD390568R.eps

Channelled busbars

Linergy LGY channelled busbars implement advanced technology and are made of aluminium, a material widely used for electrical conduction. Ductile and malleable, aluminium can be used to create complex shapes that improve electrical conduction, rigidity, ventilation and appearance.

Ergonomic shape

The low density of aluminium and its malleability make it possible to produce hightech sections offering both exceptional rigidity and minimum weight. Twice as light as copper for the same current ratings, the busbars can held easily in one. What is more, their shape is ideal for handling and installation.

Maximum power in less space

The manufacturing process allows great flexibility in terms of the shape, notably for the creation of internal partitions that increase the current-flow perimeter. In this way, busbar efficiency is optimised and external dimensions reduced. As a result, up to 1600 A, these channelled busbars can be installed in compartments just 150 mm wide and 400 mm deep.

Very rigid shapes

The ease and flexibility of the extrusion process makes it possible to create closed and ribbed sections offering exceptional rigidity. Two supports spaced over the bars and one at the bottom are sufficient to cover most installation needs (Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s).

Always at the right temperature

The increased heat exchange surface enhances the natural convection of the bars. The bars are anodised to enhance emission and radiation, and thus the evacuation of heat. Whatever the switchboard configuration, the bars maintain their performance level.

A new generation of busbars.

Designed to resist ageing and creep, the busbar supports, made of a heat-setting, insulating material, offer a particularly high level of performance, notably their withstand to high temperatures. Their remarkable mechanical withstand means fewer are required, thus freeing maximum space along the busbars for the connection of devices.

PD390413R.eps

Multi-function busbar supports

The same support is used for all busbars up to 1600 A and can also be used as the bottom support. As a result, ordering is easy and stocking costs are reduced.
PD384623.eps

Electrical connections without drilling

Tested in special test stations, copper connections are used to interconnect two sets of busbars. Connections are fast with 10 mm thick horizontal busbars. Drilling is not required; the connections are made by clamping the busbars.

PD390415R.eps

An aluminium bar with a high-quality copper contact surface

A copper powder is thermally projected at high speed along the entire length of the bar. It forms a rough, exceptionally hard surface. The quality of the electrical connection is enhanced by the many contact points. The result is convincing and even better than a traditional copper/copper connection.

Modern busbars

Linergy LGY busbars are produced in a number of different shapes offering both a high level of performance and good appearance. The anodisation process protects against ageing and provides an attractive finish.. The copper-coloured bands along the entire length reflect the modern design and high technology of these busbars.

400E22610

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

B-11

Distribution
Main distribution

Presentation of Linergy LGY busbars

Type of busbar Very rigid profile to improve withstand to electrodynamic forces. Connection points accessible from the front and adjustable from top to bottom. Compatible with all Prisma prefabricated connections. Installation Can be installed independently on either the left or right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework (650 + 150 mm) for distribution on either side. For an Icw y 40 kA rms / 1 s, two supports in the device zone are sufficient to maintain the bars. A third support is required as the bottom support for the bars.

Linergy LGY busbars up to 1600 A

Dd382326.eps

Linergy LGY busbars up to 1600 A.

Linergy LGY busbars up to 3200 A

Installation Two sets of busbars are installed in parallel in two adjacent frameworks, each 800 mm wide (650 + 150 mm). They must be interconnected by three equipotential links. Generally speaking, these links are provided by: b the horizontal busbars b connections in the middle and at the bottom of the vertical busbars.

DD382327R.eps

Linergy LGY busbars up to 3200 A.

Horizontal-busbar connections
DD382576.eps

Note: equipotential connection must be made.

B-12

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22620

Distribution
Main distribution

Presentation of Linergy BS busbar


Horizontal and lateral busbars
Dd383728.EPS

Horizontal busbars up to 3200 A

v Horizontal and lateral busbars up to 3200 A require the same amount of space. b horizontal busbars v Linergy BS bars without holes, W = 2000 mm, 5 mm thick v Linergy BS bars without holes, W = 2000 mm, 10 mm thick b lateral busbars v Linergy BS bars with holes, W = 1675 mm, 5 mm thick v Linergy BS bars with holes, W = 1675 mm, 10 mm thick

Horizontal Linergy BS busbar for switchboards up to 3200 A. Adapts to all Linergy LGY 1600 A profiles and also to the lateral Linergy LGYE busbar.

Type of busbar Linergy BS busbars with holes, 5 mm thick (up to 1600 A). Linergy BS busbars with holes, 10 mm thick (up to 2500 A). Two 10 mm holes every 25 mm along the entire length of the busbars. Prisma P prefabricated connections cannot be used with these busbars. Installation Can be installed independently on either the left or right-hand side of an 800 mm wide framework for distribution on either side. Three fixed supports (04661) are mandatory. When more than three supports are required (see the tables for busbar calculations on the following pages), use free supports (04662). Busbars are positioned on the bottom support (04663).

Dd383709.EPS

Lateral busbars up to 3200 A

Lateral Lienrgy BS busbar for switchboards up to 3200 A. Adapts to all profiles of the horizontal Linergy LGYE busbar.

400E22620

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-13

Distribution
Main distribution

Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A


Linergy LGYE profiles
Linergy LGYE Cat. No. Permissible current at 35 C for switchboard
IP y 31 630 800 1000

The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). For more information on other ambient temperatures, see page D-21.

Busbar calculation

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

L = 650 mm 04560 L = 650 04561 + 150 mm 04562 04563 04564

IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 530 680 850 2 2+1

1250 1650

1050 1480

Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. Note: for a L = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below.

Linergy LGYE

Cat. No.

Permissible current at 35 C for switchboard

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

L = 300 mm 04560 L = 400 mm 04561 04562 04563 04564

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 630 530 800 1000 1250 1650 680 850 1050 1480 1 1+1

For frames L = 300 mm and 400 mm, only the first support is fixed.

Busbar selection
DD384520.EPS

Linergy LGYE busbars, L = 2000 mm


Cat. no. selection See the table below. Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
DD384536.eps DD384537.eps DD384538.eps

Bar 630 A. Cat. No. 04560

Bar 800 A. Cat. No. 04561

Bar 1000 A. Cat. No. 04562

DD384539.eps

Bar 1250 A. Cat. No. 04563

DD384540.eps

Bar 1600 A. Cat. No. 04564

Dimensions
Cat. No.
04560 04561 04562 04563 04564
DD384631.eps

60 23

B-14

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22630

Distribution
Main distribution

Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A


Linergy LGYE profiles
Busbar supports

Dd381226.eps

Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free supports. Cat. No.
04662. Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS 04664 04662

04664.

Dd381225.eps

DD384535.EPS

Designation
Linergy LGYE horizontal joint 1600 A 3P 4P

Cat. No.
04620 x 3 04620 x 4 + 04624 (1)

(1) 04624 is mandatory in case of jointed 4P Linergy LGYE busbars installations and must be installed only at the junction on side-by-side frameworks combination. Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.

04620.
DD384615.eps

04624.

Busbar dimensions
DD384534.EPS

Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars

No. of vertical modules required


3

400E22630

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-15

Distribution
Main distribution

Horizontal busbars up to 4000 A


Linergy LGYE profiles
Linergy LGYE Cat. No. Permissible current at 35 C for switchboard

Busbar calculation

The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-21.

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

L = 650 mm 04565 L = 650 + 150 mm 04566 04567 04568

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 2000 1650 2440 3200 3620 2100 2800 3350 2 2+1 2+2

Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. Note: for a L = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below.

Linergy LGYE

Cat. No.

Permissible current at 35 C for switchboard

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

L = 300 mm 04565 L = 400 mm 04566 04567 04568

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 2000 1650 2440 3200 3620 2100 2800 3350 1 1+1

For frames L = 300 mm and 400 mm, only the first support is fixed.

DD384533.EPS

DD384543.eps

Busbar selection

Linergy LGYE busbars, L = 2000 mm


DD384544.eps

DD385312.eps

Bar 2000 A. Cat. No. 04565

DD384542.eps

Bar 2500 A. Cat. No. 04566

Bar 3200 A. Cat. No. 04567

Bar 4000 A. Cat. No. 04568

Dimensions
Cat. No.
04566 04567 04568
DD384632.eps

04565

100 31 150 31

Dd381226.eps

Dd381225.eps

Busbar supports

Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free supports. Designation Cat. No.
04662. Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy 2500 A LGYE/BS 3200 A Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy 2500 A LGYE/BS 3200 A 12 spacers 150 mm for Linergy LGYE profile 3200 - 4000 A 04664 + 04671 04664 + 04646 04662 + 04671 04662 + 04646 04646

04664.

DD384633.eps

B-16

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22630

Distribution
Main distribution

Horizontal busbars up to 4000 A


Linergy LGYE profiles
Joints
Designation
1 joint per bar 3P 4P 2000 and 2500 A 3200 - 4000 A 2000 - 2500 A 3200 - 4000 A

DD384588.EPS

Cat. No.
04621 x 3 04623 x 3 04621 x 4 + 04624 (1) 04623 x 4 + 04624 (1)

(1) 04624 is mandatory in case of jointed 4P Linergy LGYE busbars installations and must be installed only at the junction on side-by-side frameworks combination. Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.

04623.
DD384614.eps

04624.

Busbar dimensions
DD384558.EPS

Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars y 2500 A Top or bottom horizontal busbars u 3200 A

No. of vertical modules required


3 4

400E22630

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-17

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral Linergy LGY busbars up to 3200 A


Linergy LGY profiles
Linergy LGY Cat. no.

Busbar calculation

The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). Above 1600 A, the busbars must be doubled and installed in two busbar sections, side by side. In this case, they must be interconnected by three equipotential links. For more information on other ambient temperatures, see page D-25.

Permissible No. of supports current Icw (kA rms / 1 s) at 35 C for switchboard


IP y 31 680 840 1040 1290 1650 2000 2500 3200 IP > 31 590 760 950 1170 1480 1820 2260 2920 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85

Linergy 630 04502 Linergy 800 04503 Linergy 1000 04504 Linergy 1250 04505 Linergy 1600 04506 Double busbars Linergy 2000 04504 x 2 Linergy 2500 04505 x 2 Linergy 3200 04506 x 2

3 4 5 7 8

2x3

2x4

2x5

Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Each catalogue number represents one bar.

Busbar selection
DD381232.eps

Linergy LGY busbars, L = 1670 mm


Cat. no. selection See the table below.
DD381233.eps

Bar 630 A. Cat. no. 04502

DD381234.eps

Bar 800 A. Cat. no. 04503

DD381235.eps

Bar 1000 A. Cat. no. 04504

DD381236.eps

Bar 1250 A. Cat. no. 04505

DD381237.eps

Bar 1600 A. Cat. no. 04506

Note: in a combined arrangement with the Linergy LGYE 3200 A and 4000 A horizontal busbars, re-cutting of the bar to 1620 mm is recommended. Busbars up to 1600 A. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.

B-18

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22210

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral Linergy LGY busbars up to 3200 A


Linergy LGY profiles
Busbar supports

DD381509.eps

Supports are used to install busbars to the left or right of the device zone. They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware. Designation Cat. no.
Busbar supports 12 chocks for Linergy LGY busbars
DD380741.eps DD380742.eps

04651 01109

Double busbars up to 3200 A. Install three equipotential links between the busbars (voir page B-12).

Busbar supports.

Stop for vertical bars installation on the bottom support

DD384557.EPS

Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbar connections

These connections are used to connect Linergy LGYE horizontal busbars to lateral Linergy LGY busbars up to 1600 A. Supplied with mounting hardware. Cat. No.
Linergy LGYE vertical connection 1600 A Linergy LGYE vertical shifted connection 1600 A (1) (1) To be used when using horizontal connection in 150 mm duct. (2) A single connection by reference. 04602 (2) 04603 (2)

Connection 04602 for Linergy LGY or Linergy BS busbars..


DD385299.EPS

Dedicated connection 04603 for Linergy LGYE busbar in 150 mm duct with horizontal jointing.

Horizontal copper busbar connections


Dd381239.eps

These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to lateral Linergy LGY busbars. Supplied with mounting hardware. Designation Cat. no.
Connection 1000 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04634 (1) Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04635 (1) 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636 (1) width or horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 (1) + 04642 (1) Catalogue numbers 04634, 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Connection 04635 to horizontal copper busbars, 5 mm thick.


DD381240.eps

Connection 04636 to horizontal copper busbars, 10 mm thick.

400E22210

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-19

Distribution
Main distribution

Linergy LGYE profiles 3200-4000 A in 300 mm width framework


Linergy LGYE Cat. No. Permissible current at 35 C for switchboard No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

Lateral busbars up to 4000 A

Busbar calculation

The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). For more information on other ambient temperatures, see page D-24.

W = 300 mm

04560 04561 04562 04563 04564 04565 04566 04567 04568

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 y 100 630 530 800 680 1000 1250 1650 2000 2440 3200 3620 850 1050 1480 1650 2100 2800 3350 3 3+2 3+4 3+6

Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard. Note: up to 2500 A, installation in 300 mm width cubicles is recommended (150 mm is possible); for 3200/4000 A, installation in 300 mm width cubicles is mandatory.

Busbar selection
DD384607.eps DD384550.eps

Linergy LGYE busbars, L = 2000 mm


Cat. no. selection See the table below.
DD384551.eps

DD384552.eps

Bar 2000 A. Cat. no. 04565


DD384545.eps DD384546.eps

Bar 2500 A. Cat. no. 04566


DD384547.eps

Bar 3200 A. Cat. no. 04567


DD384548.eps

DD384553.eps

Bar 4000 A. Cat. no. 04568


DD384549.eps

Bar 630 A. Cat. no. 04560

Bar 1000 A. Bar 1250 A. Bar 1600 A. Cat. no. Cat. no. Cat. no. 04564 04562 04563 Linergy LGYE busbars are supplied in W = 2000 mm. For a lateral installation, the recommended bar length is 1675 mm.

Bar 800 A. Cat. no. 04561

Dimensions
Cat. No.
04560 04561 04562 04563 04564 04565 04566 04567 04568
DD384631.eps

60 23

Busbars up to 4000 A. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Note: for mounting with the Linergy LGYE horizontal busbar, it is recommended to re-cut the Linergy LGYE vertical busbar as indicated below: Rating horizontal busbars 630 to 1600 A 2000 to 2500 A 3200 to 4000 A Rating re-cuts 1675 mm 1675 mm 1625 mm

DD384632.eps

100 31 150 31

DD384633.eps

B-20

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22640

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral busbars up to 4000 A


Linergy LGYE profiles 3200-4000 A in 300 mm width framework
Busbar supports
Designation
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support y 1600 A Linergy LGYE/BS 2000 - 2500 A 3200 - 4000 A Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps

Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Cat. no.
04661 04661 + 04671 04661 + 04646 04662

Busbar supports 04661.

Free support 04662.

Busbars chocks

The bottom support maintains the bars in position.It is not considered a busbar support. Designation Cat. no.
12 spacers 150 mm for Linergy LGYE profile u 3200 A 12 stops/1600 A bottom support Linergy LGYE 12 stops/4000 A bottom support Linergy LGYE Bottom lateral busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Support mounting hardware for bars > 80 mm Linergy LGYE/BS
DD384577.EPS

04646 04658 04659 04666 + 04661 04671

04658 for Linergy LGYE y 1600 A busbar mounted on support 04663.

DD384576.EPS

04659 for Linergy LGYE >1600 A busbar mounted on support 04663.

DD384579.EPS

12 spacers 150 mm 04646 for Linergy LGYE u 3200 A.

400E22640

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-21

Distribution
Main distribution

Linergy LGYE profiles

Lateral busbars up to 4000 A

Busbar connections
These connections are used to connect Linergy LGYE horizontal busbars up to 4000 A to lateral Linergy LGYE busbars. Supplied with mounting hardware. Designation Cat. No.
Linergy LGYE vertical short connection 2500 A Linergy LGYE vertical long connection 2500 A Linergy LGYE vertical connection 4000 A 04604 04605 04607
DD384559.EPS

Linergy LGYE vertical short connection 2500 A (04604).


DD384575.EPS

Linergy LGYE vertical long connection 2500 A (04605).

B-22

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22640

Distribution
Main distribution

Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A

Busbar calculation

The table opposite indicates: b the catalogue numbers of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw in kA rms / 1 second). Busbars are installed in cubicles 650 or 800 mm wide, whatever the depth. For more information on other ambient temperatures and on the depth available for devices, see 25 C, page D-23.

Linergy LGY busbars


Linergy 630 Linergy 800 Linergy 1000 Linergy 1250 Linergy 1600

Cat. no.

Permissible current at 35 C for switchboard


IP y 31 680 840 1040 1290 1650 IP > 31 590 760 950 1170 1480

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)


y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50

04502 04503 04504 04505 04506

Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard. The bottom support also maintains the bars in position. Each catalogue number represents one bar.

Busbar selection
Dd381241.eps

Linergy LGY busbars, L = 1670 mm

Cat. no. selection See the table below. Each bar is supplied with a stop for the bottom support.
DD381233.eps DD381234.eps DD381235.eps

Bar 630 A. Cat. no. 04502

Bar 800 A. Cat. no. 04503

Bar 1000 A. Cat. no. 04504

DD381236.eps

Bar 1250 A. Cat. no. 04505

DD381237.eps

Bar 1600 A. Cat. no. 04506

Busbar supports
The bottom support also maintains the bars in position.

The bottom support maintains the bars in position. They are supplied with 8.8 class mounting hardware. Designation
Linergy LGY rear busbar support 12 chocks for Linergy LGY busbars
Dd381242.eps Dd381243.eps

Cat. no.
04652 01109

Busbar supports.

Stop for vertical bars installation on the bottom support

400E22220

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-23

Distribution
Main distribution

Rear Linergy busbars up to 1600 A

DD384611.EPS

Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbar connections

These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars to vertical rear Linergy busbars. Designation
Linergy LGYEvertical connection 1600 A

Cat. no.
04602

Connection to horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars y 1600 A.


DD384612.EPS

Connection to horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars > 2000 A.

Dd381244.eps

Horizontal Linergy BS busbar connections

These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 or 10 mm thick, to vertical rear Linergy LGY busbars. Designation Cat. no.
Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04635 (1) (2) 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636 (1) (2) width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 (2) + 04642 (1) (1) A part of the connection must be made. (2) Catalogue numbers 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Connection to horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick.


Dd381245.eps

Connection to horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick.

B-24

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22220

Distribution
Mounting hardware

Linergy accessories
Mounting hardware Markers
Presentation
b For secure connections, without drilling: b Linergy bolts clip into the channel of the busbar b they can slide along the entire length of the busbar b they cannot fall to the bottom of the switchboard because they are held in place by the ball in the head, thus facilitating connections b a mark at the end of the bolt indicates whether the bolt is correctly positioned b 8.8 class hardware guarantees withstand to tightening torques and to premature ageing of the electrical contact. Composition of sets: b set of hardware including 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers.

Linergy hardware
DD381218.eps

Dd381221.eps

Dd381220.eps

Cat. no. selection Designation


20 M8 Linergy LGY bolts for cable lugs/flexible bar L 25 mm 20 M8 Linergy LGY bolts for copper bar L 39 mm

Cat. no.
04766 (1) 04767 (2)

(1) Cable lug connected to Linergy busbar using bolt (04766) (compatible with Linergy Evolution and Linergy). (2) Copper bar connected to Linergy busbar using bolt (04767) (compatible with Linergy only). 04766. 04767.

Flat washers
Dd381219.eps

Presentation These washers, sold separately, are required for connection of flexible bars to Linergy busbars. They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper. Composition of sets: b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts. Cat. no. selection Designation
20 M8/diameter 20 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 24 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 28 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY

Cat. no.
04772 04773 04774

Conducting washers
Dd383122.eps

Flat washers For M8 bold and lugs y 25 mm, 20 mm external diameter. Composition of sets: b set of 20 flat washers. Designation
20 M8/diameter 20 mm flat washers for lugs < 25 Linergy LGY

Cat. no.
04775

Connection cross-section

Determining connections using cables


see page D-46. see page D-44.

Determining connections using flexible bars

Markers
Dd381222.eps

Designation
Set of 12 phase markers for Linergy LGY/LGYE profile Linergy LGYE busbar screw plate kit after sales service

Cat. no.
04794 01130

400E22230

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-25

Distribution
Main distribution

Horizontal busbars up to 1600 A

Linergy BS bars 5 mm thick


Number and size of Linergy BS busbars
Permissible current (A)

Busbar calculation

The bars are secured by insulated supports attached to the framework. The tables opposite indicate: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of busbar supports for each type of framework, depending on: v the size of the busbars v the rated short-time withstand current Icw. For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-22.

IP y 31 IP > 31 800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.

No. of bars / phase

Number of supports

y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 1 bar, 60 x 5 1 bar, 80 x 5 2 bars, 60 x 5 2 2+1 2 bars, 80 x 5 W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2 W = 400 mm All sizes 1 2 Note: for a W = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below. W = 650 mm W = 650 + 150 mm

Framework width Size of bars (mm) (mm)

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

Busbar selection
Dd381223.eps

Linergy BS busbars, L = 2000 mm


Horizontal flat bar Linergy BS 800 A 60 x 5 L 2000 Horizontal flat bar Linergy BS 1000 A 80 x 5 L 2000

Designation

04536 04538

Cat. no.

Busbar supports

Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd381226.eps Dd381225.eps

04664 04662

Icw 30 kA eff / 1 s. 04664. 04662.

Joints
Dd381227.eps

Joint for 50/60 mm bar/Linergy BS horizontal busbar Joint for 80/100 mm bar/Linergy BS horizontal busbar

Designation

W = 60 mm W = 80 mm

04640 04641

Cat. no.

Note: when installed,at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.

04640.

Dd381228.eps

Busbar calculation

Top or bottom horizontal busbars

Type of busbars

No. of vertical modules required

B-26

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22100

Distribution
Main distribution

Horizontal busbars up to 3200 A

Linergy BS bars 10 mm thick


Number and size of Linergy BS busbars
IP y 31

Busbar calculation

The bars are secured by insulated supports attached to the framework. The tables opposite indicate: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of busbar supports for each type of framework, depending on: v the size of the busbars v the rated short-time withstand current Icw. For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-22.

Permissible current (A)

IP > 31

No. of bars / phase

1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 2050 1850 2 bars, 50 x 10 2300 2000 2 bars, 60 x 10 2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10 3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10 Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard.

Number of supports

y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 2+2 1 bar, 80 x 10 2 bars, 50 x 10 2 2+1 2 bars, 60 x 10 2 bars, 80 x 10 2 bars, 100 x 10 2 2+1 W = 300 mm All sizes 1 2 W = 400 mm All sizes 1 2 Note: for a W = 800 mm framework, add a free support to the number of fixed supports given by the table below. W = 650 mm W = 650 + 150 mm

Framework width Size of bars (mm) (mm)

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

Busbar selection
Dd381229.eps

Linergy BS busbars, L = 2000 mm


Designation
Horizontal flat bar linergy BS 50 x 10 L2000 Horizontal flat bar linergy BS 60 x 10 L2000 Horizontal flat bar linergy BS 1800 A 80 x 10 L2000 Horizontal flat bar linergy BS 100 x 10 L2000

Cat. no.
04545 04546 04548 04550

Busbar supports

Two fixed supports for 650 mm, 650 + 150 mm wide frameworks and one fixed support for 300/400 mm wide frameworks are mandatory. If more supports are required, use free support. Designation Cat. no.
Horizontal 5/10 mm busbar support Width y 80 mm Linergy LGYE/BS Width > 80 mm Free 5/10 mm busbar support Width y 80 mm Linergy LGYE/BS Width > 80 mm
Dd381226.eps Dd381225.eps

Icw 50 kA eff / 1 s.

04664 04664 + 04671 04662 04662 + 04671

Dd381231.eps

04664.

04662.

Joints

Designation

Cat. no.

Joint for 50/60 mm bar/Linergy BS Width 50 and 60 mm 04640 horizontal busbar Joint for 80/100 mm bar/Linergy BS Width 80 and 100 mm 04641 horizontal busbar Note: when installed, at the bottom of cubicles, the busbars must be partitioned, see page B-38.

04641.

Dd381228.eps

Busbar calculation

Type of busbars
Top or bottom horizontal busbars

No. of vertical modules required


3

400E22100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-27

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral Linergy BS busbars up to 1600 A


Busbars 5 mm thick

Busbar calculation

The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. The bars rest on a bottom support. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required in a cubicle, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw).

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 20 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 7 5 3 1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.

Permissible current for switchboards

No. of bars / phase

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-25.

Busbar selection
DD380724.eps

Linergy BS busbars, L = 1675 mm


Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 800 A 60 x 5 L1675 Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1000 A 80 x 5 L1675
Dd381505.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
04516 04518

Busbar supports

Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps

04661 04662

04661.

04662.

Busbar chocks
Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s. The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports and two free supports.

The bottom support maintains the bars in position. It is not considered a busbar support. Designation
DD380728.eps

Bottom lateral vertical 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS

Cat. no.
04663

Note: When connecting 5 mm flat bars to horizontal busbars, part no. 04663 is not required.

B-28

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22310

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral Linergy BS busbars up to 1600 A


Busbars 5 mm thick
Direct connection (75 mm between centres)
DD383398.eps

Horizontal-busbar connections
DD383844.eps

For busbars with 75 mm between centres, the bars must fully overlap.

DD383399.eps

Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.

Prefabricated connection

These connections are used to connect horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick, to lateral Linergy LGY busbars or Linergy BS busbars. Supplied with mounting hardware.
To satisfy safety clearances, the assembly points on adjacent bars must be staggered as shown above. Connection 1000 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile

Designation

Cat. No.
04634 (1) 04635 (1)

DD381239.eps

(1) Catalogue numbers 04634, 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Connection 04635 to horizontal busbars, 5 mm thick.

400E22310

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-29

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral Linergy BS busbars up to 3200 A


Busbars 10 mm thick

Busbar calculation

The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. The bars rest on a bottom support. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required in a cubicle, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). Above 2800 A (2500 A with IP > 31), the busbars must be doubled and installed in two busbar sections, side by side. In this case, they must be interconnected by three equipotential links.

IP y 31 IP > 31 1200 1080 1400 1250 1800 1600 2050 1850 2300 2000 2820 2500 Double busbars 3200 2820

Permissible current for switchboards

No. of bars / phase


1 bar, 50 x 10 mm 1 bar, 60 x 10 mm 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 2 bars, 50 x 10 mm 2 bars, 60 x 10 mm 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 2 x 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)


y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85

3+2

3+4

3+6

2x3

2x3+2

Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.

For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-25.

Busbar selection
Dd381497.eps

Linergy BS busbars, L = 1675 mm


Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1200 A 50 x 10 L1675 Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1400 A 60 x 10 L1675 Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1800 A 80 x 10 L1675
Dd381505.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
04525 04526 04528

Busbar supports
Busbars y 1600 A (IP y 31).

Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports.
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
Dd381498.eps Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
04661 04662

04661.

04662.

Busbar chocks

The bottom support maintains the bars in position. It is not considered a busbar support. Designation
DD381124.eps

Bottom lateral vertical 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS

Cat. no.
04663

Busbars up to 3200 A.

Horizontal-busbar connections
Dd381499.eps

Connection to horizontal Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick. Designation


Connection between vertical busbars (1 bar/phase) and horizontal busbars W = 80 mm 50/60 mm 04636 (1) W > 80 mm 50/60 mm 04636 (1) + 04642 W y 80 mm 80 mm 04637 (1) W > 80 mm 80 mm 04637 (1) + 04642 Connection between vertical busbars W y 80 mm 50/80 mm 04637 (1) (2 bars/phase) and horizontal busbars W > 80 mm 50/80 mm 04637 (1) + 04642 Connection between double vertical W = 80 mm 80 mm 04636 (1) x 2 busbars and horizontal busbars W > 80 mm 80 mm (04637 (1) + 04642) x 2 (1) Catalogue numbers 04636 and 04637 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Horizontal busbars

Vertical busbars

Cat. no.

B-30

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22310

Distribution
Main distribution

Lateral Linergy BS busbars up to 3200 A


For 300 mm width framework
Permissible current for switchboards
IP > 31 750 900 1250 1600

Busbar calculation

The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. The bars rest on a bottom support. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required in a cubicle, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw).

No. of bars / phase


1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)


y 15 y 20 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50

IP y 31 800 1000 1400 1800

3+2

3+4

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 mm 3+4 3+6 2150 1900 1 bar, 100 x 10 mm 3 2820 2500 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm 3+2 3+4 3300 2900 2 bars, 100 x 10 mm Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35 C around the switchboard.

Permissible current for switchboards

No. of bars / phase

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

Busbar supports
Dd383193.eps

Three fixed supports are required to maintain the busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Lateral fixed 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy Width y 80 mm LGYE/BS Width > 80 mm Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS Width y 80 mm Width > 80 mm
Dd380829.eps Dd381650.eps

04661 04661 + 04671 04662 04662 + 04671

04661.

04662.

Busbar chocks

The bottom support maintains the bars in position. It is not considered a busbar support. Designation

Bottom lateral 5/10 mm busbar support W300 Linergy LGYE/BS all bars 5 mm width 1 bar. 80 x 10 mm 2 bars, 80 x 10 mm Bottom support for busbar 100 x 10 mm
DD383194.eps

Cat. no.
04666

04666 + 04661

Horizontal-busbar connections
DD383844.eps DD384320.eps

Direct connection (75 mm between centres)

For busbars with 75 mm between centres, the bars must fully overlap.

50/60/80/100

DD383399.eps

Drilling diagram for horizontal busbars, 10 mm thick. Horizontal bars (mm) 50 60 80 100

Number of assembly screws (04645)

To satisfy safety clearances, the assembly points on adjacent bars must be staggered as shown above.

Vertical bars (mm) 50 60 2 2 2 -

80 2 2 3 -

100 2 2 3 4

400E22310

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-31

Distribution
Main distribution

Rear Linergy BS busbars up to 1600 A


Busbars, 5 mm thick

Busbar calculation

The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars rest on one of the fixed supports. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-26.

Permissible current for switchboards

Bars / phase

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 15 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 800 750 1 bar, 60 x 5 mm 1000 900 1 bar, 80 x 5 mm 3+4 3 1400 1250 2 bars, 60 x 5 mm 3+2 1800 1600 2 bars, 80 x 5 mm Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard. A set of busbars made up of two 80 x 5 mm bars per phase must be installed in a cubicle 600 mm deep.

Busbar selection
DD380729.eps

Linergy BS busbars, L = 1675 mm


Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 800 A 60 x 5 L1675 Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1000 A 80 x 5 L1675
Dd381505.eps

Designation

04516 04518

Cat. no.

Busbar supports
Designation

Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports.
Linergy BS rear vertical support for 5/10 mm bar Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
DD380732.eps DD381652.eps

04653 04662

Cat. no.

04653.

04662.

Icw 30 kA rms / 1 s. and maintains the position of the bar. The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x 04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).

Busbar chocks

A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support and maintains the position of the bar. Designation Cat. no.
100 metallic spacer thickness 5 mm Linergy BS
Dd380815.eps Dd382303.eps

04669

Chocking for one bar per phase.

Chocking for two bars per phase.

DD380730.eps

Horizontal-busbar connections

Connection 1600 A 5 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile 04635 (1) (2) 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal Width y 80 mm 04636 (1) (2) busbar with Linergy LGY profile Width > 80 mm 04636 (2) + 04642 (1) (1) A part of the connection must be made. (2) Catalogue numbers 04635 and 04636 include 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Designation

Cat. no.

B-32

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22320

Distribution
Main distribution

Rear Linergy BS busbars up to 1600 A


Busbars, 10 mm thick

The bars are secured by insulated supports. Three fixed supports, attached to the framework, are mandatory. If necessary, additional free supports may be used. Mounting chocks screwed to the busbars rest on one of the fixed supports. The table opposite indicates: b the number and size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the number of supports required, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). For more information on busbar calculations, see page D-26.

Busbar calculation

IP y 31 IP > 31 y 25 y 30 y 40 y 50 y 60 y 65 y 75 y 85 1200 1080 1 bar, 50 x 10 1400 1250 1 bar, 60 x 10 3 3+2 3+4 3+6 1800 1600 1 bar, 80 x 10 Note: the permissible current values for the busbars are given for an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.

Permissible current Size of bars for switchboards

No. of supports Icw (kA rms / 1 s)

Dd381503.eps

Busbar selection

Linergy BS busbars, L = 1675 mm


Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1200 A 50 x 10 L1675 Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1400 A 60 x 10 L1675 Drilled flat bar Linergy BS 1800 A 80 x 10 L1675
Dd381505.eps

Designation

04525 04526 04528

Cat. no.

Busbar supports

Three fixed supports are required to maintain the vertical busbars. If more than three supports are required, use additional free supports. Designation Cat. no.
Linergy BS rear vertical support for 5/10 mm bar Free 5/10 mm busbar support Linergy LGYE/BS
DD380732.eps

04653 04662

04653. Icw 40 kA rms / 1 s. and maintains the position of the bar. The bars are secured by three mandatory fixed supports (3 x 04653) and two free supports (2 x 04662).

DD381652.eps

04662.

Busbar chocks

A metal mounting chock, 5 mm thick, is screwed to the bar. It rests on a fixed support and maintains the position of the bar. Designation Cat. no.
100 metallic spacer thickness 5 mm Linergy BS
Dd380815.eps

04669

Chocking for one bar per phase.

DD380733.eps

Chocking for two bars per phase.

Horizontal-busbar connections
Dd381504.eps

1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile width of horizontal bars y 80 mm 04636 (1)(2) width of horizontal bars > 80 mm 04636 (2) + 04642 (1) (1) A part of the connection must be made. (2) Catalogue number 04636 includes 1 connection only. Order 1 connection per phase.

Designation

Cat. no.

400E22320

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-33

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 1 electrical switchboards

Presentation

Decisions concerning the Form of separation and the degree of protection are the subject of an agreement between the manufacturer and the user.

In most installations, Prisma P cubicles do not require partitioning. In this case, the switchboard is a Form 1. Safety being one of its foremost goals, Schneider Electric offers options and features that go well beyond the recommendations of the standard. The protection of life and property is a standard feature due to: b front plates that require a tool to be removed b keylocks on doors, some of which provide access to live parts b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NSX circuit breakers and Compact INS and INV switch-disconnectors b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals on the incoming device so that operators are perfectly safe at all points in the switchboard when the incoming device is off (open). What is more, Prisma P offers different levels of partitioning to create separations inside the cubicles and thus create Form 2, 3 and 4 electrical switchboards. Electrical switchboards must meet the degree of protection IP2X to comply with standard IEC 61439-1 and 2.
DD384585.eps

Form 1 configuration

Covering of upstream and downstream terminals on all devices.

The protection of life and property is ensured by: b the systematic installation of terminal shields on Compact NSX circuit breakers and on Compact INS and INV switch-disconnectors (see the pages on the functional units) b covering of the upstream and downstream terminals of the incoming device.

Covering of the connection between an incoming device and lateral busbars


Dd382041.eps

Cat. no. selection


Masterpact NW Masterpact NT Compact NS630b/1600 Compact NS1600b/3200 (1) Compact INS-INV630b/2500 (1) For more informations, see page A-19.

Device

04926 + 04927 04926 04926 04926 04926

Cover

04926.

B-34

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22900

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 1 electrical switchboards


Covering the supply terminals on the incoming device
Cable connection
Device Form 1 cover 04861 04852 04851 04852

Front connection
Dd382019.eps

Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker


NW08/32 NT06/16

Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker


Fixed NS630b/1600 Withdrawable NS630b/1600

04861.
Dd382020.eps

Canalis connection
Device Form 1 cover 04861 + 04871 04852 + 04871 04851 + 04871 04852 + 04871

Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker


NW08/32 NT06/16

Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker


Fixed NS630b/1600 Withdrawable NS630b/1600

04861 + 04871.

Rear connection
Dd382021.eps

Cable connection
Device Form 1 cover 04863 04854 04853 04854

Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker


NW08/32 NT06/16

Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker


Fixed NS630b/1600 Withdrawable NS630b/1600

04863.
Dd382022.eps

Canalis connection
Device NW08/32 NT06/16 Form 1 cover 04863 + 04871 04854 + 04871 04853 + 04871 04854 + 04871

Fixed or drawout Masterpact circuit breaker Fixed or withdrawable Compact circuit breaker

Fixed NS630b/1600 Withdrawable NS630b/1600

04863 + 04871.

400E22900

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-35

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 2 partitioning

Definition of Form 2

Separation of busbars from the functional units: b protection against contact with live parts upstream of the outgoing circuits b protection against penetration of foreign solid bodies. The two types of Form 2 separation as defined by IEC 60439-2
Dd381679.eps Dd381679.eps

Form 2a.

Form 2b.

b Form 2a Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars. The functional units are separated from the busbars, but not the terminals. b Form 2b Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars. b The functional units and the terminals are separated from the busbars.

Form 2 configuration
PD390420.eps

Separation of busbars from the functional units

Form 2 partitioning is essential to ensure excellent protection for the installation and operators working in the switchboard. When added to standard protection features (terminal shields, prefabricated connections, etc.), it eliminates the risk of direct contacts with live parts. Prisma P offers Form 2b. Form 2b provides much better safety than Form 2a, notably during connection, because the terminals are separated from the busbars.
DD384526.eps

Form 2b partitioning.

B-36

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22900

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 2 partitioning

Dd383712.eps

Partitioning of lateral vertical busbars

Lateral partitioning

b vertical barrier made of insulating slats b can be installed on both sides of Linergy BS or Linergy LGY busbars b made up of: v four supports that clip to the framework v five extruded slats that clip to the supports v two metal plates at the top and bottom that can be cut out to pass a PE or PEN conductor, or one or two 30 x 60 mm trunking sections b the space between the slats is sufficient for prefabricated connections (one copper bar, 5 or 10 mm thick, or insulated flexible bars) or for cables up to 35 mm, while maintaining the degree of protection IP2X b compliance with standard IEC 695.2.1 concerning withstand to fire.

Form 2 restoration for side-barrier cut-out

04922.
Dd383713.eps

This kit enables passage of the connection between a device > 1600 A (NW, INS) and lateral vertical busbars. It is made up of an insulated plate (six modules high = 300 mm) that can be cut as required, supplied with supports and the necessary hardware. It can be installed at any height in the switchboard. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.

Form 2 side barrier Form 2 restoration kit

04922 04924

04924.

Front and rear barrier

Barrier, W = 150 mm or W = 300 mm, from top to bottom of the cubicle. Can be installed in the front and rear of the busbar compartment. Protects against direct contact with the busbars. Cat. no. selection
Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars 04921 04920 Front or rear barrier for lateral vertical busbars W = 300 mm(1) (1) A busbar support (04666) must be mounted for the bottom fixture of the 300 mm wide barrier.

Designation

Cat. no.

Front protection This barrier is not required in front when the cubicle is equipped with a plain or transparent door.
With door
Dd381588.eps Dd381589.eps

Dd383714.eps

With cover frame


DD382528.eps

Framework width 300 mm

Dd383715.eps

b For 800 mm cubicles : b the door is systematically supplied with a barrier. b the cover frame is supplied with a wicket door, W = 150 mm, on which devices can be mounted. A front barrier is indispensable. Rear protection A barrier is required at the rear of the busbar compartment in cubicles that are 600, 800 and 1000 mm deep.
DD382440.eps

04921

04920

400E22900

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-37

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 2 partitioning

Partitioning of horizontal busbars


DD384521.EPS

Set of two barriers (front and rear), plus a slotted rear panel for efficient natural convection in the switchboard. The set can be used to partition horizontal busbars installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle. The space required for the busbars is not increased. Cat. no. selection Selection table In form 2 partitioning horiz. busbar
Linergy LGYE (P400) Top Bottom y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 Linergy LGYE (P600) Top Bottom y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 y 2500 A 3 u 3200 A 4 Linergy BS (P400) Top Bottom y 3200 A 3 4000 A 4 y 4000 A 3 04973 04963 04974 04964 04976 04966 04976 04966 04978 04968 04983 04963 04984 04964 04986 04966 04986 04966 04988 04968 04973 04963 04974 04964 04976 04966 04976 04966 04978 04968

Modularity L300

L400

L650

L650 + 150

L800

04973 + 04974 + 04976 + 04976 + 04976 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 04963 + 04964 + 04966 + 04966 + 04966 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919

DD384522.EPS

04976 For framework, W = 650 mm, W = 800 mm (650 + 150).

04983 + 04984 + 04986 + 04986 + 04986 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 04963 + 04964 + 04966 + 04966 + 04966 + 04915 04915 04915 04915 04915

04974 For framework, W = 400 mm.

04973 + 04974 + 04976 + 04976 + 04976 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 04983 04963 04984 04964 04986 04966 04986 04966 04988 04968

Linergy BS (P600) Top Bottom y 3200 A 3 4000 A 4 y 4000 A 3

04983 + 04984 + 04986 + 04986 + 04986 + 04915 04915 04919 04919 04919 Note: when the busbars are at the bottom of the cubicle, gland plates are mandatory, see page C-18.

DD384524.eps

To protect horizontal busbars installed at the bottom of the cubicle, the slotted horizontal panel can be replaced by a plain barrier. Designation Cat. no.
Plain barrier W = 300, W = 400 Plain barrier W = 650, W = 800 04915 04919

04919 For framework, W = 650 mm, W = 800 mm (650 + 150).


DD384523.eps

04915 For framework, W = 300 mm, W = 400 mm.

B-38

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22900

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 2 partitioning

Running of auxiliary wires

We recommend running all auxiliary wires in trunking or straps. In Prisma P system P cubicles, the wires can be run in any combination of three directions (vertical, horizontal widthwise and horizontal depthwise) to ensure optimum and rational wiring layouts.

Auxiliary wiring knock-outs

With Prisma P, the top and bottom partitioning plates of the lateral vertical busbars are equipped with knock-outs designed for the passage of two 30 x 60 mm trunking sections. These plates are reversible front and back to adapt to auxiliary wires running in the front or rear of the cubicles.

DD384586.EPS

400E22900

DD384099.eps

DD385322.eps

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-39

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 3 partitioning

Definition of Form 3

Separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units from one another. Separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units, but not from each other. b protection against contact with live parts b reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical arcs, etc.). The two types of Form 3 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1.
Dd381680.eps Dd381681.eps

Form 3a.

Form 3b.

Form 3a Terminals for external conductors not separated from busbars. The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars, but not the terminals. b Form 3b Terminals for external conductors separated from busbars. The functional units are separated from each other and from the busbars. The terminals are separated from the busbars, but not from each other.

Form 3 configuration

DD384527.eps

Form 2 switchboard with: b separation of the functional units from one another b separation of the terminals for external conductors from the functional units.

Prisma P offers Form 3b because it provides much better safety than Form 3a, because the terminals are separated from the busbars.

Form 3b partitioning.

B-40

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22910

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 3 partitioning

Form 3 configuration
Dd383719.eps

Front connection
Presentation A horizontal metal partition can be used to physically separate functional units from one another. It is fixed at the rear by a support (two uprights) secured to the framework (400 mm deep) or to the intermediate uprights (600 mm deep frameworks). A set of brackets can be used to install partial Form 3 partitioning in the cubicle.It does not take up any useful space in the switchboard. Cat. no. selection Designation
Horizontal metal partition, W = 650 m Rear support for partitions, W = 650 mm 6 universal angle brackets
DD383107.eps

Cat. no.
04901 04943 03583

04901 + 04943
Dd383081.eps

04901 + 03583

Rear connection
Presentation For rear connection, in addition to the horizontal partitions, vertical partitions are required at the rear of each functional unit. There are two heights: b 3 to 4 modules b 5 to 6 modules. Cat. no. selection Designation
Vertical partitions (two cat. no. per functional unit) 3 to 4 modules 5 to 6 modules
Dd383601.eps

Cat. no.
04955 04956

Vertical partitions for rear connected Compact NSX250.

400E22910

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-41

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 4 partitioning

Definition of Form 4

b separation of busbars from the functional units and separation of all functional units from one another, including the terminals for external conductors which are an integral part of the functional unit b protection against contacts with live parts and reduction in the risk of faults between the functional units (propagation of electrical arcs, etc.). The two types of Form 4 separation as defined by IEC 60439-1 and 2
Dd382369.eps Dd382370.eps

Form 4a.

Form 4b.

b Form 4a Terminals for external conductors in the same compartment as the associated b functional unit. b Form 4b Terminals for external conductors not in the same compartment as the associated functional unit, but in individual, separate, enclosed protected spaces or compartments.

Form 4 configuration

Form 3 switchboard with covers over the terminals for external conductors.

b Prisma P offers both Form 4a and Form 4b. In addition to partitioning of the main busbars (Form 2) and installation of the horizontal partitions between functional units (Form 3), the cubicle must be equipped with: b Form 4 gland plates to achieve Form 4a b Form 4 covers for connection transfer assemblies to achieve Form 4b.
DD384525.eps

Form 4 partitioning: Form 4a (cubicle on left) and Form 4b (cubicle on right).

B-42

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22920

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 4 partitioning

Covering the connection terminals on the incoming device

Dd382012.eps

See the pages on functional units or see page B-34.

Covering the connection terminals of outgoing devices

Dd383084.eps

See the following pages.

400E22920

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-43

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device

Front connection
Dd383603.eps

Form 4a - direct connection to the device


Presentation On a cubicle already equipped with Form 2 and 3 partitions, Form 4 is achieved by installing: b a backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) made up to two metal half panels mounted on the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. This backplate is not indispensable for 400 mm deep frameworks b a plastic gland plate that can be easily cut out (one for each functional unit) and is mounted on the framework. There are two heights: b 3 to 4 modules b 5 to 6 modules. Cat. no. selection Designation
Form 4 backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) Form 4 gland plate 3 to 4 modules 5 to 6 modules

Cat. no.
04946 04951 04952

Dd383604.eps

Form 4b - connection in a lateral compartment


Presentation On a cubicle already equipped with Form 2 and 3 partitions, Form 4 is achieved by installing: b a backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) made up to two metal half panels mounted on the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. This backplate is not indispensable for 400 mm deep frameworks b a cover with plastic gland plates that can be easily cut out on the side and bottom. It is available in two heights: v 3 to 5 modules, 150 mm wide v 4 to 6 modules, 200 mm wide. Cat. no. selection Designation
Form 4 backplate (one cat. no. per cubicle) Form 4 cover for connection transfer assembly
Dd382035.eps

Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules (W = 150 mm) 4 to 6 modules (W = 200 mm)
Dd382036.eps

04946 04953 04954

04953.
Dd382438.eps

04954.

B-44

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22920

Distribution
Main distribution

Form 4 partitioning
Outgoing device

Rear connection
Dd383605.eps

Form 4a - direct connection to the device


Presentation On a cubicle already equipped with Form 2 and 3 partitions, Form 4 is achieved by installing a gland plate at the rear of each functional unit. They are connected directly to the rear supports for Form 3 partitions. It is available in two heights: b 3 to 4 modules b 5 to 6 modules. Cat. no. selection Designation
Form 4 gland plate
Dd383607.eps

Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules 4 to 6 modules 04951 04952

D C B A

D C B A

Dd383606.eps

Form 4b - connection at the rear of the cubicle


Presentation On a cubicle already equipped with Form 2 and 3 partitions, Form 4 is achieved by installing a Form 4 cover. It comprises two height-adjustable metal flanges and plastic gland plates that can be easily cut out at the rear and bottom. It is available in two versions: b 3 to 5 modules (D = 150 mm) b 4 to 6 modules (D = 200 mm). Cat. no. selection Designation
Form 4 cover for connection transfer assembly
Dd382038.eps

Cat. no.
3 to 5 modules 4 to 6 modules
Dd382039.eps

04953 04954

04954.
Dd383090.eps

04953.

400E22920

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-45

Distribution
Main distribution

Other partitions

Inter-cubicle partition
DD383720.eps

Metal partition, used to separate two adjacent cubicles. It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high. The top and bottom ends have knock-outs for busbars, PE/PEN conductors or auxiliary wiring. Supplied with the necessary supports and hardware, the partition is mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the functional mounting plates. Cat. no. selection Designation
Inter-cubicle partition Depth 400 mm Depth 600 mm

Cat. no.
04911 04911 + 04931

04911.
Dd383722.eps

04911 + 04931.

B-46

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

400E22930

Distribution
Main distribution

Other partitions

Inter-cubicle partition
DD383721.eps

Metal partition used to separate two adjacent cubicles (for example, when the power factor correction cubicle is combined with a main low-voltage switchboard). It is made up of two panels, each 850 mm high. The top and bottom have knock-outs for horizontal busbars. Supplied with the necessary supports and mounting hardware, the partition is mounted on the framework and does not hinder installation of the power factor correction modules. Cat. no. selection Designation
Inter-cubicle partition Depth 400 mm Depth 600 mm

Cat. no.
04911 04931 + 04911

400E22930

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

B-47

Prisma P
For incoming devices up to 630 A
Linergy DX 1P 160 A Linergy DP 3P/4P 250 A

- Reliable spring-terminal connections for outgoing circuits, requiring no maintenance - Horizontal or vertical installation in minimum space

B-58

160 to 630 A multi-stage Linergy BS distribution block

- Traditional, highly versatile solution - Many installation possibilities

B-59

B-48

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E00030

distribution blocks
For rows of devices
100/250 A Linergy FC
- Tested solution for all needs up to 800 A - High-quality connections requiring no maintenance - Easy switchboard upgrades

B-62

125 to 160 A Linergy DX


- Spring terminals for electrical connections that stay tight - Front designed to integrate perfectly with modular devices

B-55

63/200 A Linergy FM
- Reliable spring-terminal connections requiring no maintenance - Fast installation - Easy upgrades through replacement or addition of devices - Easy balancing of phases

B-60

Linergy FH 80 to 125 A
- Fast and direct connections, adaptable to all needs - Fast, economical connections

B-41

Linergy TB 63/160 A
- Innovative solution

B-72

400E00030

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-49

Distribution
Secondary distribution

630 A Linergy BW busbars

Linergy BW busbars are compact and fully insulated (IPxxB). They are supplied ready for installation in the switchboard. There are three and four-pole versions with ratings from 125 to 630 A. Available in four lengths, they can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating.
Dd382577.eps

Presentation

Composition Linergy BW busbars are made up of ETP H12 channelled copper bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm. They are mounted on insulated bases and can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating. The ends of the busbars are plugged. Clip-on covers protect against direct contact from the front. The covers can be easily cut for the connections to the devices. Installation The busbars are supplied with supports that screw to the functional uprights of enclosures or to an adapter in a cubicle. They can be cut every 150 or 200 mm, depending on the rating. Electrical characteristics
Permissible current of the busbars (A) 125 160 250 400 630 Rated short-time withstand current Icw (kA rms / 1 s) 8.5 10 13 20 25 Rated peak withstand current Ipk (k) 20 30 30 52.5 52.5

v rated insulation voltage: v Linergy BW 125 A busbars: Ui = 500 V v Linergy BW 160/400 A busbars: Ui = 750 V v Linergy BW 630 A busbars: Ui = 1000 V b impulse withstand voltage: v Linergy BW 125/630 A busbars: Uimp = 8 kV.

Dd382578.eps

125 A Linergy BW busbars

Available in two lengths (450 and 750 mm) in three and four-pole versions. The busbars can be cut to length every 150 mm. They are supplied with clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut as needed. For Linergy BW busbars installation, order two adapters 03595 x 2 (4 lateral cross-members + 2 longitudinal cross-members). Cat. no. selection Linergy BW busbars 125 A
Three-pole Four-pole W = 450 mm W = 750 mm W = 450 mm W = 750 mm

Cat. no.
04103 04107 04104 04108 04145

Four 125 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals) A 35 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end. 95 mm tunnel terminals for Compact INS :  cat. no. 28947 (set of 3) cat. no. 28948 (set of 4)

Busbar connection

B-50

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E22010

Distribution
Secondary distribution

630 A Linergy BW busbars

160/630 A Linergy BW busbars


Dd382579.eps

Available in two lengths (1000 and 1400 mm) in three and four-pole versions. The busbars can be cut to length every 200 mm. Prefabricated connections are available for the devices.
Three-pole Four-pole

Linergy BW busbars

Power supply block (with connection)

Connection between incoming device and Linergy BW busbars

W = 1000 mm W = 1400 mm W = 1000 mm W = 1400 mm

04111 04116 04121 04126

160 A

04112 04117 04122 04127

250 A

04113 04118 04123 04128

400 A

04114 04119 04124 04129

630 A

Universal power supply block (without connection) Connection for universal power supply block

NSX250 NSX400 NSX630 100/250 A 400/630 A Vertical NSX100/250 Vertical NSX100/250 in duct Vertical NSX400/630 in duct

04060 04070 04071 04061 04074 04062 04064 04073

Cat. no.

Dd383646.eps

NSX400 power supply block (04070) between incoming device and busbars. NSX250 power supply block (04060) between busbars and Compact NS250.

Dd383644.eps

Dd383645.eps

250 A universal power supply block (04061) + 250 A connection (04062) between incoming device and busbars.

Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and Linergy BW busbars


4P connection Linergy BW insulated busbar /Linergy FM distribution block 4P 200 A

Cat. no.
04021

35 mm additional blocks

Cat. no.
04155 04156

Additional block 2x35 3P for Linergy DP 250 Additional block 2x35 4P for Linergy DP 250 A 35 mm 4P additional blocks (04156).

Busbar connection
4 160 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NSA160) A 45 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end.

Cat. no.
04146

Cable lugs
Bare tubular elbow cable lugs: see page D-47.

Prisma G adapter, W = 500 mm

Adaptation

Cat. no.
03595

Note: the adapter 03595 can be used for all mounting plates, except 03030. For Linergy BW busbars installation, order two adapters 03595 x 2 (4 lateral cross-members + 2 longitudinal cross-members).

400E22010

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

B-51

Distribution
Secondary distribution

630 A Powerclip busbars

Accessories
Dd382580.eps

Powerclip tap-off blocks

Each block can be used to connect: b one 6 mm and one 10 mm cable (04151) b one 16 mm cables (04152). Equipped with spring terminals. Designation
12 terminals for cable 6/10 and 1x10 for Linergy BW insulated busbar 12 terminals for cable 1x16 for Linergy BW insulated busbar

Cat. no.
04151 04152

Connection cover
Dd382581.eps

Clip-on covers that block off the connected cable lugs and can be cut as needed. They maintain IPxxB with 90 angle lugs and/or cable sizes from 10 to 25 mm. Designation Cat. no.
8 IPXXB connection covers/ lug with cable 10-25 for Linergy BW insulated busbar 04150

8.8 class mounting hardware

Used for electrical connections to the copper bars. Designation


20 screws 8.8 class M6x12 for Linergy BW insulated busbar

Cat. no.
04158

B-52

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E22010

Distribution
Secondary distribution

400 A rear Linergy BS busbars

The rear Linergy BS busbars are mounted directly on the uprights of the framework. There are three and four-pole versions with ratings from 160 to 400 A. Available in two lengths, 1000 and 1400 mm, they can be cut as needed. The connection with a Compact incoming device occupies two vertical modules (50 mm each).

Dd382627.eps

Presentation

Composition Linergy BS bars with threaded M6 holes every 25 mm for connection along the entire length of the busbars. The insulating supports can receive a fifth bar, 15 x 5 mm or 20 x 5 mm, to create an earth bar. Installation The busbars are mounted directly on the functional uprights of enclosures or on an adapter (03595) in a cubicle. Connection b 16 mm to 50 mm flexible cables, with crimped lugs b insulated flexible bars (see Insulated flexible bars, page B-64). Electrical characteristics b rated peak withstand current Ipk (k) v 30 k for 160 A busbars v 40 k for 250 A busbars v 55 k for 400 A busbars b rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V

Busbar calculation

Busbar size and distance between supports The table below indicates: b the size of the bars to be used, depending on the permissible current level in the busbars b the distance between supports, depending on the rated short-time withstand current (Icw). Rating Size of bars Distance between support centres (1) (A) (mm) (mm)
20 25 160 15 x 5 250 20 x 5 400 32 x 5 450 300 225 (1) Linergy FM 200 A distribution blocks equipped with connections (04029) can be used as intermediate supports (200 mm max. distance between centres) in addition to the top and bottom supports. Icw (kA rms / 1 s) 10 13 15

400E22020

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-53

Distribution
Secondary distribution

400 A rear Linergy BS busbars

Busbar selection
Dd382628.eps

4 threaded bars L1000 for Linergy BS busbar 4 threaded bars L1400 for Linergy BS busbar

Copper bars

Rating (A)
160 250 400 160 250 400

Size of bars (mm)


15 x 5 20 x 5 32 x 5 15 x 5 20 x 5 32 x 5

Cat. no.
04161 04162 04163 04171 04172 04173

Linergy BS rear busbar support 400 A


Dd381388.eps Dd381389.eps

Busbar supports

04191

Copper bars.

Busbar supports.

Accessories
Dd382629.eps

Rear busbar barrier Linergy BS

Protects against direct contact with the busbar connections. Supplied with mounting hardware. Designation
Barrier H100 mm for Linergy BS 400 A rear busbar

04198

Cat. no.

04198.
Dd382630.eps

125 A connection

Four 125 A connections, W = 230 mm (for NG125, NSA and INS equipped with tunnel terminals) A 35 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end. 95 mm tunnel terminals for INS : cat. no. 28947 (set of 3) cat. no. 28948 (set of 4). 04145.

For direct supply to Linergy FH comb busbars from the rear Linergy BS busbars in the switchboard. Designation Cat. no.
04145

160 A connection
Designation

For direct supply from the rear Linergy BS busbars in the switchboard.
4 160 A connections A 45 mm ferrule for connection to tunnel terminals is crimped to one end. A 45 ring lug is crimped to the other end.
Dd382631.eps

Cat. no.
04146

200 A connection

For supply of a 200 A Linergy FM distribution block from the rear busbars in the switchboard. Designation Cat. no.
4 connections Linergy BS rear busbar /linergy FM distribution block 4P 200 A 04029

Connection between busbars


04029.
Dd381458.eps

For electrical connections between two sets of rear busbars.


4 copper angle brackets, 250A

Designation

04190

Cat. no.

8.8 class mounting hardware


20 bolts 8.8 class M6x20 for 5 mm bar 40 screws 8.8 class M6x16 for < 630 A threaded bar 04190.

Designation

04194 04195

Cat. no.

B-54

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22020

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy DX distribution block

General
Dd381399.eps

Downstream circuits are connected from the front, to spring terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor. It does not depend on the operator. Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations. Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring terminal. Degree of protection: IPxxB. Advantages b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed over time) b very fast connection b easy phase balancing b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified. The four-pole distribution block is made up of: b a fully insulated, one-piece distribution block complying with the degree of protection IPxxB (protection against direct contacts) b a modular cover. The design of the front (45 mm nose) blends perfectly into a row comprising modular devices. Designation Cat. no.
Linergy DX 63 A (top connection) Linergy DX 63 A (bottom connection) 125 A Linergy DX distribution block 160 A Linergy DX distribution block + connection 04040 04041 04045 04046

Cable connection.

Linergy DX distribution block


PD390651R-SE-20.eps PD390657R-SE-47.eps

DD381660.eps

b Electrical characteristics b rated insulation level: Ui = 750 V b rated operational current Ie (40C): v 125 A for the 125 A Linergy DX v 160 A for the 160 A Linergy DX with its prefabricated connection for INS160 or NSA160 b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been tested. b complies with the low-voltage device standard IEC 60947.7.1 and/or IEC 60439.1 b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply b tunnel terminal on 125 A Linergy DX 125 for 6 to 35v flexible cables (10 to 35v rigid cables) b the 160 A Linergy DX is supplied with a prefabricated flexible connection. It is designed for an INS100/160 or NSA160 switch-disconnector, installed on the left or right. Distribution (125 and 160 A Linergy DX) b spring terminals: v 2 outgoers from 1 to 10v, flexible or rigid v 3 outgoers from 1 to 6v, flexible or rigid v 7 outgoers from 1 to 4v, flexible or rigid b tunnel terminals: v 1 outgoer from 4 to 16v, flexible (4 to 25v rigid) Supply b an identification label b adhesive labels for phase identification b a prefabricated flexible connection for the INS160 or NSA160 (160 A Linergy DX only).

400E22015

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

B-55

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy DX distribution block

Installation b clipped onto a modular rail b width occupied is 12 modules (9 mm each) b screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Distances between centres = 100 x 75 mm. Dimensions
Dd381608.eps Dd381609.eps

125 A connection
PD390658R.eps

Set of four flexible connections, 35v, L = 210 mm. To supply a 125 A Linergy DX from a NG125 or a INS125. Designation
4 NG-INS125 connections for Linergy DX
Dd380932.eps

Cat. no.
04047

B-56

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E22015

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy DX distribution block

35 mm additional blocks
DD381403.eps

These blocks with screw terminals can be mounted on the 250 A Linergy DP for connection of two 35 mm cables per phase. Designation Cat. no.
35 mm 3P additional blocks (3 blocks) 35 mm 4P additional blocks (4 blocks) 04155 04156

160 A Linergy DX distribution block


Dd383654.eps

The 160 A Linergy DX is made up of individual elements that can be used alone or with others to make two-pole, three-pole or four-pole distribution blocks. Mounting is very fast. It clips onto a modular rail and is supplied by cables via a tunnel terminal. The connection spring terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and bending of the flexible and rigid cables. It is supplied with a cover that also guides the cables. Cat. no. selection

Designation
Three 160 A Linergy DX distribution blocks in the vertical position on a modular rail, supplied by an NG125. Linergy DX distribution block, 1P, 160 A

Cat. no.
04031

Electrical characteristics b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations were tested. The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices. Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered. b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply Direct to a tunnel terminal, for cables up to 70 mm. Distribution Via cables, up to six 16 mm cables. Installation The blocks clip onto a modular rail. Dimensions
Dd384321.eps

Dd382981.eps

70

95

36

400E22090

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

B-57

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy DP distribution block

General
Dd381399.eps

Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring terminals. Contact pressure automatically adapts to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1 mm ). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations. Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring terminal. Degree of protection: IPxxB. Advantages of spring terminals b a reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required b the fast connections make phase balancing very easy. b rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified.

PD390549R.eps

250 A Linergy DP distribution block

Applications The Linergy DP distribution block is designed for installation directly downstream of Compact circuit breakers and Compact switch-disconnectors devices up to 250 A. It can be rapidly mounted in the horizontal position. Electrical connections are made directly to the device terminals. It has the same width as the devices and does not take up any additional space in the switchboard. The connection terminals are slanted to facilitate cable entry and not exceed the bending radius of the flexible and rigid cables. Cat. no. selection Designation
Linergy DP distribution block, 3P, 250 A Linergy DP distribution block, 4P, 250 A

Cat. no.
04033 04034

Electrical characteristics The electrical characteristics are perfectly compatible with the connected devices. Neither the temperature derating curves nor the performance levels of the circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are altered. b rated insulation level Ui = 750 V b short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been tested. b impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply Directly to the terminals of the Compact NSX and Compact INS devices up to 250 A. Distribution Via cables, up to six 10 mm cables and three 16 mm cables per phase.
Vertically mounted Linergy DP on a depth-adjustable modular rail (03402) in a cubicle.

DD381402.eps

Installation Directly on the mounting plates of horizontally mounted Compact NSX100/250 and Compact INS250 devices in the enclosures. It can also be mounted downstream of vertically mounted Compact NSX100/250 and Compact INS250 devices in the enclosures. In this case, the Linergy DP is mounted on a depth-adjustable modular rail (03402). Dimensions
Linergy DP, 3P Linergy DP, 4P
DD384581.eps

H (mm)
105 140 D

W (mm)
138 138

D (mm)
63 63

B-58

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

400E22090

Distribution
Secondary distribution

160/630 A Linergy BS multistage distribution block

160/630 A four-pole Linergy BS multi-stage distribution block


PD390659R.eps

The Linergy BS distribution block can be installed horizontally in the device zone or vertically in the 300 mm wide duct of wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures. It is not compatible with Pack enclosures. The distribution block is made up of: b two staggered supports made of an insulating material b four slanted copper bars with holes every 25 mm v 13 threaded M6 holes for outgoers v four 12.2 mm diameter holes to supply the distribution block. It is supplied with: b M6 hardware b one IPxxB insulating barrier for the front. Cat. no. selection Linergy BS multi-stage distri. block
160 A Distribloc (40 C) 250 A Distribloc (40 C) 400 A Distribloc (40 C) 630 A Distribloc (40 C)

Size of bars (mm)


15 x 5 20 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 8

Cat. no.
04052 04053 04054 04055

Electrical characteristics b Rated operational current Ie (40 C): v 160 A for distribution block 04052 v 250 A for distribution block 04053 v 400 A for distribution block 04054 v 630 A for distribution block 04055 b Rated insulation level Ui = 750 V b Rated short-time withstand current Icw: v 10 kA rms / 1 s for 160 A block v 13 kA rms / 1 s for 250 A block v 20 kA rms / 1 s for 400 A block v 25 kA rms / 1 s for 630 A block b Rated peak withstand current Ipk: v 30 k for 160 A block v 30 k for 250 A block v 40 k for 400 A block v 40 k for 630 A block b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. Supply b 16 mm2 to 50 mm2 cables with crimped lugs b 20 x 2 mm flexible bars for NSX100/160 b 20 x 3 mm flexible bars for NSX250 b 32 x 5 mm flexible bars for NSX400 b 32 x 8 mm flexible bars for NSX630. Distribution 13 outgoers per phase, max. 50 mm2. Installation b Screwed to plain or slotted backplate b Screwed onto the adapter 03595.
Dd383648.eps Dd383647.eps

Dd381341.eps

Dimensions
DD381344.eps

400E22050

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-59

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy FM distribution block

General
Dd381399.eps

For connections, the distribution block uses a proven technique, i.e. spring terminals. Downstream circuits are connected from the front, without screws, to spring terminals. Contact pressure does not depend on the operator. It automatically adapts to the size of the conductor (minimum size = 1mm). Contacts are insensitive to vibrations and thermal variations. Only one cable (flexible or rigid, without a metal ferrule) can be inserted in a spring terminal Degree of protection: IPxxB. Advantages bb A reliable electrical connection, no maintenance required (tightness guaranteed over time) bb The fast connections make phase balancing very easy. bb Rewiring is very easy if the switchboard is expanded or modified. Application Distribution over half or full rows of modular devices. It is generally supplied by a device at the head of a group of outgoers (NG125, INS, C60 or IC60, etc.). Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
80 A Linergy FM distribution block 80 A Linergy FM distribution block, 4P 63 A Linergy FM distribution block, 4P, 1/2 row 04000 04004 04008

Cable connection.

PB104505.eps

63/80 A Linergy FM distribution blocks

DD384088.EPS

Electrical characteristics b Rated insulation level Ui = 500 V. b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 6 kV. b Short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been tested. b 63/80 A Linergy FM distribution blocks: vv 4 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 32 A vv 6 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 40 A vv two 6 mm cables: Imax = 63 A. Supply Via tunnel terminals up to 25 mm, generally from a device supplying a group of outgoers. The tunnel terminals are positioned to facilitate cable entry and screw tightening. They are designed for cables arriving from the top or bottom. Distribution bb For the full-row Linergy FM, 4P (04004), each phase offers: vv 2 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 7 connection points for 4 mm max. cable bb The neutral offers: vv 4 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 13 connection points for 4mm max. cable bb For the half-row Linergy FM, 4P (04008), each phase offers: vv 2 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 2 connection points for 4 mm max. cable bb The neutral offers: vv 4 connection points for 6 mm max. cable vv 4 connection points for 4 mm max. cable Each connection point can receive a single cable, either flexible or rigid. Installation bb Clipped onto the rear of modular rail. bb Screwed to plain or slotted backplate.
Dd381665.eps Dd381664.eps

04000.
DD381661.eps

04008.

04004.

Half-row Linergy FM distribution block supplied by an INS switch-disconnector.

Linergy FM distribution block supplied by a Vigi NG125 circuit breaker.

Supplied with 100 mm long bared copper connections b For full-row Linergy FM (04004): v 2 sets of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections b For half-row Linergy FM (04008): v 1 set of ten 4 mm connections + 1 set of six 6 mm connections. B-60 Version : 2.0 16/04/2013 400E22110

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy FM distribution block

160/200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks


PD390661R.eps

Application Distribution over full rows of modular devices. The distribution block is generally supplied by busbars in enclosures and cubicles. Cat. no. selection Designation
200 A Linergy FM, 2P 200 A Linergy FM, 3P 200 A Linergy FM, 4P 160 A Linergy FM, 4P, 1/2 row

Cat. no.
04012 04013 04014 04018

DD381672.eps

Electrical characteristics b Rated insulation level Ui = 750 V. b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV. b Short-circuit withstand current: the reinforced breaking capacity due to cascading in circuit-breaker combinations is maintained. The worst-case situations have been. b 160/200 A Linergy FM distribution blocks: v 10 mm cable outgoer: Imax = 50 A v two 10 mm cables: Imax = 63 A. Supply b Direct to terminals: v 50 mm cables with crimped lugs v 20 x 3 mm flexible bars b From Linergy BW insulated busbars in a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (04021). b From lateral, channelled busbars in a cubicle (connection must be made). b From busbars in the duct of a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (04024). b From busbars in the rear of a wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure (04029). Busbar connection Designation Cat. no.
04021 04024 04029 Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and Powerclip insulated busbars (enclosure) Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and busbars in a duct (enclosure) Connection between 200 A Linergy FM and rear busbars (enclosure)

04012.

DD381670.eps

04013.
DD381671.eps

Distribution bb 200 A Linergy FM, 2P (04012): vv 12 connection points for phase and neutral bb 200 A Linergy FM, 3P and 4P (04013 and 04014): vv 12 connection points for each phase vv 18 connection points for the neutral bb 160 A Linergy FM, 4P, 1/2 row (04018): vv 6 connection points for each phase vv 9 connection points for the neutral Each connection point can receive a single 10 mm cable, either flexible or rigid. Installation bb Clipped onto the rear of modular rail bb Screwed to plain or slotted backplate. Supplied with: bb 100 mm long, bared 10 mm copper connections vv 200 A Linergy FM, 2P, 3P and 4P (04012, 04013 et 04014): 2 sets of 12 connections vv 160 A Linergy FM, 1/2 row (04018): 1 set of 12 connections bb protection covers for the supply terminals (IPxxB) bb the hardware required for the supply terminals.
Dd383655.eps Dd383472.eps

04014.

DD381673.eps

04018.

Supply from busbars in the duct of a cubicle (connection 04024).

Supply from Linergy BW busbars in a cubicle (connection 04021).

400E22110

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

B-61

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy FC distribution block

PD390570R.eps

PD390569R.eps

Linergy FC distribution block

Presentation Linergy FC is a horizontal distribution block. It connects directly to the mounting plate and can supply: three four-pole and four three-pole Compact NSX circuit breakers, whatever the ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), the operating systems (toggle, rotary handle, motor mechanism), whether fixed or plug-in, front or rear connection (the circuit breakers must be equipped with long terminal shields downstream) three three-pole or four-pole Compact INS switch-disconnectors, whatever the ratings (100, 160 or 250 A), whether front or rear connection. The design and small size blend perfectly with the devices. It can be supplied by Linergy BS or Linergy LGYbusbars positioned to the left or right. A dependable switchboard Fully insulated, Polypact contributes to the safety of life and property. The prefabricated connections supplied separately are secured using torque nuts to ensure the correct tightness over time, without maintenance. Numerous and well distributed vents ensure natural convection and optimum cooling of the conductors. An upgradeable switchboard The circuit breakers can be easily connected from the front. It is simple to interchange a device or to add a device in a reserve slot. Functional features There are markings (N, L1, L2, L3) on the front and the sides for the phases. The running of auxiliary cables between the devices and the corresponding terminal blocks is also taken into account. Spacious trunking is built into the blocks for the auxiliary wiring. Cat. no. selection Fixed Compact NSX100/250 with toggle and Compact INS250
Connection to Linergy LGY busbars Linergy FC with prefabricated connections Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 3P toggle/fixed + connection Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 4P toggle/fixed + connection

Dd383592.eps

Cat. no. 04403 04404

Connection to Linergy BS or Linergy LGY busbars Cat. no. Linergy FC with prefabricated connections Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 3P fixed/plug-in + 04405 connection Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 4P fixed/plug-in + 04406 connection Linergy FC without connection (3) Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 3P fixed w/o connection 04407 Linergy FC distribution block for Compact NSX250 4P fixed w/o connection 04408 (1) For plug-in Compact NSX circuit breakers, order the adapter LV429306 (3P) or LV429307 (4P) with the base. (2) The connection of a Linergy FC distribution block using prefabricated connections or insulated flexible bars is not compatible with Form 2 partitioning (04922). In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit (04924): see page B-37. (3) Make the connection with flexible bars, 32 x 8 mm (04753): see page B-64.

Fixed/plug-in Compact NSX, all operating systems (1) (2)

Electrical characteristics b In (A): distribution-block derating follows the normal derating curves of Compact NSX and Compact INS devices. b Rated insulation level: 750 V b Impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 8 kV b Short-circuit withstand current compatible with the breaking capacity of the Compact NS circuit breakers connected to the distribution block. Remark For most installations, the temperature around the switchboard is 40 C, corresponding to an average temperature of 60 C inside the switchboard. Under certain conditions, the temperature inside the switchboard may be different, for example if the room temperature is higher than 40 C or if the cubicle is equipped with a fan.

B-62

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22500

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy FC distribution block

Linergy FC selection table for special cases

In (A) as a function of the temperature inside the switchboard Temperature (C) 40 45 50 55 Inc (A) Linergy FC 3P 800 800 775 750 Linergy FC 4P 675 675 655 635

60 725 615

65 700 595

70 675 570

b To obtain the maximum permissible current for the Linergy FC distribution block, apply the rated diversity factor RDF: b Linergy FC 3P: RDF = 0.8 b Linergy FC 4P: RDF = 0.9. Supplied with: bb self-adhesive labels to mark the phases for the connections to the busbars.
DD381247.eps Dd381249.eps

04404.
Dd381251.eps

04408.

Dd381250.eps

Supply of three NSX100/250 four-pole devices equipped with long terminal shields downstream.
Dd383593.eps

Auxiliary wires running in the built-in trunking.

Phase marking on the front of the distribution block.

Dd381253.eps

Phase marking on the side of the distribution block. Identification labels on the flexible connections.

Tooth-caps
Dd383594.eps

Designation
Linergy FC tooth-caps

Cat. no.
04809

The caps block off the reserve terminals on a Linergy FC three-pole or four-pole distribution block. Made of an insulating material, they simply clip on from the front.
Dd381255.eps

400E22500

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-63

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Insulated flexible bars

Presentation
DD381659.eps

The insulated flexible bars are tested in a type-tested switchboard environment. Their design takes into account the switchboard architecture where they are often in close proximity to a protection device (circuit breaker or fuse) with significant heat losses. In-depth knowledge of switchboard architecture and the connected devices led to the establishment of a selection table based on the type of device. Flexible bars are 1800 mm long and made of copper with an insulating sheath. Rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V. The sizes for the flexible bars indicated below take into account the heat losses of Schneider devices in a Prisma P switchboard.

Catalogue number selection

Connection between device and busbars

The flexible bars are determined taking into account the connected device, whatever the internal temperature of the switchboard. The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices. Device Size (mm) Cat. no.
NSX100 20 x 2 04742 04743 NSX160/250 20 x 3 (1) NSX400 32 x 5 04751 NSX630 32 x 8 04753 INS125/160 20 x 2 04742 INS250 20 x 3 04743 INS400 32 x 5 04751 INS630 32 x 6 04752 200 A Linergy FM 20 x 3 04743 32 x 8 04753 Linergy FC, 3P (2) 32 x 8 04753 Linergy FC, 4P (2) Fupact 250 24 x 5 04746 Fupact 400 32 x 5 04751 Fupact 630 32 x 8 04753 Easypact CVS100 20 x 2 04742 04743 Easypact CVS160/250 20 x 3 (1) Easypact CVS400 32 x 5 04751 Easypact CVS630 32 x 8 04753 (1) To connect a Compact NSX250, an Easypact CVS250 to Linergy FC busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar (04746). (2)The connection of a Linergy FC distribution block using insulated flexible bars is not compatible with Form 2 partitioning (04922). In this case, use the form 2 restoration kit 04924 (see page B-37). Note: the references 87646 (3P) and 87647 (4P) can be used up to 250 A, when binding of insulated flexible bars, to withstand Isc.

b Connection between busbars Flexible bars are designed for connections between busbars taking into account the following characteristics: bb a maximum temperature of 60 C inside the switchboard. This corresponds to the average temperature inside a switchboard for an ambient temperature of 35 C bb the maximum withstand temperature for the insulating material is 125 C. Ie max. (A) Size (mm) Cat. no.
200 250 400 520 580 660
DD382008.eps

20 x 2 20 x 3 24 x 5 32 x 5 32 x 6 32 x 8

04742 04743 04746 04751 04752 04753

B-64

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22140

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports

Cable-tie supports
DD381555.eps

Cable-tie supports are used to correctly position the cables in the connection compartment. They are sold in sets of four and supplied with the necessary hardware for connection to the framework. Longitudinal cable-tie supports Width of cable compartment
W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm
DD381556.eps

Set of four cable-tie supports


08773 08774 08776 08778

b Lateral cable-tie supports There are two sizes: b D = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep b D = 200 mm, this support is added to the 400 mm support for frameworks that are 650 mm deep. It can also be installed alone. Depth of cable compartment Set of four cable-tie supports
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
DD381557.eps

08794 08796 + 08794

08794.
Dd381638.eps

08796.

400E23220

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

B-65

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Connection accessories
Cable-tie supports

C-shaped cable-tie supports


Dd383425.eps

b C-shaped longitudinal and lateral cable-tie supports 1600 mm long support that can be cut to length as needed. Can be secured to: bb universal angle bracket 03581 (for the longitudinal support) bb universal angle bracket 03582 (for the lateral support) bb modular rail 03593 (for depth adjustment). Designation
Cable-tie support W = 1600 mm

Cat. no.
08783

Supplied with hardware for mounting on universal angle brackets and modular rails. Cables can be attached by ties or clamps.

Universal cross-members
DD381316.eps

b Longitudinal cross-members Set of two longitudinal cross-members, W = 650 mm. They are connected directly to the framework (W = 650 mm or 650 + 150 mm). They can also be mounted on the lateral cross-members (see opposite). They are used to position and support the cables of an incoming device. Lateral cross-members They are connected directly to the uprights of the framework. They offer numerous positioning holes and can be used to adjust the depth of longitudinal cross-members. There are two lengths: b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm for frameworks that are 400 mm deep b Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 200 mm, can be added to the 400 mm crossmembers for frameworks that are 600 mm deep. They can also be installed separately. Designation Cat. no.
Set of two lateral crossmembers Set of two longitudinal cross-members W = 400 mm W = 200 mm W = 650 mm 03584 03586 03587

B-66

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E23220

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Busbar accessories
Mounting hardware

General

The 8.8 class (64 N/mm) hardware ensures precise tightening torques and a reliable contact over time. The hardware is designed to resist creep and ageing of the electrical contact. It is protected against corrosion by a Zn8c treatment.

M8 bolts
DD380737.eps

Composition of sets: b set of 20 bolts + 20 nuts + 40 contact washers. Cat. no. selection Designation
20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 20/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 25/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 30/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 35/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 40/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 45/Linergy BS 20 bolts 8.8 class M8 x 50/Linergy BS

Cat. no.
04782 04783 04784 04785 04786 04787 04788

Flat washers
DD380738.eps

Presentation These washers, sold separately, are required for connection between flexible bars and Linergy BS or Linergy LGY busbars. They spread the tightening forces and avoid creep of the copper. Composition of sets: b set of 20 flat washers for M8 bolts. Cat. no. selection Designation
20 M8/diameter 20 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 24 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY 20 M8/diameter 28 mm flat washers for flexible bar Linergy LGY

Cat. no.
04772 04773 04774

400E22400

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-67

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Busbar accessories

Torque nuts
DD380735.eps

Can be used to obtain the correct tightening torque (28 Nm) recommended by then manufacturer, without using a torque wrench. Torque nuts may be used for all electrical connections. Designation Cat. no.
20 M8 torque nuts 04759

Voltage tap-offs
DD380736.eps

Designation

Cat. no.

20 M10 voltage tap-offs for two 6.35 mm tab connectors 04229 Note: For small lugs (on low-current cables or measurement tap-offs), insert a conducting washer (cat. no. 04775) between the busbar and the lug.

Mounting chocks (5 mm) for flat busbars


DD380733.eps

Metal chock, 5 mm thick. Chocks are used to maintain the position of rear, vertical, flat busbars. Designation
100 metallic spacer thickness 5 mm Linergy BS
DD380734.eps

Cat. no.
04669

Chock for rear, vertical, flat busbars.

Mounting hardware
DD383120.eps

Special mounting hardware for the connection of flat lateral busbars to horizontal busbars. Assembly of 10 mm thick bars for configurations with 2 bars/phase (1850 A to 3200 A). Designation Cat. no.
20 screws for joint 2 x 10 mm Linergy BS horizontal/vertical busbar 04645

B-68

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22400

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TR
Introduction

PB502409.eps

New!

Push-in technology terminal blocks


Presentation
The new NSYTRP push-in terminal blocks use the most cost effective connection technique in the market. This technique drastically reduces wiring time and eliminates the need for regular re-tightening. The insertion force of the NSYTRP push-in terminal blocks is up to 50 % lower. This allows easy and direct plugging of solid conductors or flexible conductors with cable-ends (ferrules) of 0.34 mm and up to 6 mm.

Principle of push-in connection.

PB502406.eps

Screw technology terminal blocks


Presentation
NSYTRV screw technology terminal blocks are components which are well-known and widely used throughout the world and are suitable for the vast majority of connection applications, due to their wide range of functions and connection possibilities. NSYTRV terminal blocks ensure quality, safety and the operational availability of equipment. In addition to these advantages, they optimise the setting up and operation of installations, due to their simplicity and integrated functions.

Principle of screw connection.

PB502408.eps

Spring technology terminal blocks


Presentation
Spring technology is a type of connection that requires no maintenance and ensures the separation of mechanical and electrical functions. NSYTRR spring terminals significantly reduces wiring time and eliminates the need for regular re-tightening. This technology allows the connection of flexible conductors with or without cable ends, but also of solid conductors with nominal c.s.a. of 0.13 mm up to 25 mm. NSYTRR terminal blocks ensure quality, safety and the operational availability of equipment. In addition to these advantages, they optimise the setting up and operation of installations, due to their simplicity and integrated functions.

Principle of spring connection.

400E22120

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-69

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TR

Terminal blocks

New!

Connection technology
Type of terminal block Cross section area Color Screw tech Spring tech Push-in tech Miniature screw for 15 mm DIN rail NSYTR V22M NSYTR V22MBL NSYTR V42M NSYTR V42MBL NSYTR V22MPE NSYTR V42MPE Miniature spring Miniature spring for 15 mm for direct mount DIN rail NSYTR R22M NSYTR R22MBL NSYTR R24M NSYTR R24MBL NSYTR R22MPE NSYTR R22MF NSYTR R22MFBL NSYTR R22MFF* NSYTR R24M NSYTR R24MBL -

Passthrough 2,5 mm (2 pts) Grey Blue Orange 2,5 mm (3 pts) Grey Blue Orange 2,5 mm Grey (4 pts, 1 level) Blue 2,5 mm Grey (4 pts, 2 levels) Blue 4 mm (2 pts) Grey Blue Orange Grey Blue Orange Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Blue Grey Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Green Grey Orange Grey Orange Grey

NSYTR V22 NSYTR V22BL NSYTR V22AR NSYTR V24D NSYTR V24DBL NSYTR V42 NSYTR V42BL NSYTR V42AR NSYTR V43 NSYTR V43BL NSYTR V43AR NSYTR V44 NSYTR V44BL NSYTR V44D NSYTR V44DBL NSYTR V62 NSYTR V62BL NSYTR V102 NSYTR V102BL NSYTR V162 NSYTR V162BL NSYTRV1502BB NSYTR V22PE NSYTR V42PE NSYTR V43PE NSYTR V44PE NSYTR V62PE NSYTR V102PE NSYTR V162PE NSYTR V42ST (1) NSYTR V42STAR (1) NSYTRV42SCD (1)

NSYTR R22 NSYTR R22BL NSYTR R22AR NSYTR R23 NSYTR R23BL NSYTR R23AR NSYTR R24 NSYTR R24BL NSYTR R24D NSYTR R24DBL NSYTR R42 NSYTR R42BL NSYTR R42AR NSYTR R43 NSYTR R43BL NSYTR R44 NSYTR R44BL NSYTR R44D NSYTR R44DBL NSYTR R62 NSYTR R62BL NSYTR R102 NSYTR R102BL NSYTR R162 NSYTR R162BL NSYTR R22PE NSYTR R23PE NSYTR R24PE NSYTR R42PE NSYTR R43PE NSYTR R44PE NSYTR R62PE NSYTR R102PE NSYTR R162PE NSYTR R22SC NSYTR R22SCAR NSYTR R23SC NSYTR R23SCAR NSYTRR24SCD NSYTR R22TB -

NSYTR P22 NSYTR P22BL NSYTR P22AR NSYTR P23 NSYTR P23BL NSYTR P23AR NSYTR P24 NSYTR P24BL NSYTR P24D NSYTR P24DBL NSYTR P42 NSYTR P42BL NSYTR P43 NSYTR P43BL NSYTR P44 NSYTR P44BL NSYTR P22PE NSYTR P23PE NSYTR P24PE NSYTR P42PE NSYTR P43PE NSYTR P44PE NSYTR P22SC NSYTR P23SC NSYTR P42TB -

4 mm (3 pts)

4 mm (4 pts, 1 level) 4 mm (4 pts, 2 levels) 6 mm (2 pts) 10 mm (2 pts) 16 mm (2 pts) 150 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (3 pts) 2,5 mm (4 pts) 4 mm (2 pts) 4 mm (3 pts) 4 mm (4 pts) 6 mm (2 pts) 10 mm (2 pts) 16 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (2 pts) 2,5 mm (3 pts)

Earth protection

Knife Disconnect

Fuse Disconnect

2,5 mm (2 levels) 4 mm (2 pts) Black NSYTR V42SF5 5 x 20 mm fuse Black (12 V) NSYTR V42SF5LD
(2)

Black (230 V) NSYTR V42SF5LA


(2)

Basic 4 mm (2 pts) Disconnect (3) Measuring 6 mm (2 pts) Disconnect transducer 6 mm (2 pts) 6 mm (2 pts) * Grey terminal with flange.

Grey

NSYTRV 42TB

Grey/Orange NSYTR V62TTD Grey Green NSYTR V62TT NSYTR V62TTPE

(1) 4 mm terminal, with 2 test points. (2) With light indicator. (3) Fuse or component carrier not supplied.

B-70

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22120

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TR

Terminal blocks

Connection technology
Miniature spring for direct mount NSYTR R22MP NSYTR R22MPBL NSYTR R24MP NSYTR R24MPBL End plate for screw TBs NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA CE24 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA C23 NSYTRA C24 NSYTRA CE24 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22BL NSYTRA C162 NSYTRAC952 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C23 NSYTRA C24 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C22 NSYTRA C162 Included Included NSYTRA CE24 Included Included Included NSYTRA CT22 NSYTRA CT22 NSYTRA CT22 NSYTRA CT22 End plate for spring TBs NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR22BL NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR23BL NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR24BL NSYTRA CRE24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CR43 NSYTRA CR44 NSYTRA CRE44 NSYTRA CR62 NSYTRA CR102 NSYTRA CR162 NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CR43 NSYTRA CR44 NSYTRA CR62 NSYTRA CR102 NSYTRA CR162 NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR24 Included NSYTRA CR23 -

Accessories
End plate for push-in TBs NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR22BL NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR23BL NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR24BL NSYTRA CRE24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CP43 NSYTRA CP44 NSYTRA CR22 NSYTRA CR23 NSYTRA CR24 NSYTRA CR42 NSYTRA CP43 NSYTRA CP44 NSYTRA CPK22 NSYTRA CPK23 NSYTRA CR42 Plug-in bridge Marking strips 10 characters NSYTRA B510 NSYTRA B520 NSYTRA B530 NSYTRA B540 NSYTRA B550 NSYTRA B590 NSYTRA B5100 NSYTRA B51100 NSYTRA B610 NSYTRA B620 NSYTRA B630 NSYTRA B640 NSYTRA B650 NSYTRA B690 NSYTRA B6100 NSYTRA B61100 NSYTRA B810 NSYTRA B820 NSYTRA B1010 NSYTRA B1020 NSYTRA B1010 NSYTRA B1020 -

NSYTRA L22 NSYTRA L23 NSYTRA L24 NSYTRA L25 NSYTRA L210 NSYTRA L210BL NSYTRA L210GR NSYTRA L220 NSYTRA L42 NSYTRA L43 NSYTRA L44 NSYTRA L45 NSYTRA L410 NSYTRA L410BL NSYTRA L410GR NSYTRA L420 NSYTRA L62 NSYTRA L610 NSYTRA L102 NSYTRA L162 NSYTRA L1502

400E22120

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-71

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Adjustable earth + neutral Linergy TB terminal blocks


Spring or screw technology

Terminal block components b These components are used to build and install a Linergy TB terminal block: b on the framework near the conductor entry point b on a DIN rail mounted on the enclosure framework b at the rear of the enclosure or the interface b on the functional uprights in Prisma switchboards. Permissible current: b 50 mm terminal block kit: 160 A max. at 40 C b 25 mm terminal block kit: 90 A max. at 40 C b 6 x 4 mm terminal block kit: 63 A max. at 40 C b 8-block junction kit: v 90 A with 1 junction v 160 A with 2 junctions mounted in parallel. b 2-block junction kit: 90.
DB107884.eps DB107885.eps

DB107883.eps

PB101638_68.eps

Terminal blocks 50 mm terminal block kit 25 mm terminal block kit PRA90047 4 x 6 mm terminal block kit Terminal block junction 8-block junction kit 2-block junction kit Terminal block support Terminal block support kit W = 8 blocks W = 2 blocks Batch of 1 Batch of 10 W = 2 blocks W = 1 block W = 1 block Batch of 2 Batch of 5 Batch of 10

Cat. no. PRA90045 PRA90046 PRA90047 PRA90050 PRA90049 PRA90051

PRA90045
DB107886.eps DB107887.eps

PRA90046

PRA90049
DB107888.eps

PRA90050

W = 34 blocks Batch of 1 maximum

PRA90051 Incoming splitter block kit

Use as incoming splitter block

PB101639_32.eps

DB107891.eps

For converting terminal block kits PRA90045/PRA90046/PRA90047 into an incoming splitter block up to 125 A and 50 mm. Permissible current: b entry via PRA90046 (1 x 25 mm - 1 block): 80 A b entry via PRA90045 (1 x 50 mm - 2 blocks): 125 A Ui: 400 V and Uimp: 6 kV.

W = 1 block

Batch of 4

PRA90048

B-72

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22120

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TB terminal blocks

Introduction
Dd383711.eps Dd381511.eps

In Prisma cubicles, terminal blocks are commonly installed in a lateral compartment, generally 300 or 400 mm wide. They may also be installed at the top or bottom of the cubicle.

Terminal blocks, see page B-70.

400E22130

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-73

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TB terminal blocks

Installation at top or bottom of a cubicle


Dd381512.eps

Terminal blocks are grouped on modular rails that can be depth adjusted behind a plain front plate. Designation Cat. no.
Modular rail, depth adjustable (W = 432 mm) 03402

Width of standard terminal blocks


Max. cable CSA 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm 16 mm Width of terminal block 6 mm 8 mm 10 mm 12 mm

Height required in switchboard


Max. cable CSA 4 mm 6 mm 10 mm 16 mm No. of vertical modules 3 3 5 6 Corresponding plain front plate 03803 03803 03805 03806

Terminal blocks can also be installed on a modular rail turned using universal angle brackets and mounted on lateral cross-members. Designation Cat. no.
2 modular rails, W = 1600 mm 2 universal angle brackets Set of two lateral cross-members, W = 400 mm 04226 03581 03584

DD380776.eps

Installation in a lateral compartment


Dd381513.eps

The terminal block is generally installed in the cable compartment, W = 300 or 400 mm. The terminal blocks clip onto a modular rail. The rail is secured to cable-tie supports using universal angle brackets for precise positioning of the terminal blocks. Designation
2 modular rails, W = 1600 mm 2 universal angle brackets Cable-tie supports

Cat. no.
04226 03581 see page B-65

Installation on a device mounting plate


Dd381514.eps

Terminal blocks can be directly installed on the mounting plates for horizontally mounted Compact NSX100/630 and vertically mounted Compact NS630b/1600 for connection of auxiliary wires.

B-74

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22130

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Connection

Linergy BS connector

Linergy BS connector
DD381594R.eps

4 Linergy BS connectors for copper or aluminium cables. Designation


4 cable connectors 1P 160 A 70 mm for rear busbar Linergy BS 4 cable connectors 1P 250 A 185 mm for rear busbar Linergy BS 4 cable connectors 1P 400 A 300 mm for rear busbar Linergy BS (1) These connectors are designed for use on rear Linergy BS busbars only.
E13771.eps

Cat. no.
07051 (1) 07052 (1) 07053 (1)

E56852.eps

07051

E56851.eps

07052

400E22130

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

E56850.eps

07053

B-75

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Cable running
Cable straps

Vertical cable straps


DD381629.eps Dd381632.eps

12 cable straps for vertical cables

Designation

Cat. no.
04262

Installation on a mounting plate.


Dd381631.eps

Installation on a modular rail support.

Cover for vertical cable straps


Dd381633.eps Dd381634.eps

2 covers for vertical cable straps W = 1 m

Designation

Cat. no.
04263

B-76

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22150

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Cable running
Cable straps

Horizontal cable straps


Dd381618.eps

12 cable straps for horizontal cables

Designation

Cat. no.
04239

Horizontal cable straps have the same capacity as 60 x 30 mm trunking.


Dd381619.eps

Cover for horizontal cable straps


Dd381621.eps

4 covers for horizontal cable straps W = 430 mm


Dd381622.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
04243

400E22150

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-77

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Cable running
Trunking

Vertical trunking support


Dd381623.eps

The 30 or 60 mm deep trunking sections can be installed directly on the modular-rail supports or on the mounting plates of vertically mounted Compact NSX circuit breakers.
Dd381625.eps

Trunking installed on a modular rail.

Dd380866.eps

Trunking installed on a mounting plate.

Horizontal trunking support


Dd381626.eps

Trunking installed horizontally on the rear of a modular rail.


Dd382320.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
04255

Trunking installed horizontally on the rear of a modular rail.

Aligns the cover of a horizontal trunking section (H = 60 or 80 mm) with that of a vertical trunking section (H = 80 mm). Cat. no. Designation
10 adaptable support for horizontal trunking
Dd382924.eps

Dd382922.eps

04256

Note: Not designed for use with Pack enclosures.

B-78

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22150

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Cable running

Trunking, accessories

Trunking
Dd381639.eps

4 horizontal sections, 60 x 30 mm, W = 450 mm (with supports) Vertical trunking, 80 x 60 mm, W = 2000 mm (sold in sets of 18)

Designation

Cat. No.
04257 04267

Dd381640.eps

Cable trunking for doors


Dd381641.eps

Cable trunking for doors, W = 2000 mm (sold in sets of 30) Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm.

Designation

Cat. No.
04233

Flexible trunking
DD380863.eps

Adhesive trunking, 30 x 30 mm.

Designation

Cat. No.
04235

Length = 500 mm, inner diameter = 19mm.


DD384372.eps

Linergy TA terminal block for auxiliaries


DD381644.eps DD380867.eps

Linergy MS auxiliaries terminal block 10 in/20 out

Designation

Cat. No.
04228

Grommets for wiring through front


DD380864.eps Dd383653.eps

10 grommets for wiring through front

Designation

Cat. No.
04234

400E22150

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-79

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TB earth bars

Linergy TB arth bar

Presentation The Linergy TB earth bar can be: b a bare earth bar, 12 x 3 mm with 330 mm of connection space, equipped with a 35 mm terminal and on which earth blocks with spring terminals can be clipped b an earth bar (200 or 450 mm long), equipped with a 35 mm terminal and clamps with captive screws. Earth bar with spring terminals Designation
12 x 3 mm direct earth bar with 1 terminal 35 L330 Linergy TB 4 earth block 12 x 4 quick connection Linergy TB 4 earth block 3 x 16 quick connection Linergy TB

Dd381560.eps

Cat. no.
04201 04214 04215

04201.

04214.

04215.
Dd381516.eps

Linergy TA/TB earth bar with clamps Designation


Earth bar with 1 terminal 35 and 40 clamps L450 Linergy TB 2 earth bar with 1 terminal 35 and 20 clamps L200 Linergy TB

Cat. no.
04200 04202

04200.

Installation The Linergy TB earth bar is mounted on two supports that clip onto the rear of a modular rail installed horizontally in the device compartment or vertically in the cable compartment. Designation Cat. no.
2 supports for earth bar on modular rail 04205

Dd381517.eps

Linergy TB earth bar mounted on rear of modular rail using supports (04205).

B-80

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

Dd381518.eps

400E22450

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy TB neutral bars

Linergy TB neutral bar


Dd381519.eps

A neutral bar is created by inserting insulating spacers behind an Linergy TB earth bar. Designation Cat. no.
2 insulated spacers for neutral bar Linergy TB 04210

400E22450

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-81

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy PE conductor

Vertical Linergy PE conductor


Dd381183.eps

Linergy LGY W = 1670


Selection Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40 > 40

The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment. A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using three supports. Permissible current (A)
630 800

Support selection

04502 04503 04657

Cat. no. for bars

Linergy TB set of 3 flat bar supports for PE vertical installation

Linergy connection hardware Composition of set: Set including 20 M8 bolts (W = 25 mm) + 20 nuts + 20 contact washers for connection to cable lugs or flexible bars.
Mounting of a vertical PE (Linergy LGY).

Cat. no. selection


20 M8 LGY bolts for cable lugs/flexible bar L25 mm

Designation

Cat. no.
04766

DD381182.eps

Flat bar W = 1675


Selection Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40 > 40

The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment. A flat bar is secured to the framework using three supports. Selection (mm)
25 x 5 50 x 5

Cat. no. for bars


04512 04515 04657

Support selection

Linergy TB set of 3 flat bar supports for PE vertical installation

Mounting of a vertical PE (flat bar).

Horizontal PE conductor
Dd381184.eps

A flat bar is mounted at the top or bottom of a switchboard (contrary to horizontal busbars) using supports. Selection Icw (kA rms / 1 s)
y 40 > 40

Selection (mm)
25 x 5 50 x 5

Support selection

04512 04515 04667

Cat. no. for bars

2 horizontal PE flat bar supports Linergy TB

Mounting of a horizontal PE (flat bar).

Connection between PE conductors


DD381158.eps

A copper connection plate can be used to connect: b a vertical PE bar to a horizontal PE bar b two horizontal PE bars. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
04672

2 connection plates for horizontal/vertical PE bars Linergy TB

Connection between horizontal PE bars or horizontal/vertical PE bars.

B-82

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22350

Distribution
Secondary distribution

Linergy PEN conductor

Vertical Linergy LGY PEN conductor


DD384616.eps

The conductor is generally installed in the cable compartment. A Linergy bar is secured to the framework using a mounting kit. Cat. no. selection Designation
Linergy bar Linergy TB PEN installation kit with LGY vertical profile 1600 A connection 10 mm horizontal busbar with Linergy LGY profile Linergy LGYE vertical connection 1600 A

Cat. no.
see page B-18 04656 04636 04602

Contents of Linergy PEN kit b 4 insulating supports b 1 neutral disconnecting device b 1 connection between a horizontal PEN and a vertical PEN y 1600 A.

400E22350

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

B-83

B-84

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E22350

Enclosures

Contents

Presentation 22 Functional units A-1 Distribution B-1

IP30/31/55 cubicles - Presentation C-2 Cover panels C-8 Cubicles C-12


Frameworks C-12 IP30/31 cover panels C-14 IP55 cover panels C-16 Plinth C-18 Cubicle handling and rolling base - Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles C-19 Right-angle kit C-20

Installation accessories Front plate accessories


Enclosure accessories Door handles and locks

C-21 C-23 C-27

C-25 C-25

Air-conditioning accessories

Dimensions C-30
Cubicles C-30
Additional information D-1

400E50030

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

C-1

Enclosures

IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation

Carefully designed in every detail, Prisma P cubicles are the solution for all common switchboard configurations up to 4000 A. A reduced number of catalogue numbers facilitates selection, while offering the essential functions such as: b multiple combination possibilities b an array of interchangeable cover panels and doors, IP30 or IP55, without adding gaskets b total accessibility to all connection points in the switchboard b wide cable compartments b high for large capacity (36 modules, each 50 mm high).The discreet design, with simple lines and oval shapes in the RAL 9001 colour, mean Prisma P cubicles blend in naturally on all commercial and industrial sites.They offer 36 modules, each 50 mm high, of useful space. They comply with standard EN 50298.

PD390422.eps

All cover panels and doors (IP30 or IP55) are secured using quarter-turn fasteners.Electrical continuity is achieved naturally, without having to add clips or earthing braids.

C-2

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23000

Enclosures

IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation

DD380642.eps

Frameworks can be combined side-by-side or back-to-back to create all switchboard configurationsup to 3200 A.
DD380641.eps

Front plates are installed on a frame that can pivot on the framework. The front can be: b a plain door (IP30/55) b a transparent door (IP30/55) b a cover frame (IP30).

400E23000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-3

Enclosures

IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation


The framework

PD390573R.eps

The framework is both light and rigid due to the closed sections used for the uprights. The compact design of the framework means there is 15 % more space available for devices. There are no sharp edges. Assembly is particularly fast with only 12 screws, all directly accessible. Uprights have wing holes every 25 mm. A measuring tape can be hooked to a slot marking the starting point for measurements on the heights required to mount devices. Marks every 50 mm and double marks every 100 mm make it easy to count modules.The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the cubicles.

PD390574R.eps

Cross-pieces can be removed to facilitate work.

Only 12 screws, all directly accessible, are required for assembly.


PD390576R.eps

PD390575R.eps

Marks make it easy to count the vertical modules.

The floor fixing kit can also be used to level the cubicles.

The front plates are equipped with clip-mount grips with a built-in quarter-turn fastening system for fast handling and installation.The lead-sealing function is directly integrated in the grip mechanism.

PD391307.eps

Hinged front plate support frame

This frame provides direct and fast access to the devices. It is reversible and has two factory-mounted hinges. Only two screws are required to secure it to the framework.

By pivoting, the front plate support frame provides direct access to devices.

C-4

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23000

Enclosures

IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation


Doors

Both plain and transparent doors are reversible and designed for quick and easy left or right-hand mounting by a single person. The factory-mounted hinges are secured on quarter-turn studs. The one-piece handle clips firmly into place. All connection points are located on the front of the uprights and do not take up any useful space for devices. For 800 mm wide cubicles, the doors are supplied with a 150 mm wide barrier to block access to the busbars. A wide range of locks are available for the push and pull handle.

PD390874.eps

A discreet, user-friendly handle.

PD390649R.eps

Rear panels

The IP30 panels are made up of two identical and interchangeable half panels that are easy to handle. They are flat to occupy minimum of floor space. Vents ensure natural ventilation of the switchboard. The IP55 panels are reinforced (IK10) and have positioning studs to facilitate mounting.

Side panels

They are easy to handle given their ergonomic design and rounded edges. Mounting is guided at the base by hooking onto special studs. Similar to all the cover panels, the side panels are rapidly secured by quarter-turn fasteners.

Vented IP30 panels.

PD390650R.eps

The roof

The roof panel is flat for passage under all doorways and includes four holes for the lifting rings. The lifting rings can be installed and removed without removing the roof.

The lifting rings can be installed without removing the roof.

400E23000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-5

Enclosures

IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation

D400 frameworks (depth 400 mm)


DD380570.eps DD380560.eps DD380561.eps DD380562.eps DD380563.eps

W = 300/400

W = 650/800

W = 800 with a busbar compartment

Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels


Height Width Depth 2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high) Width of the framework + 56 mm 450 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door 476 mm with front and rear doors

D600 frameworks (depth 600 mm)


DD380571.eps DD380564.eps DD380565.eps DD380566.eps DD380567.eps

W = 300/400

W = 650/800

W = 800 with a busbar compartment

Dimensions of cubicle with cover panels


Height Width Depth 2006 mm (capacity = 36 modules, each 50 mm high) Width of the framework + 56 mm 650 mm with screw-on rear panel + front door 676 mm with front and rear doors

Framework combinations
DD380578.eps

Side-by-side

The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit. To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed between the combined cubicles.

Back-to-back

An optional kit for back-to-back combinations is available. It is used to mechanically connect the frameworks. It is supplied with a gasket to be installed between the cubicles (for IP55).
DD380579.eps

C-6

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23000

Enclosures

IP30/31/55 cubicles Presentation

Front panels b for frameworks 650 and 800 mm wide. Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a cover frame (IP30) bb for frameworks 300 and 400 mm wide. A plain door is used (IP30 or IP55). Rear panels The rear panel can be made up of: bb two parts for IP30 panels bb one reinforced part for IP55 panels. A plain door can also be used, notably for switchboards with rear connections (800 and 1000 mm deep). Side panels A set of two panels is used (IP30 or IP55). If frameworks are installed back to back (double depth), two sets of two panels are required. Roof There is a plain roof (IP30 or IP55) for each size of framework. Gland plates They are mandatory, whatever the desired degree of protection for the switchboard. For each size of framework, there are plain gland plates (IP55) or two-part gland plates (IP30).

Degree of protection

IP30 switchboard Use: bb the IP30 cover panels with a door or cover frame bb IP30 plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts). IP31 switchboard Use: b the IP30 cover panels with a door b IP30 plain roof b IP31 sealing kit b gland plates (plain or in two parts). IP55 switchboard Use: b the IP55 cover panels with a door b IP55 plain roof b plain gland plates. If frameworks are combined, use the IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations.

DD380568.eps

Cover panels

Prisma P cubicle, W = 650 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.

DD380569.eps

Prisma P cubicle, W = 800 mm + cable compartment, W = 300 mm.

400E23000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-7

Enclosures

Cover panels

For switchboards with front connections. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).

Parts list for switchboard 1 1 08406 : framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 2 08566 : front plate support frame, W = 650 3 08576 : cover frame, W = 650 4 08736 : rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels) 5 08750 : set of two side panels, D = 400 6 08436 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 7
DD380607.eps

08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400

DD380554.eps

400 mm deep switchboard

Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 650.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DD380605.eps

08403 : 08407 : 08406 : 08566 : 08513 : 08538 : 08536 : 08733 : 08738 : 08736 : 08750 : 08433 : 08438 : 08436 : 08483 : 08487 : 08486 :

framework, W = 300, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 plain door, W = 300 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) transparent door, W = 650 rear panel, W = 300 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels) set of two side panels, D = 400 plain roof, W = 300, D = 400 plain roof, W = 800, D = 400 plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400

DD380555.eps

Parts list for switchboard 2

Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.

C-8

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E23010

Enclosures

Cover panels

For switchboards with front connections. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).

Parts list for switchboard 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7


DD380609.eps

08607 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 08566 : front plate support frame, W = 650 08578: fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a wicket door, W = 150) 08738 : rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels) 08760 : set of two side panels, D = 600 08638 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600

DD380556.eps

600 mm deep switchboard

Switchboard 1 - IP30 cubicle with cover frame, W = 800.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
DD380611.eps

08603 : 08607 : 08606 : 08566 : 08513 : 08538 : 08536 : 08733 : 08738 : 08736 : 08760 : 08633 : 08638 : 08636 : 08683 : 08687 : 08686 :

framework, W = 300, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 plain door, W = 300 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) transparent door, W = 650 rear panel, W = 300 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 800 (two half panels) rear panel, W = 650 (two half panels) set of two side panels, D = 600 plain roof, W = 300, D = 600 plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 plain roof, W = 650, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 300, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600

DD380557.eps

Parts list for switchboard 2

Switchboard 2 - combination of IP30 cubicles with transparent doors.

400E23010

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

C-9

Enclosures

Cover panels

Made up of two cubicles back-to-back. Rear connections are possible. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).

Parts list 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DD380615.eps

08407 x 2 : 08406 x 2 : 08566 : 08578 : 08576 : 08518 : 08516 : 08750 x 2 : 08438 x 2 : 08436 x 2 : 08487 x 2 : 08486 x 2 : 08719 x 2 :

2 frameworks, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 2 frameworks, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 fixed cover frame, W = 800 (supplied with a wicket door, W = 150) cover frame, W = 650 plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) plain door, W = 650 2 sets of two side panels, D = 400 2 plain rooves, W = 800, D = 400 2 plain rooves, W = 650, D = 400 2 plain gland plates W = 800, D = 400 2 plain gland plates W = 650, D = 400 double depth combination kit

Dd382572.eps

800 mm deep switchboard

Combination of IP30 cubicles with cover frames.

C-10

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

400E23010

Enclosures

Cover panels

Made up of two cubicles back-to-back. Rear connections are possible. bb front panels Any of the following can be installed in front of the hinged front plate support frame: vv a transparent door (IP30 or IP55) vv a plain door (IP30 or IP55) vv a fixed cover frame (IP30) bb rear panel = screw-on panel bb side panels = set of two panels bb plain roof bb gland plates (plain or in two parts).

Parts list for IP30 switchboard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 08607 : 08606 : 08407 : 08406 : 08566 : 08538 : 08536 : 08518 : 08516 : 08760 : 08750 : 08638 : 08636 : 08438 : 08436 : 08687 : 08686 : 08487 : 08486 : 08719 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) transparent door, W = 650 plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) plain door, W = 650 set of two side panels, D = 600 set of two side panels, D = 400 plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 plain roof, W = 650, D = 600 plain roof, W = 800, D = 400 plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600 plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 double depth combination kit
DD380613.eps

Dd382573.eps

1000 mm deep switchboard

Combination of cubicles with transparent doors.

Parts list for IP55 switchboard 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 08607 : 08606 : 08407 : 08406 : 08566 : 08548 : 08546 : 08528 : framework, W = 800, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 600, H = 2000 framework, W = 800, D = 400, H = 2000 framework, W = 650, D = 400, H = 2000 front plate support frame, W = 650 transparent door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150)

transparent door, W = 650 plain door, W = 800 (supplied with barrier for busbar compartment, W = 150) 08526 : plain door, W = 650 08765 : set of two side panels, D = 600 08755 : set of two side panels, D = 400 08658 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 600 08656 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 600 08458 : plain roof, W = 800, D = 400 08456 : plain roof, W = 650, D = 400 08687 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 600 08686 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 600 08487 : plain gland plate, W = 800, D = 400 08486 : plain gland plate, W = 650, D = 400 08717 x 2: IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations 08719 x 2: double depth combination kit

400E23010

Version : 2.0

16/04/2013

C-11

Enclosures

Cubicles

Frameworks

DD380572.eps

DD380573.eps

DD380800.eps

Framework width
W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150)

Cat. no.
08403 08404 08406 08408 08407

08407.

b composition of catalogue numbers: vv two frames (with two additional uprights for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles for the vv mounting plates and to separate the busbar compartment) vv four cross-pieces vv mounting hardware vv side-by-side combination kit bb for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right bb cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back bb can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.

DD380575.eps

DD380576.eps

DD380801.eps

Framework width
W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150)

Cat. no.
08603 08604 08606 08608 08607

08607.

b composition of catalogue numbers: vv two frames (three for W = 650 + 150 mm cubicles), equipped with intermediate vv uprights for the mounting plates vv four cross-pieces vv mounting hardware vv side-by-side combination kit bb for the 800 mm width, the busbar compartment can be on the left or right bb cubicles can be combined side-by-side and back-to-back bb can be equipped with IP30 or IP55 cover panels.

Hinged front plate support frame


DD383935.eps Dd381324.eps

Designation
Hinged front plate support frame, W = 400mm Hinged front plate support frame, W = 650mm (1) Replaces catalogue number 08504. (2) Replaces catalogue number 08506.

Cat. no.
08564 (1) 08566 (2)

b reversible for left or right-hand opening b secured at two points b can be mounted on 650 mm and 800 mm (650 + 150) wide cubicles.

08564 (1).

08566 (2).

C-12

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23100

DD380577.eps

600 mm deep framework

DD380574.eps

400 mm deep framework

Enclosures

Cubicles

Frameworks

Partial hinged cover frame supports

Hinged cover frame support

Upper

Middle 08560 (1) 08560 (1) 08562 (2) 08562 (2)

Lower 08562 (2) 08562 (2) 08562 (2) 08562 (2)

Front connection Canalis NW08/16 08562 (2) Cable rear connection NW08/32 08562 (2) Front connection Canalis NW20/32 08560 (1) Rear connection cable NW08/32 08560 (1) (1) 1/3 Hinged cover frame supports - 10 modules. (2) 1/3 Hinged cover frame supports - 12 modules.
Dd384637.eps Dd384638.eps

08562

08560

Dd384639.eps

08560

08560

08562

08562

08562

08562

08562

Front connection Canalis NW08/16. Cable rear connection NW08/32.

Front connection Canalis NW20/32.

Rear connection cable NW08/32.

Framework combinations
DD380751.eps

Side-by-side
The 650 and 800 mm wide frameworks are supplied with a combination kit comprising six M6 bolts. To maintain the IP55 degree of protection, an optional gasket must be installed between the combined cubicles. Designation Cat. no.
IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (1 kit per combination)
Dd381325.eps

08717

Note: for Prisma P/Prisma P side-by-side combinations, see page C-22.


DD380752.eps

Back-to-back
Designation
Double depth combination kit

Cat. no.
08719

b The kit is made up of: bb a set of hardware for the mechanical connections between the cross-pieces bb two assembly plates to connect the uprights bb the IP55 sealing kit.
Dd381326.eps

Accessories
Dd381327.eps Dd383048.eps

Designation
Set of 20 screws + wing nuts for framework Set of 10 screws + combination accessories

Cat. no.
08921 08718

400E23100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-13

Enclosures

Cubicles

IP30/31 cover panels

Front panels
DD380582.eps DD380583.eps

Door, W = 650/800 mm
Designation
Plain door Transparent door W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

Cat. no.
08516 08518 08536 08538

bb reversible for left or right-hand opening bb equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.
Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.

08536.

08538.

DD383936.eps

DD380581.eps

Cover frame
Designation
Cover frame W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm (650 +150) (1) Replaces catalogue number 08554. (2) Replaces catalogue number 08556. (3) Replaces catalogue number 08558.

Cat. no.
08574 (1) 08576 (2) 08578 (3)

bb Secured using four screws.

Note: for 800 mm wide frameworks, the 650 mm frame is supplied with a plain wicket door, 150 mm wide.

08576 (1).

08578 (3).

Door, W = 300/400 mm.


DD380584.eps DD380602.eps

Designation

Cat. no.
08513 08514 08534 08593 08594

Plain door Transparent door Door with cut-out

W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 400 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm

bb reversible for left or right-hand opening bb equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.
Note: fhe door with cut-out can be equipped with front plates for 72 x 72 or 96 x 96 instruments, see page A-68.

08513.

08593.

C-14

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23100

Enclosures

Cubicles

IP30/31 cover panels

Rear panels
DD380603.eps

Rear panel
Rear panel

Designation

b made up of two half panels with vents b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.

W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

08733 08734 08736 08738

Cat. no.

08738.
Dd382566.eps

Plain door
Plain door

Designation

W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

08513 08514 08516 08518

Cat. no.

bb equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25. b reversible for left or right-hand opening.
Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright. 08518.

Side Panels
DD380600.eps

Side panels
Set of two side panels

Designation

D = 400 mm D = 600 mm

08750 08760

Cat. no.

Supplied with quarter-turn fasteners.

Side panels for L combinations

Left or right combinations of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600). Designation
Set of two side panels for L combinations 08750. D = 400 mm

08756

Cat. no.

These panels simply replace the standard side panels.


Dd381328.eps Dd381329.eps

Roof
DD380601.eps

Designation
Plain IP30 roof, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

Cat. no.
08433 08434 08436 08438 08633 08634 08636 08638

Plain IP30 roof, D = 600 mm

b supplied with quarter-turn fasteners for mounting on the framework b with markings for cut-outs, if necebbbssary.
08438.

IP Sealing kit

The kit is made up of a self-adhesive gasket that attaches to the roof and a deflector. It ensures the IP31 degree of protection for a 650 or 800 mm wide cubicle, or for two cubicles (800 + 400) when they are equipped with plain or transparent front doors. Designation Cat. no.
IP31 sealing kit 08711

400E23100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-15

Enclosures

Cubicles

IP55 cover panels

Front panels
DD380582.eps DD380583.eps

Door, W = 650/800 mm
Designation
Plain door Transparent door W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

Cat. no.
08526 08528 08546 08548

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b reversible for left or right-hand opening b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.

Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.

08546.

08548.

DD380584.eps

Door, W = 300/400 mm
Designation
Plain door Transparent door W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 400 mm

Cat. no.
08523 08524 08544

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b reversible for left or right-hand opening b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25.

08523.

C-16

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23100

Enclosures

Cubicles

IP55 cover panels

Rear panels
DD380599.eps

Rear panel
Rear panel

Designation

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b supplied with mounting hardware b one-piece, reinforced panel designed to ensure the degree of protection.

W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

Cat. no.
08743 08744 08746 08748

08748.
Dd382566.eps

Plain door
Plain door

Designation

W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

08523 08524 08526 08528

Cat. no.

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b equipped with a handle and keylock (key 405). For other possibilities, see page C-25. reversible for left or right-hand opening.
08528. Note: the 800 mm door is supplied with a 150 mm barrier for the side compartment, plus a finishing accessory to improve the appearance of the upright.

Side panels
DD380600.eps

Side panels
Set of two side panels

Designation

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b supplied with mounting hardware.

D = 400 mm D = 600 mm

08755 08765

Cat. no.

Side panels for L combinations


Left or right combinations of two cubicles with different depths (800 + 400 or 1000 + 600). Designation Cat. no.
D = 400 mm 08756

08755.

Set of two side panels for L combinations

b these panels simply replace the standard side panels b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket.
Dd381328.eps Dd381329.eps

Roof
DD380601.eps

Plain roof, D = 400 mm

Designation

Plain roof, D = 600 mm

W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm

08453 08454 08456 08458 08653 08654 08656 08658

Cat. no.

08458.

b equipped with a factory-mounted polyurethane (PUR) gasket b supplied with mounting hardware b with markings for clear identification of cable-running zones, if necessary. 16/04/2013

400E23100

Version : 3.0

C-17

Enclosures

Cubicles
Plinth

Gland plates
Dd381334.eps

Gland plates (IP55)


Designation
Gland plates, D = 400 W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150) W = 800 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150) W = 800 mm

Cat. no.
08483 08484 08486 08487 08488 08683 08684 08686 08687 08688

Gland plates, D = 600

08486.

Dd381335.eps

Two-part gland plates (IP30)


Designation
Two-part gland plates, D = 400 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150) W = 800 mm W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm (650 + 150) W = 800 mm

Cat. no.
08493 08494 08496 08497 08498 08693 08694 08696 08697 08698

Two-part gland plates, D = 600 mm

08496.

Plinth, H = 100 mm
Dd381330.eps

The plinth is made up of two catalogue numbers: bb one catalogue number comprising four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and rear), that can be used in side-by-side combinations or stacked to form a plinth 200 mm high (maximum) bb one catalogue number comprising two side plates (400 or 600 mm). Each catalogue number is supplied with the necessary hardware. Designation
Four corner posts + two cross-pieces (front and rear) W = 300 mm W = 400 mm W = 650 mm W = 800 mm D = 400 mm D = 600 mm
Dd381332.eps

Cat. no.
08723 08724 08726 08728 08720 08721

Two side plates

08726 + 08720.

Dd381331.eps

Side-by-side combination of two cubicles with a plinth.


Dd381333.eps

Two stacked plinths.

The front and rear cross-pieces can be easily removed for a pallet-mover.

C-18

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23100

Enclosures

Cubicles

Cubicle handling and rolling base Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles
Cubicle handling and rolling base
DD383845.eps

50

L 08714 + 08705.
DD383849.eps

This type of base is designed to avoid any risk of cubicle deformation during transport and handling. Five different catalogue numbers offer 27 width possibilities (1200 to 3050 mm) for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles. bb Two catalogue numbers each include 2 end-pieces for handling bases for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. bb Three catalogue numbers each include 2 lengths for the sides of handling bases for 1200 to 3050 mm wide cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. Handling bases can be used for both side-by-side and back-to-back cubicle combinations. In this case, the mounting hardware for one of the sets is used. Designation
2 cubicle handling base end-pieces 2 cubicle handling base side-lengths D = 400 mm D = 600 mm W = 1200 to 900 mm W = 2000 to 2550 mm W = 2650 to 3030 mm

Cat. no.
08714 08716 08705 08706 08707

Combined cubicles equipped with a handling base can be moved easily and safely on rollers.
DD380652.eps

08716

08705

DD383840.eps

Side-by-side and back-to-back combination of 4 cubicles equipped with a handling base.

Lifting reinforcement kit


DD383838.eps

Kit 08722 is recommended for lifting combined cubicles and can be used together with handling base end-pieces 08714 or 08716 for severe transport or handling conditions. Catalogue number 08722 includes 3 reinforcement brackets for 400 or 600 mm deep cubicles and the corresponding mounting hardware. Designation
Lifting reinforcement kit W = 400/600 mm

Cat. no.
08722

DD383839.eps

08722

08722

08722

650

400

800

800

800

300

A lifting reinforcement kit should be installed every 800 mm.

400E23100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-19

Enclosures

Cubicles

Right-angle kit

IP30 right-angle kit


Dd381336.eps

Metal duct
Designation

Used to create and protect the connection of horizontal busbars between two cubicles installed at right angles. Cat. no.
08713 IP30 right-angle kit

Free support and joints, see page B-26.

Dd381337.eps

C-20

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23100

Enclosures

Installation accessories

Lifting rings
Dd381541.eps

Set of four lifting rings screwed to the framework. Use a set of lifting rings for each framework (W = 650 and 800 mm) containing devices. When two cubicles with devices have been combined, use a lifting beam. Designation Cat. no.
4 lifting rings 08700

b can be installed and removed without removing the roof b even if they are left attached, the switchboard conserves its original degree of protection.
Dd381542.eps Dd381543.eps

Positions of the lifting rings for two combined cubicles containing devices. In this case, a lifting beam must be used.

Framework stabiliser kit


DD383846.eps

Designation
Stabiliser kit

Cat. no.
08701

b made up of four blocks under the framework b suitable for all types of cubicles, whatever the width and depth b increases the stability of the cubicle during mounting of devices b makes possible cubicle handling using a pallet mover or a forklift b protects the front, side and rear cover panels during handling b can be reused.

Levelling kit
Dd381545.eps

Designation
Levelling kit (set of 4 fixtures)

Cat. no.
08702

b can be installed at any time, even when the cubicle is already in position b maximum adjustment range = 10 mm v secures the cubicle to the floor.
Dd381549.eps Dd381550.eps

Maximum adjustment range = 10 mm. Secures the cubicle to the floor.


Dd381551.eps

Recommended positions of the fixtures for combined cubicles.

400E23210

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-21

Enclosures

Installation accessories

Floor/wall fixing kit


Dd381548.eps

Designation
Floor/wall fixing kit

Cat. no.
08704

b made up of two brackets and four clamps b can be used to offset the switchboard fixing points for easier access b the wall brackets ensure sufficient wall clearance (at least 30 mm) for natural convection.
Dd381554.eps

Dd381553.eps

At least 30 mm of clearance between the wall and a cubicle with a vented rear panel is required for natural convection.

The offset floor fixing points are easily accessible.

False floor fixing kit


Dd381547.eps

Designation
False floor fixing kit

Cat. no.
08703

b made up of four independent clamps b clamp on U sections (H = 175 mm, W = 70 mm) or I sections (H = 120 mm, W=64 mm) b clamp travel = 11 mm.
Dd381552.eps

Prisma PH/Prisma P side-by-side combinations


DD383847.eps

To add a Prisma P cubicle to an existing Prisma PH installation, use the following combination kit Designation Cat. no.
Prisma PH/Prisma P side-by-side combination kit 01198 When combining Prisma PH and Prisma P IP55 enclosures, use the IP55 sealing kit for side-by-side combinations (08717) together with the side-by-side combination kit (01198).
DD385278.eps

Prisma PH

Prisma P

300-700-900

Prisma P/Prisma P side-by-side combinations


Dd382926.eps Dd385279.eps

To add a Prisma P cubicle to an existing Prisma P installation, use the following combination kit and a 400 mm wide frame. Designation Cat. no.
Prisma P/Prisma P side-by-side combination kit 01199

C-22

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23210

Enclosures

Front plate accessories

Front plate accessories


DD383950.eps

Designation
Front plate hinge kit (set of 2 hinges)

Cat. no.
08585

Blanking plates
DD384029.eps

For modular devices Designation


Blanking strip, H = 46 mm, W = 1000 mm 4 divisible blanking plates, H = 46 mm, W = 90 mm colour: white RAL 9001

Cat. no.
03220 03221

DD384030.eps

For Compact NSX100/250 Designation


1 divisible blanking plates, H = 85 mm, W = 147 mm colour: white RAL 9001 Compact NSX electronic trip unit divisible blanking plate

Cat. no.
03249 03222

OK

DD384091.eps

OK e Mod

OK e

Mod

OK e

Mod

Adhesive labels for mimic diagrams

10 lines, 900 mm long and 7 mm thick 10 outgoing arrows 10 incoming arrows 10 transformers 10 earth symbols

Designation

Black
01005 01006 01007 01008 01009

400E00120

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

C-23

Enclosures

Front plate accessories

Switchboard identification plate


DD381721.eps

Designation
Switchboard identification plate

Cat. no.
08900

Identification labels
DD383974.eps

Clip-on labels
Clip-on labels The clip-on support is supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover.It clips onto the front plate horizontally or vertically and can be screwed to any support (plain door, plain front plate, etc.). Engraving plates Supplied separately, these plates simply replace the paper labels. Cat. no. selection

T LIGH

Clip-on label.

Designation
12 clip-on labels 18 x 35 18 x 72 25 x 85 18 x 35 18 x 72 25 x 85

Cat. no.
08913 08915 08917 08914 08916 08918

Dd383975.eps

12 engraving plates
T LIGH
DD384031.eps

Engraving plate.

DD381715.eps

Adhesive labels

The adhesive label holders are supplied with a paper label and a transparent cover. Designation Cat. no.
12 label holders, W = 180 mm 12 label holders, W = 432 mm H = 24 mm H = 36 mm H = 24 mm H = 36 mm 08905 08906 08903 08904

Symbol sheets Each sheet comprises adhesive symbols that can be positioned on the identificationlabels to immediately identify the type of circuit. Standard symbols: b loads: sockets, lights, heating units, etc. b rooms: bedroom, bathroom, etc. Special symbols:loads: b lightning arrestor, gate, swimming pool, etc. b rooms: technical room, computer room, etc. Cat. no. selection Designation
Standard symbols. Set of ten symbol sheets standard standard special

DD381751.eps

Cat. no.
13735 13736

DD381752.eps

DD381753.eps

Symbols on an adhesive label holder. Special symbols.

C-24

Version : 2.1

16/04/2013

400E00120

Enclosures

Enclosure accessories
Door handles and locks

Handles
DD384362.eps DD384363.eps

EURO handle without barrel

Designation

Cat. no.
08932

DD384364.eps

ASSA/ABLOY handle without barrel

Designation

Cat. no.
08933

DD384365.eps

Ral 7016 standard handle Can be equipped with all the barrel locks and inserts presented below.

Designation

Cat. no.
08931

Barrel locks, inserts


DD384366.eps DD381203.eps

The barrel locks and inserts below can be mounted on handle 08930 and on all the door handles of the Prisma P range after removing the standard barrel lock (key no. 405). Cat. no. Designation
Barrel locks Barrel lock +1 keys no. 405 Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 455 Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 1242E Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 3113A Barrel lock + 2 keys no. 2433A Barrel lock + 2 keys no.2432E Inserts DIN double bar insert Screwdriver slot insert 6.5 mm male triangle insert 7 mm male triangle insert 8 mm male triangle insert 9 mm male triangle insert 6 mm male square insert 7 mm male square insert 8 mm male square insert 6 mm female square insert 08940 08941 08942 08943 08944 08956 08945 08946 08947 08948 08949 08950 08951 08952 08953 08955

Padlocking
DD384367.eps

Handle padlocking kit

Designation

Cat. no.
08938

The kit can be installed on the door handles of the Prisma P range equipped with any of the barrel locks and inserts above.

400E23060

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-25

Enclosures

Enclosure accessories

Earthing braid
DD384368.eps

Earthing braid, 6 mm

Designation

Cat. no.
08910

08910.
DD381338.eps

b The braid is equipped with a 4 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug on the other. It is used to earth: b a door or wicket door with devices b a front-plate support frame equipped with switchgear in a cubicle.

08910. Earthing wire, 6 mm

Designation

Cat. no.
08911

The wire is equipped with a 5 mm diameter lug at one end and a 6 mm diameter lug on the other. The earthing wire is used to earth: b a door or wicket door with devices b a front-plate support frame equipped with switchgear in a cubicle. Highly recommended for mounting on doors of System P cubicles.
DD384368.eps DD384052.eps

08911. 08911.

Touch-up accessories
DD385306.eps

Touch-up spray paint, colour RAL 9001

Designation

Cat. no.
08961

Drawing holder
DD381208.eps

Adhesive drawing holder, colour RAL 9001

Designation

Cat. no.
08963

C-26

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23060

Enclosures

Air-conditioning accessories

Ventilation

In most cases and notably for IP30 switchboards, the heat dissipation by convection takes place naturally and does not require fans. However, when the switchboard is installed in temperate environments or when the degree of protection is high (IP54), ventilation accessories are indispensable.
For more in-depth information on selecting air-conditioning accessories and the thermal management of switchboards. > page D-80 to page D-87.

Front plate

For fan and grill


DD60759.eps

Ventilated front plate


Dd381676.eps

Catalogue number Height Characteristics Surface area of the openings

03890 7 modules H = 350 mm Front plate with cut-out. Degree of protection: IP30. -

03891 03895 1 vertical module, 3 vertical modules, H = 50 mm H = 150 mm Degree of protection: IP30. Located at the top and bottom of the switchboard, IP30 ventilated front plates facilitate natural convection in the switchboard. 250 cm2 80 cm2

Fan
PB501053_35.eps

Grill with filter


PB501046_35.eps

Catalogue number Installation Characteristics

NSYCVF560M230PF - NSYCVF850M230PF NSYCAG291LPF bb Generally installed at the bottom of floor-standing enclosures: bb by cutting out a side panel; bb or by using the front plate with cut-out for fan or grill, directly clipped on (03890). The set comprises the fan with a grill and a filter. bb Power rating: 68/85 W. bb Input voltage: 230 V (50/60 Hz). bb Noise level: 59 db. bb Degree of protection: IP54. bb Weight: 3.2 kg. bb Unimpeded throughput: 562 m3/h (50 Hz), 586 m3/h (60 Hz). bb Throughput with counterpressure (grill + standard filter, cat. no. 08988): 473 m3/h (50 Hz), 477 m3/h (60 Hz). bb RAL 7035. bb Material: ABS.
DB300475EN.eps DB300474.eps DB300476.eps

Supplied with standard filter. bb Maximum throughput 350 m3/h. bb Degree of protection: IP54. bb RAL 7035. bb Material: ABS.

336

290.7 A

291 x 291

DD385319.eps

Dimensions

18

18

A 225
9.5

B 160.5 192

Catalogue number NSYCVF560M230PF NSYCVF850M230PF

316 B 9.5

280

Catalogue number Characteristics

Filters for grill

NSYCAF291 Set of 5 (for replacement) G2 M1 synthetic filter

Standard filters

NSYCAF291T Set of 5 (for replacement) G3 M1 synthetic filter

Fine filters

400E23070

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-27

Enclosures

Air-conditioning accessories

Roof fan
Dd381725.eps

Presentation A roof with a cut-out (IP31) can also be equipped with one or two fans. It is supplied with a cover to protect the fans against dust or falling objects. It is available in 400 and 600 mm depths. Cat. no. selection Designation Cat. no.
D = 400 mm D = 600 mm 08476 08676 08986

Ventilated roof, W = 650 mm Fan

Fan characteristics Power rating: 35 W. Input voltage: 230 V. Noise level: 52 dB. Throughput: 300 m3/h.
Dd382315.eps Dd381648.eps

C-28

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E23070

Enclosures

Air-conditioning accessories

Heating elements

The resistors prevent condensation, corrosion and superficial leakage currents. They maintain a positive temperature in the enclosures when external temperatures drop very low. Install heaters according to the desired power level at the bottom of the enclosure, respect a safety area of a least 10 cm around the device. Vertical installation is recommended to ensure optimum convection. The resistance heaters are equipped with a PTC - type sensor (positive temperature coefficient). Thanks to these heaters, the surface temperature stabilises at 75 C when the ambient is at -5 C.

Heating resistor
PB501146_32.eps PB501025.eps

Catalogue number Power rating Characteristics

NSYCR55WU2 NSYCR100WU2 55 W 90 W bb Vertical mounting. bb Aluminium case with fins. bb Temperature: vv turns off at 60 C, vv turns on at 25-30 C (temperature of the resistor itself). bb Equipped with a symetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on). bb Input voltage: 110-250 V.

NSYCR250W230VV 250 W bb Vertical mounting. bb Aluminium case with fins. bb Temperature: vv turns off at 60 C, vv turns on at 25-30 C (temperature of the resistor itself). bb Equipped with a symetrical rail for rapid mounting (clips on). bb Input voltage: 230 V.

Regulating

Used to control the temperature inside electrical switchboards in conjunction with heating resistors and fans. This thermostat can control the activation of a fan and a heater and regulate their temperature independently. Double adjustable thermostat Double temperature control with a resistance heater and a fan with separate operation bb Red button: with normally closed contact (NC) for controlling the resistance heaters. bb Blue button: with normally open contact (NO) for controlling the fans, signalling systems or alarms.

Thermostat
PB501162_30.eps

Catalogue number Characteristics

NSYCCOTHD bb Setting range: 0 C to +60 C. bb Power rating: 30 W bb Input voltage: 120 V AC, 15 A - 230 V AC, 10 A bb Fixing: clips onto a modular rail.

Thermal management of switchboards


> page D-80

400E23070

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-29

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Frameworks, D = 400 mm
Dd381875.eps Dd381822.eps Dd381823.eps Dd381826.eps

Frameworks, D = 600 mm
Dd381824.eps Dd381825.eps

Dd381827.eps

Fixing to floor
Without plinth
Dd381829.eps Dd381830.eps

Dd381893.eps

A 300 400 650 800

B 262.5 362.5 612.5 762.5

C-30

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E31000

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Cubicle with cover panels


Height
Dd381831.eps Dd381832.eps

Width
Dd381833.eps

Door in front and panel in rear


Dd382322.eps Dd382323.eps

Depth

Doors front and rear

Dd382324.eps

Door
Dd381834.eps

Dd382325.eps

IP30 door
Dd381835.eps Dd381836.eps

IP55 door
Dd381837.eps Dd381828.eps

Available space behind door


Dd382277.eps

400E31000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-31

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Linergy LGYE busbars


630 A - 1600 A
DD384597.eps DD384598.eps

2000 A - 2500 A
DD384599.eps

3200 A - 4000 A

60 23 2000

100 31 2000

150 31

2000

DD384545.eps

DD384546.eps

DD384547.eps

DD384548.eps

DD384550.eps

DD384551.eps

DD384552.eps

Layout of horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars


DD384601.eps DD384600.eps DD384589.eps DD384590.eps

Layout of vertical Linergy LGYE busbars


630 A - 1600 A
DD384591.eps DD384592.eps DD384593.eps DD384594.eps

DD384553.eps

99
2000 A - 2500 A
DD384595.eps DD384596.eps

99
3200 A - 4000 A

99

99

99

249 300

159

C-32

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

DD384549.eps

400E31000

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Horizontal Linergy BS busbars


Dd381849.eps Dd381876.eps Dd381856.eps Dd381853.eps

Layout of horizontal Linergy BS busbars


Dd381850.eps Dd381851.eps Dd381852.eps Dd381855.eps

Vertical Linergy LGY busbars


Dd381857.eps Dd381858.eps

630 A.
Dd381859.eps Dd381860.eps

800 A.

1000 A.

1250 A.

1600 A.

Layout of Linergy LGY busbars


Dd381861.eps Dd381862.eps Dd381863.eps Dd381864.eps

Dd381865.eps

Double Linergy LGY busbars.

400E31000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-33

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Vertical Linergy BS busbars


Dd381866.eps Dd381867.eps

Layout of lateral Linergy BS busbars


Dd381868.eps Dd381869.eps Dd381870.eps Dd381871.eps

Dd381872.eps

Double Linergy BS busbars.

Layout of rear Linergy BS busbars


Dd381873.eps Dd381874.eps

D = 400 mm D = 600 mm

B C B C

A 50 284 250 484 450

60 274 240 474 440

80 254 220 454 420

D = 400 mm D = 600 mm

B C B C

284 242 484 442

C-34

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E31000

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Plain gland plates


A 300 400 650 800 C 110 210 460 610
Dd381838.eps Dd381842.eps Dd381840.eps

Dd384559.eps

Dd384558.eps

400E31000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

C-35

Enclosures
Dimensions

Cubicles

Two-part gland plates


Dd381838.eps Dd381843.eps Dd381844.eps

Dd381846.eps

Dd381847.eps

Dd381848.eps

Dd381845.eps

C-36

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E31000

Additional information

Contents

Presentation 22 Functional units A-1 Distribution B-1 Enclosures C-1

After-sales support

D-4

Energy efficiency with Prisma P


Energy efficiency with Prisma P Monitor electrical network status

D-8

Power monitoring solutions D-9 Local supervision - Switchboard display units D-10 Remote supervision - Transparent Ready D-11 Remote supervision PowerLogic PowerView D-12 Power monitoring solutions D-13 Installation D-15 Improving power quality Additional equipment to optimise electrical installations

D-8 D-9

Optimise electrical networks

D-16

D-16 D-17

Designing electrical characteristics


Designing Prisma P power circuits
Presentation and approach Linergy LGYE Linergy BS

D-18
D-18 D-21 D-23 D-24
D-18 D-21 D-22

Designing horizontal busbars Designing Linergy LGY busbars Designing vertical flat busbars

Linergy LGYE Linergy BS Designing vertical Linergy BS busbars Prefabricated connections for Linergy LGY busbars

D-24 D-25 D-26 D-27 D-30 D-31 D-32 D-34 D-36 D-38 D-39 D-41 D-43 D-44 D-45 D-47 D-48 D-49

Designing connections u 630 A

D-27

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40 - Front or rear connection Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW32 - Front or rear connection Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32 - Front or rear connection Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200 - Front or rear connection Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 Withdrawable Compact NS630btoNS1600 Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1000 Horizontal Device connections Compact circuit breakers - NSX100 to NSX630 Tubular lugs

D-30

Designing connections y 630 A

D-44 D-46 D-48 D-49 D-50

Designing connections with cables Designing the PE protective conductor


Power circuit Power circuit

Designing the PEN conductor Designing customer connections


Prefabricated connections for Compact NS630b to NS1600 Top or bottom front connection Prefabricated connections for Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Top or bottom front connection Connection transfer assembly for horizontal fixed Compact NS630b to NS1000 Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40 - Front or rear connection Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW40 - Front or rear connection Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - Rear connection Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - Rear connection Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200 - Front or rear connection Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 - Rear connection Withdrawable Compact NS630b to NS1600, rear connection Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 - Horizontal 16/04/2013

D-50 D-51 D-52 D-53 D-55 D-57 D-59 D-61 D-62 D-64 D-66 D-1

400E50040

Version : 3.1

Contents

Designing busbars

Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL - Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL - Horizontal Linergy BS bars Fupact INF, ISFT - Vertical Linergy LGYE busbars Fupact INF, ISFT - Vertical Linergy BS bars

D-67

D-67 D-68 D-69 D-70

Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises Properties of metal enclosures

D-71
D-71 D-78

Thermal characteristics of switchboards

General D-80 Example D-83 Charts D-85 Ventilation D-86 Heating D-87

D-80

Tools required for mounting and connection D-88 Cable sizes according to permissible current D-89 Connection accessories D-90 Protective circuits D-91 Connection of horizontal to vertical busbars D-93 Installation of the current transformer D-94 Installation of source changeover systems D-96 Storage recommendations D-98 Packing information D-99 Handling on the site D-100 Transport D-102 Cubicle handling and rolling base - Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles D-103 Connection of busbar trunking D-104 Connection of power cables D-105

Practical information

D-88

D-2

Version : 3.1

16/04/2013

400E50040

400E50040

Version : 3.1

16/04/2013

D-3

Additional information

After-sales support

Linergy BW busbar accessories


DD384560.EPS

Linergy BW accessories, 160/400A 2 end plugs 2 angle brackets support 2 screws

01210

4 Linergy BW accessories, 630A 2 end plugs 5 2 metal angle brackets 2 brackets for support 2 hexagonal blocks 2 2 self-tapping screws 2 IPxxB clipon covers for Linergy BW 01201 01211

Linergy FM busbar accessories (IP30)


DD384561.EPS

4 terminal covers for 200 A Linergy FM

01202

Linergy busbar accessories (IP30)


DD384574.EPS

12 chocks for Linergy busbars

01109

Framework accessories
DD384562.EPS

Framework accessories 4 top sealing components 4 bottom sealing components 4 bottom cross-piece plugs

01104

2 adjacent mounting spacer tubes Mounting hardware (2) 12 conical washers

DD384563.EPS

1 2

Mounting hardware D=400mm or D=600mm framework 2 adjacent mounting spacer tubes 2 washers 4 bottom cross-piece plugs Mounting hardware (2)

01108

D-4

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E24000

Additional information

After-sales support

Front-plate accessories
DD384564.EPS

20 self adhesive front plate grips

01093

DD384582.eps

10 sets of 2 grips quarter turn

01094

Accessory
DD384565.EPS

Plain wicket door, W=150mm

01110

Linergy LGYE busbar accessories


DD384609.eps

Linergy LGYE connection screwplate kit 4 flat plates 4 flat plates

01130

4 flat plates 24 conical contact washer 8 24 torque nut M8

24 flat washers 22

Rear accessories
DD384566.EPS

Accessories (IP55) 2 roof/rear panel spacers 6 rear panel spacers 4 IP55 framework plugs 3 white grommet plugs

01101

DD384578.EPS

Rear panel accessories 2 IP30 roof and rear panel fixing systems 8 IP30 rear panel fixing systems

01106

400E24000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-5

Additional information

After-sales support

Side panel accessories


DD384567.EPS

Side panel accessories 16 fixing system IP30

01100

DD384568.EPS

Accessories for IP55 side panel 16 fixing system IP55 16 cage nuts

01102

DD384569.EPS

Accessories for IP55 roof 4 lifting ring plugs 6 sheet metal nuts

01103

Roof accessories
Roof accessories
DD384570.EPS

01112

4 lifting ring plugs 6 IP30 roof and rear panel fixing systems

Front plate support frames


DD384571.EPS

Front plate support striker kit for 08564 - 08566

01123

D-6

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E24000

Additional information

After-sales support

Framework accessory
Framework accessories
DD384608.EPS

CS frame bottom cross-member W400 to be used with old model 08504 CS frame bottom cross-member W650 to be used with old model 08506 CS frame bottom cross-member W150 + 650 to be used with old model 08506 CS frame bottom cross-member W650 + 150 to be used with old model 08506

01115 01116 01117 01118

DD384572.EPS

Frame bottom cross-member W400 to use with 08564 Frame bottom cross-member W650 to use with 08566 Frame bottom cross-member W150+650 to use with 08566 Frame bottom cross-member W650+150 to use with 08566 (1) Spare parts on stock in RAL 9001 only.

01119(1) 01120(1) 01121(1) 01122(1)

Door accessories
DD384617.eps

Closing accessories 1 2 3 Screw THF M6 x 16 Stop rod 1/4 turn stud Stop doors Hinge pins 4 5 6 Captive nut for frame

01105

DD384573.EPS

Retrofit handle 1 handle 1 key no. 405

01221

1 handle staple 1 shifting fork 1 Pozidriv screw for handle staple

2 nut + washer with teeth 2 control rod

5 6

400E24000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-7

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Energy efficiency the easy way. Prisma P contributes to energy efficiency by integrating electrical installation supervision solutions. Simple and fast access to key information concerning the electrical equipment makes it possible to: b monitor electrical network status to maintain power quality b adjust power quality b optimise electrical networks using suitable equipment

Solutions designed for Prisma P

All the proposed energy-efficiency solutions have been designed for use with Prisma P. This ensures easy installation and operation, compatible front plates and mounting plates, fast and easy connections, etc.

A comprehensive approach

The new energy-efficiency solutions are accompanied by catalogues and guides covering aspects such as special software and communicating devices.
DD384063.eps PD390180-50_SE.eps

D-8

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E15000

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Power monitoring solutions

Schneider Electric's comprehensive approach to power monitoring makes it possible to supervise installation status in real time.

Two solution levels cover the needs of all types of electrical installations. A. Local supervision for all types of installations via switchboard display units b Display of data, e.g. current, voltage, power and energy in real time. b Improved operation via alarms indicating equipment problems. B. Remote supervision for small to mid-sized installations with Transparent Ready and PowerLogic PowerView solutions b Display of data, e.g. current, voltage, power, power factor, energy and harmonics in real time. b Data recording for trend analysis. b Curve plotting and preparation of reports

Size of installation

PowerLogic PowerView PowerMeter switchboard display FDM121 switchboard display unit

Transparent Ready

Local supervision

Remote supervision

400E15000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-9

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Local supervision Switchboard display units
FDM121 switchboard display unit for Compact NSX Two possibilities for door installation

Switchboard display units are a simple, low-cost solution for basic monitoring of electrical switchboards. They can be rapidly installed for direct readout of data through specially designed front plates.

The FDM121 displays the measurement, alarm and operating information of the intelligent functional unit. b Surface mounting using a fixing accessory (requires door drilling). b Installation in door cutout using clips.

PB391291-57.eps

Installation on metal front plates with cutouts


Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for four 96 x 96 mm devices) Blanking plate (for 96 x 96 mm hole)

Designation

03911 03908

Cat. no.

PE86158-37.eps

Dd381711.eps

PowerMeter switchboard display

PowerMeter devices are compatible with all intelligent functional units via their Modbus communication port (except Compact NSX) and can also be used as an interface between the communication gateway and the intelligent device to combine both local and remote monitoring.

Installation on metal front plates with cutouts


Metal front plate with cut-outs, 3 modules (for one 96 x 96 device)

Designation

03913

Cat. no.

DD383662.eps

D-10

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E15000

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Remote supervision Transparent Ready

Transparent Ready is the Schneider Electric solution to access information without specific software. With a simple interface and a standard web browser, users can choose the information they want to display via web pages.

DD384063.eps

Functions

b Energy management using Transparent Ready to forward information on current, voltage, power factor, etc. b Equipment management through monitoring of equipment state and maintenance needs. b Monitoring of power quality with a full panorama of energy characteristics that are updated daily.

DD384066_SE.eps

Typical solution

b Intelligent devices. b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX. b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard. b Connection of the entire network to an EGX400 communication gateway including web pages and an Ethernet connection.

400E15000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-11

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Remote supervision PowerLogic PowerView

PowerLogic PowerView is a complete power monitoring solution for small to midsized sites. The software, easy to install and use, includes the drivers required for serial and Ethernet connections. It is ideal for monitoring small to mid-sized sites.

PE86106.eps

Functions

Energy management with real-time display of current, voltage, power, power factor, energy, demand power, demand current and total harmonic distortion (THD). b Supervision of equipment and preventive maintenance. b Strategic planning to avoid system down time. b Display of curves in Excel. b Preparation of reports.

Typical solution
Serial link b Intelligent devices. b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard. b Connection of switchboard to local Modbus network. Ethernet link b Intelligent devices. b Modbus interface module for each Compact NSX. b Modbus network for all devices in the switchboard. b Connection of switchboard via an EGX100 communication gateway to the b Ethernet network.
DD384067_SE.eps

D-12

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E15000

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Power monitoring solutions

Communicating devices
PB103208-33.eps PB100708_20_SE.eps

Intelligent functional units (e.g. Masterpact, Compact NSX) in the switchboard can provide power monitoring functions without any additional installation requirements. Prisma P is perfectly suited in terms of device layout, installation on mounting plates, use of specially designed front plates, etc. Device Designation
Masterpact Compact NSX Installation See page A-5 See page A-23

PM710.

Other intelligent functional units from the motor control range such as TeSys U are also very easy to install and set up.
Note: for more information, see pages 212-213 in the catalogue and the catalogue Contrle Commande Moteur

DB107849.eps

M 3

Modbus interface module


DD384065.eps

Compact NSX devices require a Modbus interface module for data transmission. The devices are installed on a stacking accessory that can be clip-mounted on a modular rail.
Device Installation No. of vertical modules Modular rail Modular front plate 03204

Designation
Modbus interface Module 4 03401 Note: Modbus interface modules are set up either manually or using RSU software (see the ULP guide).

Communication gateway
DB107851_33_SE.eps

For remote operation, the Prisma P intelligent-switchboard offers two communication gateways, the EGX100 and 400. The EGX400 is also a web server with a 16 MB memory. They transmit data over Ethernet networks and can be easily installed in the switchboard on a modular rail.
Device Installation No. of vertical modules 4 5 Modular rail Modular front plate 03204 03205

Designation
EGX100 EGX400 EGX100.
PB100704_68_SE.eps

03401 03401

EGX400.

400E15000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-13

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Power monitoring solutions
Circuit monitor CM

Power monitoring units


059162_42_SE.eps

PowerLogic CM3000 and CM4000 circuit monitors are high-performance power monitoring units that can be installed on incoming devices, at the head of the switchboard, or on critical outgoing circuits. They offer a wide range of measurement possibilities and integrate easily in supervision systems thanks to their Ethernet capabilities and on-board web server. They are Transparent Ready.

Functions

b Recording of electrical installation parameters. b Cost control. b Power quality improvement and reduced downtime

Installation
Device No. of vertical Mounting modules plate Cut-out front Plain front plate plate

DD381716.eps

Circuit Monitor CM3000 Circuit Monitor CM4000

Circuit Monitor CM

4 4

03571 03572

03918 03918

03804 03806

Installation in the device compartment.

Powerlog 4000 CM

ic system

D-14

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E15000

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Monitor electrical network status


Installation
DD384064.eps

Simple wiring makes for fast and easy installation of the supervision system in the switchboard. Schneider Electric provides all the tools required to produce intelligent switchboards while maintaining the criteria that make Prisma P stand out, i.e. safety, quality and simplicity.

DD384055.eps

Masterpact NW 2500A

NSX 630A NSX 630A NSX 630A

PM 800

Tesys U
Tesys U

EGX 100 Ethernet

NSX 630A Rseau ULP

FDM 121 FDM 121 FDM 121 FDM 121

Example of a communication network in a switchboard combining power distribution and motor control.

Wiring rules
E20543.eps

Some care is required in setting up a communicating circuit in a switchboard. The cables must be as short as possible to avoid loops that cause stray currents generated by magnetic fields. For more information on wiring rules, please see the installation guide.

400E15000

IFM

Rseau Modbus

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-15

Energy efficiency with Prisma P

D-16 To improve power quality, Schneider Electric proposes two power-factor correction systems, VarplusCan. Both are designed for optimum installation in Prisma P.
DD384583.EPS

Additional information

Installation

Improving power quality

see page A-59 for information on installation in the enclosure.

Optimise electrical networks

The modules can be supplied by vertical busbars, e.g. Linergy.

Prisma P enclosures are designed for installation of the new VarplusCan powerfactor correction modules that improve the quality of the electrical distribution system and reduce consumption of reactive energy. The modules are made up of capacitors, contactors and devices protecting against internal faults.

Version : 3.0
Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France Module de compensation / Power factor correction module 51212 -122 06 123 EN 60439-1 IEC 439-1 Harmony 215Hz Circuit auxiliaire / 30 + 60Kvar - 400V auxiliairy circuit : 230V 50/60Hz 6,25 + 6,25Kvar - 415V 50Hz Made in France

16/04/2013
G FE D C B A

400E15000

Additional information
Energy efficiency with Prisma P

Optimise electrical networks


Additional equipment to optimise electrical installations

During design or during subsequent operation, electrical installations are increasingly outfitted with components designed to optimise energy consumption. With Prisma P, most of these products can already be added to the switchboard. By limiting the temperature within the switchboard, it is possible to extend the life of the equipment and optimise its use. In addition, electricity consumption is reduced because equipment in good condition has lower losses.

Heaters
Dd381666.eps Dd381667.eps

Heaters contribute to equipment optimisation by limiting condensation, corrosion and, above all, leakage currents along surfaces.

Installation and characteristics


See page C-29.

Fans
DD381703.eps Dd382315.eps

Several types of fans are available: enclosure wall or roof-mount versions. They are particularly useful for switchboards installed in temperate environments or when the degree of protection of the enclosure is high (IP55).

Installation and characteristics


See page C-27 and page C-28.

Thermostat
Dd381668.eps

Thermostats are used to limit the temperature inside switchboards when heaters and fans are installed, thus reducing heat losses.

Installation and characteristics


See page C-29.

Installation
DD384054.eps

Heaters and thermostats simply clip onto a modular rail.

400E15000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-17

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Presentation and approach


In the following pages you will find a number of examples, validated for Prisma P switchboards, intended to assist in determining the busbars as well as the upstream and downstream connections for the installation. The examples assume that the devices have already been selected. A complete process involves a number of steps before making final choices (transformer, conductors, protection, etc.). Schneider Electric offers a number of tools to assist in designing a complete installation (technical guides, software).

Designing Prisma P power circuits

Prisma P takes into account the installation and connection conditions of Schneider Electric devices. The entire installation complies with standard IEC 60439-1. The result is a type tested switchboard.

PD390311_SE.eps

Busbar sizing

The factors that must be taken into account in determining the size of busbars include: b the diversity factor. Not all the loads supplied by a set of busbars are used at full rated load or at the same time. The diversity factor is the means to determine the maximum load current used to size the busbars. Standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 4.7 specifies the table below.
2 and 3 4 and 5 6 to 9 10 and more

Number of circuits

0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6

Diversity factor

b the degree of protection IP. b the ambient temperature around the switchboard.

D-18

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E42000

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing Prisma P power circuits

Presentation and approach


The maximum load current for a set of busbars is a function of the thermal environment. The type and the size of the conductors must be determined in view of carrying the required currents taking into account the temperatures reached in the switchboard. These conductors are subjected to additional heat rise caused by the flowing current (joule effect) and the connected devices. The temperatures reached by the conductors and the insulating materials, etc. must not exceed the maximum temperatures for which the products were designed. Schneider Electric busbars and distribution blocks are sized to operate without any particular constraints for the assemblies in Prisma P switchboards operating under normal environmental conditions (standard switchboard configuration, 35 C outside the switchboard, etc.). To determine the Linergy LGY busbars or Linergy LGYE required, see the tables on see pages D-21, D-23, D-24. They can be used to determine: b the type of Linergy LGY busbars or Linergy LGYE, as a function of: v the current v the IP value v the ambient temperature around the switchboard v ICW/1s. b Linergy LGY busbars: I y 1600 A. b Double Linergy LGY busbars: 1600 A < I y 3200 A b Linergy LGYE busbars: y 4000 A. To determine the required Linergy BS busbars, see the tables on see D-22 (horizontal busbars) and on see D-25 (vertical busbars) They can be used to determine: b the permissible current as a function of: v the size of the busbars v the number of bars v the ambient temperature around the switchboard v the IP value v ICW/1s. b flat copper busbars 5 mm thick: I y 1600 A. b flat copper busbars 10 mm thick: I y 3200 A.

Busbars
DD381459.eps DD381460.eps

Connection of devices u 630 and busbar connections

b To determine the size of upstream and downstream connections for devices, see the tables starting on page D-30 They can be used to determine: b the size of copper busbars b the maximum permissible current. As a function of: b the type of circuit breaker b the IP value b the ambient temperature around the switchboard b the type of installation.

400E42000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-19

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Presentation and approach


To determine the required size of the PE conductor, see page D-48. Two possibilities: b either the equation indicated by standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 to obtain an optimised value: SPE = k
I t
2

Designing Prisma P power circuits

PE and PEN conductors

Example v Isc = 36 kA rms C the value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phase-to-phase fault current (standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 8.4.3.2.3 and 10.11.5.6), i.e.: 36 x 0.6 = 21.6 kA v maximum time delay for the control unit: 0.5 s v k = 143 for copper conductors with PVC insulation. The calculation is therefore: SPE =
2 21600 x 0,5 = 106,8 mm 143 2

The PE conductor must therefore be a 25 x 5 mm bar (= 125 mm).

b or the Schneider Electric table based on the standard. To determine the required size of the PEN conductor, see page D-49.

D-20

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E42000

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing horizontal busbars


Linergy LGYE

Up to 4000 A
Linergy LGYE Profil
Type of bars Permissible current (A)

Permissible current and selection of Linergy LGYE busbars

Size per phase Linergy LGYE 630 Linergy LGYE 800 Linergy LGYE 1000 Linergy LGYE 1250 Linergy LGYE 1600 Linergy LGYE 2000 Linergy LGYE 2500 Linergy LGYE 3200 Linergy LGYE 4000

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 680 580 650 550 630 860 1080 1350 1730 2200 2640 3400 3800 740 920 1150 1580 1810 2230 3020 3510 830 1040 1300 1690 2100 2540 3300 3710 710 884 1100 1530 1730 2160 2900 3430 800 1000 1250 1650 2000 2440 3200 3620

IP > 31 530 680 850 1050 1480 1650 2100 2800 3350

40 C IP y 31 590 750 940 1170 1550 1900 2310 3040 3450

IP > 31 500 630 790 1000 1380 1560 2000 2660 3180

45 C IP y 31 550 700 880 1100 1450 1810 2240 2890 3280

IP > 31 470 600 750 930 1300 1480 1930 2520 3020

50 C IP y 31 520 660 830 1020 1350 1720 2120 2750 3120

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

100E42010

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-21

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing horizontal busbars


Linergy BS

Permissible current and selection of horizontal busbars


The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.

Up to 1600 A
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 710 910 1260 1610 50 C IP y 31 660 860 1180 1510 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 700 870 1180 1510

IP > 31 650 810 1090 1390

IP > 31 b b b b

Up to 3200 A
Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1060 1240 1600 1810 2030 2500 2950 50 C IP y 31 990 1160 1500 1690 1900 2330 2750 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2 Linergy BS bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1010 1160 1500 1740 1870 2330 2720

IP > 31 940 1070 1390 1610 1720 2160 2510

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

Example Two 50 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2160 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 30 C around the switchboard. Where possible, use of 10 mm bars is worthwhile in terms of the In/Isc: b gain in time during switchboard mounting given, where applicable, the lesser number of bars installed b for short-circuits, the rigidity of the bars means fewer busbar supports. Recommendation Use 5 mm bars for In y 1600 A and low Icw values (40 kA rms). Use 10 mm bars for In > 1600 A and medium to high Icw values (> 40 kA rms).

Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-22

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42010

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing Linergy LGY busbars

Permissible current and selection of Linergy LGY busbars


The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.

Lateral Linergy LGY busbars


Linergy LGY bar
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 590 760 950 1170 1480 1820 2260 2920 50 C IP y 31 550 720 900 1100 1390 1720 2120 2780 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Linergy LGY 630 750 680 710 630 680 590 630 Linergy LGY 800 920 840 880 800 840 760 800 Linergy LGY 1000 1140 1040 1090 990 1040 950 990 Linergy LGY 1250 1410 1290 1350 1230 1290 1170 1230 Linergy LGY 1600 1800 1650 1720 1580 1650 1480 1580 Linergy LGY 2000 (2 x 1000) 2200 2000 2100 1900 2000 1820 1900 Linergy LGY 2500 (2 x 1250) 2740 2500 2620 2380 2500 2260 2380 Linergy LGY 3200 (2 x 1600) 3480 3200 3340 3060 3200 2920 3060 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 550 720 900 1100 1390 1720 2120 2780

IP > 31 530 680 850 1050 1320 1620 2020 2640

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b

Example A Linergy LGY channelled bar can be used for a 1650 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature around the switchboard of 35 C.

Rear Linergy LGY busbars


Linergy LGY bar
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 590 760 950 1170 1480 50 C IP y 31 550 720 900 1100 1390 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Linergy LGY 630 750 680 710 630 680 590 630 Linergy LGY 800 920 840 880 800 840 760 800 Linergy LGY 1000 1140 1040 1090 990 1040 950 990 Linergy LGY 1250 1410 1290 1350 1230 1290 1170 1230 Linergy LGY 1600 1800 1650 1720 1580 1650 1480 1580 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.
DD381233.eps DD381234.eps

IP > 31 550 720 900 1100 1390

IP > 31 530 680 850 1050 1320

IP > 31 b b b b b

DD381235.eps

630 A bar. Cat. no. 04502.


DD381237.eps

800 A bar. Cat. no. 04503.

1000 A bar. Cat. no. 04504.

DD381236.eps

1250 A bar. Cat. no. 04505.

1600 A bar. Cat. no. 04506.

Note: The values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42010

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-23

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing vertical flat busbars


Linergy LGYE

Permissible current and selection of Linergy LGYE busbars

Up to 4000 A
Linergy LGYE Profil
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 680 580 650 550 630 860 1080 1350 1730 2200 2640 3400 3800 740 920 1150 1580 1810 2230 3020 3510 830 1040 1300 1690 2100 2540 3300 3710 710 884 1100 1530 1730 2160 2900 3430 800 1000 1250 1650 2000 2440 3200 3620 40 C IP y 31 590 750 940 1170 1550 1900 2310 3040 3450 45 C IP y 31 550 700 880 1100 1450 1810 2240 2890 3280 50 C IP y 31 520 660 830 1020 1350 1720 2120 2750 3120

Size per phase Linergy LGYE 630 Linergy LGYE 800 Linergy LGYE 1000 Linergy LGYE 1250 Linergy LGYE 1600 Linergy LGYE 2000 Linergy LGYE 2500 Linergy LGYE 3200 Linergy LGYELGYE 4000

IP > 31 530 680 850 1050 1480 1650 2100 2800 3350

IP > 31 500 630 790 1000 1380 1560 2000 2660 3180

IP > 31 470 600 750 930 1300 1480 1930 2520 3020

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

D-24

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42030

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing vertical flat busbars


Linergy BS

Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars

The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.

Up to 1600 A
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 710 910 1260 1610 50 C IP y 31 660 860 1180 1510 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 890 840 850 790 800 750 760 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1130 1050 1080 990 1000 900 970 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1580 1420 1500 1350 1400 1250 1350 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 2010 1820 1920 1720 1800 1600 1720 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 700 870 1180 1510

IP > 31 650 810 1090 1390

IP > 31 b b b b

Up to 3200 A
Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1060 1240 1600 1900 1810 2030 2500 2840 2950 50 C IP y 31 990 1160 1500 1780 1690 1900 2330 2650 2750 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1330 1220 1260 1160 1200 1080 1130 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1550 1400 1470 1320 1400 1250 1320 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1990 1800 1890 1700 1800 1600 1700 1 Linergy BS bar, 100 x 10 mm 2370 2150 2260 2030 2150 1900 2030 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 2270 2090 2160 1980 2050 1850 1930 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2550 2270 2420 2140 2300 2000 2170 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 3110 2820 2970 2660 2820 2500 2660 2 x 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 3540 3200 3370 3020 3200 2820 3020 2 Linergy BS bars, 100 x 10 mm 3650 3280 3490 3100 3300 2900 3130 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1010 1160 1500 1780 1740 1870 2330 2650 2720

IP > 31 940 1070 1390 1650 1610 1720 2160 2450 2510

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b

Example Two 80 x 10 mm bars can be used for a 2820 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard. Two 80 x 10 mm bars installed separately in two busbar compartments can be used for a 3200 A current with an IP y 31 and an ambient temperature of 35C around the switchboard.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42030

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-25

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing vertical Linergy BS busbars


Lateral busbars
Permissible current and selection of vertical busbars

The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.

Up to 1600 A
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm IP y 31 890 1130 1580 2010 IP > 31 840 1050 1420 1820 30 C IP y 31 850 1080 1500 1920 IP > 31 790 990 1350 1720 35 C IP y 31 800 1000 1400 1800 IP > 31 750 900 1250 1600 40 C IP y 31 760 970 1350 1720 IP > 31 700 870 1180 1510 45 C IP y 31 710 910 1260 1610 IP > 31 650 810 1090 1390 50 C IP y 31 660 860 1180 1510 IP > 31 b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Up to 3200 A
Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C Size per phase 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm IP y 31 1330 1550 1990 2270 2550 3110 IP > 31 1220 1400 1800 2090 2270 2820 30 C IP y 31 1260 1470 1890 2160 2420 2970 IP > 31 1160 1320 1700 1980 2140 2660 35 C IP y 31 1200 1400 1800 2050 2300 2820 IP > 31 1080 1250 1600 1850 2000 2500 40 C IP y 31 1130 1320 1700 1930 2170 2660 IP > 31 1010 1160 1500 1740 1870 2330 45 C IP y 31 1060 1240 1600 1810 2030 2500 IP > 31 940 1070 1390 1610 1720 2160 50 C IP y 31 990 1160 1500 1690 1900 2330 IP > 31 b b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-26

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42030

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600, vertically mounted

Designing connections u 630 A

Prefabricated connections for Linergy LGY busbars


DD383537.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or withdrawable, and Linergy LGY busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1550 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1500 800 1000 1250 1550 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1500 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1450 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1400

NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS1250 NS1600

3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04485 4P Cat. no. 04486 3P Cat. no. 04487 4P Cat. no. 04488

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1250 1450

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1400

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1350

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

NS630b

3P Cat. no. 04477 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS800 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS1250 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P Cat. no. 04478 NS1600 3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P Cat. no. 04492 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Example For a fixed Compact NS1600, 4P, where the ambient temperature around the switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31: the maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04488) is 1450 A. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards. 100E42040 Version : 3.0 16/04/2013 D-27

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16, vertically mounted

Designing connections u 630 A

Prefabricated connections for Linergy LGY busbars


Dd383666.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or drawout, and Linergy LGY busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1570 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1520 800 1000 1250 1570 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1520 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1470 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1420

NT06 NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16

3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04475 4P Cat. no. 04476 3P Cat. no. 04489 4P Cat. no. 04490

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1250 1470

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1420

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1370

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

NT06

3P Cat. no. 04477 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT08 3P Cat. no. 04477 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT10 3P Cat. no. 04477 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT12 3P Cat. no. 04477 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P Cat. no. 04478 NT16 3P Cat. no. 04491 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P Cat. no. 04492 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Example For a drawout Masterpact NT16 , 4P, where the ambient temperature around the switchboard is 35C and the IP > 31: the maximum permissible current for the prefabricated connection (04492) is 1380 A.
Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-28

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600, horizontally mounted, fixed

Designing connections u 630 A

Prefabricated connections for Linergy LGY busbars


Dd383538.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and Linergy LGY busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000

NS630b

3P Cat. no. 04473 4P Cat. no. 04474 NS800 3P Cat. no. 04473 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P Cat. no. 04474 NS1000 3P Cat. no. 04473 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P Cat. no. 04474 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630 800 1000

IP > 31 b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-29

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Fixed, top or bottom connection

Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Front or rear connection


Dd383667.eps

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Masterpact NW08/NW40, front or rear connection, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470 Ambient temperature around the switchboard (1) 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 (1) In the case of a door mounted at the rear of cubicle, add 10 C. b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1420

IP > 31 b b b b

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 40 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1570 45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470

NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1420

IP > 31 b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-30

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Fixed, top or bottom connection

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Front or rear connection
Dd383668.eps

Connection. Horizontal link.

Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 NW20 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 NW32 Size per phase 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1520 2b 80 x 10 2000 2b 80 x 10 2500 3b 80 x 10 2910

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1420 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2300 3b 80 x 10 2630

50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1470 2b 80 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2460 3b 80 x 10 2820

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080

Permissible current (A)

NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16 NW20 NW25 NW32

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1520 2b 60 x 10 2000 2b 80 x 10 2460 2b 100 x10 2820

40 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1570 2b 60 x 10 2000 2b 80 x 10 2500 2b 100 x10 3000

IP > 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1470 2b 60 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2380 2b 100 x10 2730

45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1520 2b 60 x 10 2000 2b 80 x 10 2500 2b 100 x10 2910

IP > 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1420 2b 60 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2300 2b 100 x10 2630

50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 10 800 1b 60 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1470 2b 60 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2460 2b 100 x10 2820

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-31

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Drawout, top or bottom connection

Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Front or rear connection


Dd383669.eps

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, drawout Masterpact NW08/NW40, front or rear connection, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard (1) 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 (1) In the case of a door mounted at the rear of cubicle, add 10 C.

Device

Permissible current (A)

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380

40 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1430

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330

45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1160 2b 80 x 5 1280

50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330

IP > 31 b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Device

Permissible current (A)

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330

45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380

IP > 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1160 2b 80 x 5 1280

50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 5 800 1b 80 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330

IP > 31 b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-32

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Drawout, top or bottom connection

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW32 Front or rear connection
Dd383670.eps

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820

Permissible current (A)

NW08 NW10 NW12 NW16 NW20 NW25 NW32

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1180 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2140 3b 80 x 10 2530

40 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1210 1b 80 x 10 1430 2b 80 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2280 3b 80 x 10 2730

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1140 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b 80 x 10 2070 3b 80 x 10 2450

45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1180 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2210 3b 80 x 10 2630

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1100 1b 80 x 10 1280 2b 80 x 10 1760 2b 80 x 10 2000 3b 80 x 10 2370

50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 800 1b 80 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1140 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b 80 x 10 2140 3b 80 x 10 2530

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 1180 1100 1140 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 1380 1280 1330 NW20 Size per phase 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 1900 1760 1830 NW25 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 2210 2000 2140 NW32 Size per phase 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 2b 100 x10 I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 2630 2370 2530 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

Device

Permissible current (A)

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-33

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16
Dd383671.eps

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1520 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1470 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1420 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 Size per phase 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NT16 (1) I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1470

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1420

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1200 4b 50 x 5 1370

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 630 630 630 630 630 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 800 800 800 800 800 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 40 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1420

NT06 NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1420

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1370

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-34

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 (1) Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1470

40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1520

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1420

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1470

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1180 2b 50 x 10 1370

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1230 2b 50 x 10 1420

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1430 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1210 2b 50 x 10 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1160 2b 50 x 10 1330

NT06 NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1210 2b 50 x 10 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1160 2b 50 x 10 1330

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 960 1b 50 x 10 1110 2b 50 x 10 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-35

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Drawout

Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16


Dd383672.eps

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1430 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1230 4b 50 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1180 4b 50 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NT16 (1) I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1230 4b 50 x 5 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1180 4b 50 x 5 1330

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 3b 50 x 5 1130 4b 50 x 5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1180 2b 80 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NT16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1180 2b 80 x 5 1330

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 2b 60 x 5 1130 2b 80 x 5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-36

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 (1) Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1210 2b 50 x 10 1380

40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1430

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1160 2b 50 x 10 1330

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1210 2b 50 x 10 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 960 1b 50 x 10 1110 2b 50 x 10 1280

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1160 2b 50 x 10 1330

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1250 1b 80 x 10 1430 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1210 1b 80 x 10 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1160 1b 80 x 10 1330

NT06 NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1210 1b 80 x 10 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1160 1b 80 x 10 1330

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 960 1b 60 x 10 1110 1b 80 x 10 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-37

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS1600b/3200 Fixed, top or bottom connection

Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200 Front or rear connection


Dd383539.eps

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Compact NS1600b/3200, front or rear connection, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 3b 80 x 10 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 40 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1430 2b 80 x 10 1950 2b 80 x 10 2280 3b 80 x 10 2630 45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2210 3b 80 x 10 2530 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b 80 x 10 2140 3b 80 x 10 2430

NS1600b Size per phase I (A) NS2000 Size per phase I (A) NS2500 Size per phase I (A) NS3200 Size per phase I (A)

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2140 3b 80 x 10 2430

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b 80 x 10 2070 3b 80 x 10 2350

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 1280 2b 80 x 10 1760 2b 80 x 10 2000 3b 80 x 10 2270

IP > 31 b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS1600b Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 NS2000 Size per phase 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 2b 60 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 NS2500 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 NS3200 Size per phase 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Device

Permissible current (A)

45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 60 x 10 1900 2b 80 x 10 2210 2b100 x 10 2530

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 1280 2b 60 x 10 1760 2b 80 x 10 2000 2b100 x 10 2270

50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 60 x 10 1830 2b 80 x 10 2140 2b100 x 10 2430

IP > 31 b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-38

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Fixed

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600
Dd383544.eps

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1500 45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1200 4b 50 x 5 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NS1600 (1) Size per phase I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1250 4b 50 x 5 1450

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1200 4b 50 x 5 1400

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 970 3b 50 x 5 1150 4b 50 x 5 1350

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1400

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 970 2b 60 x 5 1150 2b 80 x 5 1350

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-39

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 (1) I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1450

40 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1250 2b 50 x 10 1500

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1180 2b 50 x 10 1400

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1230 2b 50 x 10 1450

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 970 1b 50 x 10 1130 2b 50 x 10 1350

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1180 2b 50 x 10 1400

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1230 1b 80 x 10 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1180 1b 80 x 10 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1180 NS1600 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 970 1b 60 x 10 1130 1b 80 x 10 1350

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-40

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Withdrawable

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Withdrawable Compact NS630btoNS1600
DD383806.eps

1 2

Connection. Horizontal link.

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1230 4b 50 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1180 4b 50 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 1b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 3b 50 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 4b 50 x 5 NS1600 (1) Size per phase I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 (1) Make the neutral connection with two bars, 50 x 5 mm. b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 3b 50 x 5 1180 4b 50 x 5 1330

IP > 31 1b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 3b 50 x 5 1130 4b 50 x 5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1180 2b 80 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 1b 60 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 1b 80 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 60 x 5 1180 2b 80 x 5 1330

IP > 31 1b 60 x 5 630 1b 80 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 2b 60 x 5 1130 2b 80 x 5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-41

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Withdrawable Compact NS630btoNS1600

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 2b 50 x 10 (1) I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 (1) Make the neutral connection with one bar, 50 x 10 mm. b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1210 2b 50 x 10 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 960 1b 50 x 10 1110 2b 50 x 10 1280

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 50 x 10 1160 2b 50 x 10 1330

IP > 31 b b b b b

Horizontal link
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1210 1b 80 x 10 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 60 x 10 1160 1b 80 x 10 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 1b 60 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 NS1600 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 970 1b 60 x 10 1110 1b 80 x 10 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-42

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42040

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1000 Horizontal, fixed

Designing connections u 630 A between a device and busbars


Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1000 Horizontal
Dd383538.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Flat bars, 5 mm thick


Device Permissible current (A)
40 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 45 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 50 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

IP > 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000

IP > 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000

IP > 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000

IP > 31 b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Flat bars, 10 mm thick


Device Permissible current (A)
45 C 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 50 C 1b 50 x 10 b 630 1b 50 x 10 b 800 1b 50 x 10 b 1000 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42040

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-43

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Flexible copper bars with an insulating sheath

Designing connections y 630 A


Device connections

Switchboards that comply with standard IEC 60439-1/2

It is imperative to use the values indicated below that have been validated for the installation of devices in Prisma P switchboards. The parameters determining the size of flexible bars are: b the environment in which the devices are installed: v position in the enclosure v dimensions of other conductors in the circuit v ambient temperature around the switchboard b the characteristics of the connected devices: v device heat losses v the type of installation (horizontal or vertical) v the type of device (fixed or withdrawable). Only the equipment manufacturer with in-depth knowledge on: bb the characteristics of the installed devices bb the configuration of the installation in the enclosure can provide the correct sizes of flexible bars for a given permissible current. Insulated, flexible bars make for easy, fast and flexible implementation up to 630 A, but higher ratings require sizes that cancel these advantages. For high Isc values, it is advised to use rigid bars which require fewer supports.

Insulated flexible bars are better than cables, they offer:

bb better insulation temperature withstand (125 C for bars, 105 C for cables) and a larger exchange surface for an equivalent size, i.e. a smaller size for a given current bb greater rigidity offering better electrodynamic characteristics for short-circuit currents bb no intermediate parts (lugs) for a direct connection between the device and the busbars therefore less temperature rise and less risk of error bb fast implementation of prefabricated connections already cut to length, formed and drilled. Technical characteristics bb thickness of the insulation: variable depending on the bar size, 2 mm on average bb rated insulation level Ui = 1000 V bb impulse withstand voltage Uimp = 12 kV bb maximum withstand temperature of insulating material = 125 C.

Connection

In all cubicles with IP y 55 bb the switchboard internal temperature is 60 C bb the withstand temperature of the insulating material is 125 C. If the withstand temperature of the insulation is only 105 C, use the next largest flexible bar. The bar sizes indicated below take into account the derating curves of devices.

Connection of devices and distribution blocks to busbars


Device S (mm) Device S (mm) INS125 INS160 INS250 INS320 INS400 32 x 5 INF250 ISFT250 24 x 5 INS500 INS630 32 x 6 INF400 ISFT400 32 x 5 NSX100 (1) NSX160 (1) 20 x 2 INF630 ISFT630 32 x 8 20 x 3

20 x 2 20 x 2 20 x 3 NSX250 (1) NSX400 (1) NSX630 20 x 3 32 x 5 32 x 8

(1) The values for circuit breakers apply to contactors with the same ratings.

To connect a Compact NSX250 to Powerclip busbars, use a 24 x 5 mm flexible bar (04746).


Device S (mm) Linergy FM distribution block (200 A) 20 x 3 Linergy FC distribution block (3P) 32 x 6 Linergy FC distribution block (4P) 32 x 5

Disconnectors, Linergy TB, connections, busbars to busbars


I max. (60 C) S (mm) 200 A 20 x 2 250 A 20 x 3 400 A 24 x 5 400 A 24 x 5 480 A 24 x 6 520 A 32 x 5 580 A 32 x 6 660 A 32 x 8

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-44

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E42060

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NSX100 to NSX630
Insulated flexible copper bars
Devices

Designing connections y 630 A


Compact circuit breakers NSX100 to NSX630

Permissible current (A)


Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 244 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 245 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 390 32 x 5 390 32 x 6 615 32 x 8 550 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 231 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 230 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 390 32 x 5 390 32 x 6 585 32 x 8 520 35 C 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 238 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 237 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 380 32 x 5 380 32 x 6 600 32 x 8 535 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 225 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 225 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 380 32 x 5 380 32 x 6 570 32 x 8 505 40 C 20 x 2 97.5 20 x 2 122 20 x 3 156 20 x 3 231 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 230 32 x 5 390 32 x 5 370 32 x 5 370 32 x 6 585 32 x 8 520 20 x 2 97.5 20 x 2 122 20 x 3 156 20 x 3 219 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 220 32 x 5 390 32 x 5 370 32 x 5 370 32 x 6 550 32 x 8 490 45 C 20 x 2 95 20 x 2 119 20 x 3 152 20 x 3 225 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 225 32 x 5 380 32 x 5 360 32 x 5 360 32 x 6 570 32 x 8 505 20 x 2 95 20 x 2 119 20 x 3 152 20 x 3 213 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 215 32 x 5 380 32 x 5 360 32 x 5 360 32 x 6 535 32 x 8 475 50 C 20 x 2 92.5 20 x 2 115 20 x 3 148 20 x 3 219 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 220 32 x 5 370 32 x 5 350 32 x 5 350 32 x 6 550 32 x 8 490 20 x 2 92.5 20 x 2 115 20 x 3 148 20 x 3 207 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 210 32 x 5 370 32 x 5 350 32 x 5 350 32 x 6 520 32 x 8 420

IP y 31
NSX100 TMD-TMG NSX125 TMD-TMG NSX160 (1) TMD-TMG NSX250 (1) TMD-TMG NSX100 STR NSX160 STR NSX250 (2) STR NSX400N/H/L fixed NSX400N/H/L with Vigi NSX400N/H/L withdrawable NSX630N/H/L fixed NSX630N/H/L Vigi or withdrawable Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Size per phase Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Size per phase Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) Inc (A) 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 250 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 250 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 6 630 32 x 8 570 20 x 2 100 20 x 2 125 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 238 20 x 2 100 20 x 3 160 20 x 3 237 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 5 400 32 x 6 600 32 x 8 535

IP > 31
NSX100 TMD-TMG NSX125 TMD-TMG NSX160 (1) TMD-TMG NSX250 (1) TMD-TMG NSX100 STR NSX160 STR NSX250 (2) STR NSX400 fixed NSX400 with Vigi

Size per phase Size per phase

NSX400 withdrawable Size per phase NSX630b fixed NSX630 Vigi or withdrawable Inc (A) Size per phase Size per phase Inc (A) Inc (A)

(1) For a withdrawable Compact NSX160 or NSX250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulationmonitoring module, multiply the In values by 0.9. (2) For a withdrawable Compact NSX250 equipped with a Vigi or an insulation-monitoring module, multiply the In values by 0.86.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

400E42060

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-45

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing connections with cables

Cables

Practical guidelines

This section doesnt concern customers loads connection (see IEC 61439-1, IEC 60364). Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the circuit breaker. The size of cables must be selected according to: b the level of current b the ambient temperature around the conductors b the degree of protection for the switchboard. The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device (permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.). They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with cover panels rated IP y 55. b switchboard internal temperature 60 C b connections using copper cables. The withstand temperature of insulating material of cable = 105C Size of cables (mm)
1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95

Connection between busbars or distribution blocks and circuit breakers

Permissible current (A) Cables tied individually IP y 31 IP > 31


16 25 32 40 63 90 110 135 180 230 275 14 25 29 39 55 77 100 125 150 190 230

Cable tied together IP y 31 IP > 31


14 22 28 36 55 80 100 125 12 20 24 33 50 70 93 120

Connection between busbars or distribution blocks and other devices

Size of cables (mm)


1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95

Permissible current (A) Cables tied individually IP y 31 IP > 31


13 23 28 36 55 80 100 120 165 210 250 12 21 26 35 50 70 90 115 135 176 210

Cable tied together IP y 31 IP > 31


12 20 25 32 50 72 90 110 10 19 22 30 46 63 84 103

Connection between busbars and Compact NSX100 to 630 A

Device

NSX100

NSX160

NSX250

Size (mm) 25 50 95 Note: Schneider Electric recommends connecting Compact NSX400/630 circuit breakers with insulated flexible bars or rigid bars, see page D-44.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-46

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E42070

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing connections with cables


Tubular lugs

Tubular lugs for incoming connection blocks

Maximum size of lugs for connection to the different incoming connection blocks.
Standard Cu lugs Incoming connection block for Compact NSX-INS250 supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04066 and 04067 In-duct incoming connection block for Compact NSX630, cat. no. 04076 150 mm 240 mm Narrow Cu lugs 240 mm 300 mm Narrow bimetal lugs 185 mm 300 mm

DD382788.eps

Narrow bimetal lugs


Cat. no. selection
Cat. no. Cable size (mm) 150 150 185 185 240 240 300 300 Quantity

Lugs for aluminium cable(1)


29504 29505 29506 29507 32504 32505 32506 32507 (1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.

3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4

Customer connection of devices u 630 A

Maximum size and number of cables for connection to terminal extension bars (according to busbar drawing supplied) for customer connection of Compact NSX and Masterpact NT/NW devices.
Cable size (mm) Quantity

Size and number of cables


Copper lugs Bimetal lugs 300 240 12 12

400E42070

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-47

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Size of PE protective conductor
DD381471.eps

Designing the PE protective conductor


Power circuit
Practical guidelines
The conductor must be sufficiently sized and securely installed in the switchboard to accept the thermal and electrodynamic stresses of the fault current. It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard. It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site. Use the calculation equation indicated in standard IEC 61439-1 and 2 8.4.3.2.3 and 10.11.5.6. 2 S = lt
PE k

Optimised calculation method

bb SPE : cross-sectional area of PE in mm bb I : value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phasetophase fault current (IEC 61439-1 8.4.2.3 and 10.11.5.6) bb t : time the fault current flows in seconds bb k : coefficient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor with PVC insulation.

Simplified method (based on the equation above)

Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of the device Isc.
Size of PE conductor Isc y 40 kA Isc y 65 kA Isc > 65 kA All Schneider Electric devices 1 Linergy BS bar, 25 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 800

Schneider Electric prefabricated solution

For all Schneider Electric devices for an Isc up to 85 kA: see page B-82 .

D-48

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42080

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Size of PEN protective conductor

Designing the PEN conductor


Power circuit

The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.: bb for copper single-phase circuits or sized y 16mm, it must be the same size as the phase conductors bb for copper three-phase circuits sized > 16 mm, it can be: v the same size as the phase conductors v smaller on the condition that: - the current likely to flow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the permissible current for the conductor - the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10 % of the total rating. The conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.

Practical guidelines

Implementing the PEN protective conductor

Practical guidelines

According to standard IEC 61439-1 and 2, the practical guidelines for implementing the PEN are the following: bb at the entry to the assembly, the PEN connection must be next to the phase connections bb within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fire or explosion) bb the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral bb the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars bb the change from a TNC to a TNS system must take place at a single point in the switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop bb after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system. The PE and the neutral must meet their specific requirements.

DD384616.eps

Linergy LGY PEN kit


see page B-83.

100E42080

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-49

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600, vertically mounted

Designing customer connections

Prefabricated connections for Compact NS630b to NS1600 - Top or bottom front connection
DD383540.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Compact NS630b/NS1600, fixed or withdrawable, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1550 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1500 800 1000 1250 1550 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1500 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1450 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1400

NS630b 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NS800 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NS1000 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NS1600 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1250 1450

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1400

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1350

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Withdrawable
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

NS630b 3P cat. no.33642 4P cat. no.33643 NS800 3P cat. no.33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P cat. no.33643 NS1000 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P cat. no.33643 NS1250 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NS1600 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-50

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics
Masterpact NT06 to NT16, vertically mounted

Designing customer connections

Prefabricated connections for Masterpact NT06 to NT16 - Top or bottom front connection
Dd383673.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a vertical Masterpact NT06/NT16, fixed or drawout, and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Fixed
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1570 800 1000 1250 1600 800 1000 1250 1520 800 1000 1250 1570 40 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1520 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1470 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1420

NT06 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NT08 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NT10 3P cat. no.33642 4P cat. no.33643 NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NT16 3P 33642 + 33644 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1250 1470

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1420

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1370

IP > 31 b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Drawout
Prefabricated connections
Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40 C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1250 1380 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

NT06 3P cat. no. 33642 4P cat. no. 33643 NT08 3P cat. no. 33642 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P cat. no. 33643 NT10 3P cat. no.33642 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P cat. no.33643 NT12 3P cat. no.33642 + 33644 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 NT16 3P 33642 + 33644 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 4P cat. no.33643 + 33645 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1200 1330

IP > 31 630 800 1000 1150 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-51

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1000, horizontally mounted, fixed

Designing customer connections

Connection transfer assembly for horizontal fixed Compact NS630b to NS1000


Dd383541.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the permissible current for a prefabricated connection between a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1000 and Linergy busbars depending on the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value.

Connection transfer assemblies


Device and Cat. no. Permissible current (A)
Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 630 630 630 630 630 40C IP y 31 630 45 C IP y 31 630 800 1000 50 C IP y 31 630 800 1000

NS630b

3P cat. no. 04483 4P cat. no. 04484 NS800 3P cat. no. 04483 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 4P cat. no. 04484 NS1000 3P cat. no. 04483 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4P cat. no. 04484 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630

IP > 31 630 800 1000

IP > 31 b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-52

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Fixed, top or bottom connection

Designing customer connections

Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Front or rear connection


Dd383674.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for a vertical, fixed NW08/NW40, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1520 50 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1470

IP > 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1250 2b 80 x 5 1420

IP > 31 b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-53

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Fixed, top or bottom connection

Designing customer connections

Fixed Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Front or rear connection


Dd383675.eps

Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x 10 800 1b 60x 10 1000 1b 60x 10 1250 1b 80x 10 1520 2b 80x 10 2000 2b100x10 2500 2b120x10 2910 3b120x10 3340 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x 10 800 1b 60x 10 1000 1b 60x 10 1250 1b 80x 10 1470 2b 80x 10 1950 2b100x10 2460 2b120x10 2820 3b120x10 3120 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 1b 60x 10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 1b 80x 10 I (A) 1600 1600 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 NW20 Size per phase 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 2b 80x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 1950 NW25 Size per phase 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 I (A) 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2460 2500 2380 NW32 Size per phase 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 I (A) 3200 3000 3170 2910 3080 2820 3000 2730 NW40 Size per phase 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3680 3680 3600 3600 3520 3520 3440 3440 I (A) (1) b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. (1) For NW40 IP >31, performances realized with forced ventilation.

IP > 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1250 1b 80x 10 1420 2b 80x 10 1900 2b100x10 2300 2b120x10 2630 3b120x10 3340

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b

Canalis connection

For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NW08 1 NW10 1 NW12 1 NW16 0.98 NW20 0.98 NW25 0.97 NW32 0.97

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-54

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Drawout, top or bottom connection

Designing customer connections

Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Front or rear connection


Dd383676.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for a vertical, drawout NW08/NW40, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1230 2b 80 x 5 1380 50 C IP y 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NW08 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 2b 60 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NW16 Size per phase 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 2b 80 x 5 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1200 2b 80 x 5 1330

IP > 31 2b 60 x 5 800 2b 60 x 5 1000 2b 80 x 5 1160 2b 80 x 5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-55

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Drawout, top or bottom connection

Designing customer connections

Drawout Masterpact NW08 to NW40 Front or rear connection


Dd383677.eps

Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1180 1b 80x10 1380 2b 80x10 1900 2b100x10 2210 2b120x10 2630 3b120x10 3340 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1140 1b 80x10 1330 2b 80x10 1830 2b100x10 2140 2b120x10 2530 3b120x10 3120 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NW08 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NW10 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NW12 Size per phase 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 1b 60x10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1180 1210 1140 NW16 Size per phase 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 NW20 Size per phase 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 2b 80x10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 NW25 Size per phase 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 2b100x10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 NW32 Size per phase 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 2b120x10 I (A) 2960 2730 2890 2630 2820 2530 2730 2450 NW40 Size per phase 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3b120x10 3680 3680 3600 3600 3520 3520 3440 3440 I (A) (1) b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard. (1) For NW40 IP >31, performances realized with forced ventilation.

IP > 31 1b 60x10 800 1b 60x10 1000 1b 60x10 1100 1b 80x10 1280 2b 80x10 1760 2b100x10 2000 2b120x10 2370 3b120x10 3340

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b

Canalis connection

For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NW08 1 NW10 1 NW12 1 NW16 0.98 NW20 0.98 NW25 0.97 NW32 0.97

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-56

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Fixed

Designing customer connections

Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Rear connection


DD383678

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a customer connection for a vertical, fixed Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat busbars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1470 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1420 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 2b 50x5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1420

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50x5 1000 2b 80x5 1200 2b 100x5 1370

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-57

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)

Designing customer connections

Fixed Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Rear connection

Size per phase I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 phase I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 phase I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 phase I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NT16 Size per 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 phase I (A) 1600 1570 1600 1520 1570 1470 1520 1420 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

NT06

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C 45 C 50 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 b 1000 1b 80x10 1000 1b 80x10 1000 1b 80x10

1250 1180 1230 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 b 1470 1370 1420

Canalis connection

For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NT06b 1 NT08 1 NT10 1 NT12 1 NT16 0.98

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-58

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Drawout

Designing customer connections

Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Rear connection


Dd383679.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a vertical, drawout Masterpact NT06/NT16, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1230 2b 100x5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NT06 Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NT08 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NT10 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NT12 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NT16 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 2b 80x5 1130 2b 100x5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-59

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)

Designing customer connections

Drawout Masterpact NT06 to NT16 Rear connection

NT06 NT08 NT10 NT12 NT16

Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase I (A) Size per phase

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1210 1b100x10

40C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1250 1b100x10

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1160 1b100x10

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1210 1b100x10 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 960 1b 80 x 10 1110 1b100x10 1280

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1160 1b100x10 1330

IP > 31 b b b b b

I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Canalis connection

For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NT06 1 NT08 1 NT10 1 NT12 1 NT16 0.98

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-60

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS1600b/3200 Fixed, top or bottom connection

Designing customer connections

Fixed Compact NS1600b to NS3200 Front or rear connection


Dd383542.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a front or rear customer connection for a vertical, fixed Compact NS1600b/3200, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1380 2b 80 x 10 1900 2b100 x 10 2210 2b120 x 10 2530 50 C IP y 31 1b 80 x 10 1330 2b 80 x 10 1830 2b100 x 10 2140 2b120 x 10 2430 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS1600b Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1560 1480 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 NS2000 Size per phase 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 2b 80 x 10 I (A) 2000 2000 2000 1950 2000 1900 1950 1830 NS2500 Size per phase 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 2b100 x 10 I (A) 2470 2280 2410 2210 2350 2140 2280 2070 NS3200 Size per phase 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 2b120 x 10 I (A) 2860 2630 2790 2530 2720 2430 2630 2350 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 80 x 10 1280 2b 80 x 10 1760 2b100 x 10 2000 2b120 x 10 2270

IP>31 b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-61

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Fixed

Designing customer connections

Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 Rear connection


Dd383543.eps

Determining the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a customer connection for a vertical, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1250 2b 100x5 1450 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1200 2b 100x5 1400 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1200 2b 100x5 1400

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 970 2b 80x5 1150 2b 100x5 1350

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-62

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)

Designing customer connections

Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 Rear connection

NS630b Size per phase I (A) NS800 Size per phase I (A) NS1000 Size per phase I (A) NS1250 Size per phase I (A) NS1600 Size per phase

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 630 630 630 630 630 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 800 800 800 800 800 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1b 80x10 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80x10 1250 1b100x10

40C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80x10 1250 1b100x10

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80x10 1180 1b100x10

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80x10 1230 1b100x10 1450

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 970 1b 80x10 1130 1b100x10 1350

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80x10 1180 1b100x10 1400

IP > 31 b b b b b

I (A) 1600 1550 1600 1500 1550 1450 1500 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Canalis connection

For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NS630b 1 NS800 1 NS1000 1 NS1250 1 NS1600 0.98

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-63

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Withdrawable

Designing customer connections

Withdrawable Compact NS630b to NS1600, rear connection


DD383807.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making a rear customer connection for a vertical, withdrawable Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied. For connection cable cross-sections and quantities, see pages D-46 - D-47.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1230 2b 100x5 1380 50 C IP y 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 1b 60x5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 1b 80x5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 2b 80x5 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1230 1250 NS1600 Size per phase 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 2b 100x5 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 2b 80x5 1180 2b 100x5 1330

IP > 31 1b 60x5 630 1b 80x5 800 2b 50 x 5 960 2b 80x5 1130 2b 100x5 1280

IP > 31 b b b b b

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-64

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Customer connection
Flat bars, 10 mm thick
Devices Permissible current (A)

Designing customer connections

Withdrawable Compact NS630b to NS1600, rear connection

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 NS1250 Size per phase 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 1b 80 x 10 I (A) 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250 1210 1250 1160 NS1600 Size per phase 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 1b100x10 I (A) 1560 1430 1520 1430 1480 1380 1430 1330 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

45 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1210 1b100x10 1380

IP > 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 960 1b 80 x 10 1110 1b100x10 1280

50 C IP y 31 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 1b 80 x 10 1160 1b100x10 1330

IP > 31 b b b b b

Canalis connection

For Canalis connections, apply the appropriate derating coefficient K. Devices Derating coefficient K
NS630b 1 NS800 1 NS1000 1 NS1250 1 NS1600 0.98

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

100E42500

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

D-65

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Compact NS630b to NS1600 Horizontal, fixed

Designing customer connections

Fixed Compact NS630b to NS1600 Horizontal


Dd383545.eps

Using the data below, it is possible to determine the size of the copper bars and the maximum permissible currents when making the connections to busbars for a horizontal, fixed Compact NS630b/NS1600, taking into account the ambient temperature around the switchboard and the IP value. Connection to be made according to the busbar drawings supplied.

Customer connection
Flat bars, 5 mm thick
Device Permissible current (A)
40C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 45 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 50 C IP y 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 NS630b Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 2b 50 x 5 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

IP > 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000

IP > 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000

IP > 31 2b 50 x 5 630 2b 50 x 5 800 2b 50 x 5 1000

IP > 31 b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

Flat bars, 10 mm thick


Device Permissible current (A)
45 C 1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000 50 C 1b 50 x 10 b 630 1b 50 x 10 b 800 1b 50 x 10 b 1000 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40C NS630b Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 630 NS800 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 800 NS1000 Size per phase 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 1b 50 x 10 I (A) 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

1b 50 x 10 630 1b 50 x 10 800 1b 50 x 10 1000

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

D-66

Version : 3.0

15/04/2013

100E42500

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing busbars

Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars


Permissible current and selection of Linergy LGYE busbars

Horizontal Linergy LGYE busbars Fupact INF/ISFT/ISFL


Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 530 680 850 1050 1250 1520 1880 2500 2800 50 C IP y 31 460 640 800 980 1180 1420 1780 2360 2650 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Linergy LGYE 630 650 550 630 510 590 480 550 Linergy LGYE 800 840 720 800 700 760 660 720 Linergy LGYE 1000 1040 900 990 870 950 830 900 Linergy LGYE 1250 1290 1120 1230 1080 1170 1030 1100 Linergy LGYE 1600 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 1250 1320 Linergy LGYE 2000 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 1520 1620 Linergy LGYE 2500 2290 1890 2190 1840 2070 1770 1960 Linergy LGYE 3200 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 2500 2640 Linergy LGYE 4000 3320 3050 3240 2950 3140 2850 2970 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 460 610 770 970 1180 1420 1680 2360 2700

IP > 31 440 580 730 910 1110 1320 1590 2220 2540

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b

100E42035

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-67

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing busbars

Fupact INF, ISFT, ISFL Horizontal Linergy BS bars


Permissible current and selection of horizontal Linergy BS bars
The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.

Horizontal Linergy BS bars Fupact INF/ISFT/ISFL


Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)
45 C IP y 31 610 810 1070 1280 50 C IP y 31 560 750 980 1160 Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1000 910 970 860 910 810 860 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 600 750 980 1160

IP > 31 550 700 880 1030

IP > 31 b b b b

Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick


Type of bars

Permissible current (A)


45 C IP y 31 850 1070 1280 1420 1590 1970 2310 50 C IP y 31 760 980 1160 1270 1420 1770 2070

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1150 1000 1080 930 1000 850 930 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 1940 1690 1840 1560 1700 1420 1560 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2170 1900 2040 1750 1900 1590 1750 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 2670 2340 2500 2160 2340 1970 2160 2 Linergy BS bars, 100 x 10 mm 3120 2750 2930 2520 2750 2310 2520 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 760 980 1160 1270 1420 1770 2070

IP > 31 670 880 1030 1100 1240 1550 1820

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

Rear horizontal Linergy BS bars Fupact ISFT/ISFL


Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick
Device
25 C

Permissible current (A)


Ambient temperature around the switchboard 30 C 35 C 40 C IP > 31 510 980 1160 1160 1400 1630 45 C IP y 31 510 1070 1280 1280 1540 1800 IP > 31 450 880 1030 1030 1240 1440 50 C IP y 31 450 980 1160 1160 1400 1630 IP > 31 b b b b b b

Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 ISFT 160 1 Linergy BS bar, 730 680 680 630 630 570 570 50 x 10 mm ISFL 160 1 Linergy BS bar, 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 60 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 80 x 10 mm ISFL 250/400/630 1 Linergy BS bar, 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 80 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 2050 1800 1930 1680 1800 1540 1680 100 x 10 mm 1 Linergy BS bar, 2390 2100 2250 1950 2100 1800 1950 120 x 10 mm b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

D-68

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42035

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics

Designing busbars

Fupact INF, ISFT Vertical Linergy LGYE busbars


Permissible current and selection of Linergy LGYE busbars

Vertical Linergy LGYE busbars Fupact INF/ISFT


Type of bars Permissible current (A)

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 Linergy LGYE 630 650 550 630 510 590 480 550 Linergy LGYE 800 840 720 800 700 760 660 720 Linergy LGYE 1000 1040 900 990 870 950 830 900 Linergy LGYE 1250 1290 1120 1230 1080 1170 1030 1100 Linergy LGYE 1600 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 1250 1320 Linergy LGYE 2000 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 1520 1620 Linergy LGYE 2500 2290 1890 2190 1840 2070 1770 1960 Linergy LGYE 3200 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 2500 2640 Linergy LGYE 4000 3320 3050 3240 2950 3140 2850 2970 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 460 610 770 970 1180 1420 1680 2360 2700

45 C IP y 31 530 680 850 1050 1250 1520 1880 2500 2800

IP > 31 440 580 730 910 1110 1320 1590 2220 2540

50 C IP y 31 460 640 800 980 1180 1420 1780 2360 2650

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b b

Permissible current and selection of vertical Linergy LGY busbars

Lateral Linergy LGY busbars Fupact INF/ISFT


Linergy LGY bar
Type of bars Permissible current (A)

The goal is to optimise busbar size according to the installation and operating criteria.

Linergy LGY 630

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 680 590 630 550 590

IP > 31 530

40 C IP y 31 550

IP > 31 500 640 800 970 1180 1420 1780 2360

45 C IP y 31 530 680 850 1050 1250 1520 1900 2500

IP > 31 460 600 750 910 1110 1320 1660 2220

50 C IP y 31 460 640 800 980 1180 1420 1780 2360

IP > 31 b b b b b b b b

Linergy LGY 800 840 760 800 720 760 680 720 Linergy LGY 1000 1040 950 990 900 950 850 900 Linergy LGY 1250 1290 1170 1230 1100 1170 1030 1100 Linergy LGY 1600 1580 1390 1480 1320 1390 1250 1320 Linergy LGY 2000 (2 x 1000) 1900 1720 1820 1620 1720 1520 1620 Linergy LGY 2500 (2 x 1250) 2380 2120 2260 2020 2120 1900 2020 Linergy LGY 3200 (2 x 1600) 3060 2780 2920 2640 2780 2500 2640 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

100E42035

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-69

Additional information
Designing electrical characteristics Lateral Linergy BS busbars Fupact INF/ISFT
Linergy BS busbars, 5 mm thick
Type of bars Permissible current (A)

Designing busbars
Fupact INF, ISFT Vertical Linergy BS bars

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 5 mm 800 750 760 700 710 650 660 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 5 mm 1000 910 970 860 910 810 860 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 5 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1070 1160 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 5 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 1280 1400 b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

IP > 31 600 750 980 1160

45 C IP y 31 610 810 1070 1280

IP > 31 550 700 880 1030

50 C IP y 31 560 750 980 1160

IP > 31 b b b b

Linergy BS busbars, 10 mm thick


Type of bars

Permissible current (A)


40 C IP y 31 930 1160 1400 1560 1750 2160 2450 45 C IP y 31 850 1070 1280 1420 1590 1970 2230 50 C IP y 31 760 980 1160 1270 1420 1770 2010

Ambient temperature around the switchboard 25 C 30 C 35 C Size per phase IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 IP > 31 IP y 31 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 10 mm 1150 1000 1080 930 1000 1 Linergy BS bar, 60 x 10 mm 1400 1250 1320 1160 1250 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 1700 1500 1600 1400 1500 2 Linergy BS bars, 50 x 10 mm 1940 1690 1810 1560 1700 2 Linergy BS bars, 60 x 10 mm 2170 1900 2040 1750 1900 2 Linergy BS bars, 80 x 10 mm 2670 2340 2500 2160 2340 2 x 1 Linergy BS bar, 80 x 10 mm 3020 2650 2840 2450 2650

IP > 31 850 1070 1280 1420 1590 1970 2230

IP > 31 760 980 1160 1270 1420 1770 2010

IP > 31 670 880 1030 1100 1240 1550 1760

IP > 31 b b b b b b b

b Connection not possible due to the operating-temperature limits of the devices installed in the switchboard.

D-70

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

100E42035

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

The IP and IK degrees of protection provided by an enclosure must be specified as a function of the various external influences defined by standard IEC 30364-5-51, in particular: bb presence of foreign solid bodies (code AE) bb presence of water (code AD) bb mechanical stress (code not specified) bb capability of persons (code BA) bb ... Prisma P switchboards are designed for indoor installation. Unless the rules, standards and regulations of a specific country stipulate otherwise, Schneider Electric recommends the following IP and IK values based on French guide UTE C 15-103 (March 2004).

Using the table

1 Opposite the relevant premises, read the recommended IP and IK values. 2 The b symbol indicates the enclosure or cubicle satisfying the criteria of the UTE guide. Any enclosure or cubicle with a higher degree of protection can also be used. 3  If several degrees of protection are possible (refer to the standard for more details) and the v and b symbols are indicated (e.g. 24v/25b), enclosures that correspond to the higher degree of protection (b) are suitable for the lower degree of protection (v).

Type of premises

Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

Min. IP/IK required IP IK Domestic or comparable premises or locations Porch 24 07 Bathrooms (see washrooms) Bicycles, motorcycles, tricycles, etc. (premises for) Water, sewer and heating connections Laundries Cellars, garages, furnace rooms Bedrooms Trash rooms Halls in cellars Courtyards Kitchens Shower rooms (see washrooms) Indoor stairways and alleys 20 02/07 07 02 02 02/07 02 02/07 02 07 20 23 21 20 20 25 20 24/25 20 07 02 02 02/07 02 07 07 02/07 02

IP30/IK07

IP43/IK08

b b b b b b b b b b

Outdoor stairways and outdoor alleys 24 without roofs Outdoor alleys with roofs Attics (roof space) Garden shelters Latrines Dustbin rooms Ironing room Access ramps to garages 21 20 24/25 20 25 20 25

b b b b b b b

400E43010

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-71

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

Type of premises

Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK 27 02 24 23 21 20 21 21 20 20 23 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 07 08 07 07 07 07 02 08 07 02 02 02 07 07 02/07 07 07 07 07 02 08 08 07 07 07 02 02 02 08 07 02 07 b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

IP43/IK08

Washrooms, rooms volume 0 containing a bathtub or volume 1 shower volume 2 volume 3 Lounges, living rooms, etc Drying rooms Covered terraces WCs Verandas Crawl spaces

Commercial premises and adjoining areas Gunsmiths (storage area, workshop) 30 Laundries (wash room) Butchers shop cold room y -10 C Bakers, cake shops (kitchens) Coffee roasters Coal, wood, oil Delicatessen (production) Sweets (production) Shoe repair shops Dairies Hardware stores (storage areas for chemicals and paint) Wood workers Art galleries Florists Furriers Fruit and vegetable merchants Grain shops Bookshops, stationers Motorcycle and bicycle repairs and accessories Messenger services Furniture shops (antiques, secondhand) Glass and mirror merchants (workshop) Wallpaper shop (storage area) Cosmetics shop (storage area) Chemists (storage area) Photographers (dark room) Plumbers (storage area) Fishmongers Dry cleaners Hardware stores (without paint, chemicals, etc.) Locksmiths Vintners, spirits Interior decorator (carding) Tailors, clothing retailers (storage area) Pet care 24 24 23 50 21 20 24 20 20 24 33 50 20 24 20 24 50 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 23 20 25 23 20 20 20 50 20 35

07 v/08b v 07 07 02 07 b

D-72

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E43010

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

Type of premises

Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

IP43/IK08

Buildings open to the general public Shared premises of storage rooms buildings open to the packing rooms general public archive rooms film and magnetic media storage linen rooms laundry rooms misc. shops kitchens (large) J L Reception old and handicapped people Lecture halls, halls meeting rooms, stage areas auditoriums, scenery storage halls used for several purposes rooms costume rooms Retail premises, sales premises shopping malls areas for storage and handling of packing Restaurants and cafes Hotels and boarding houses Dance halls and gaming parlours Teaching classrooms establishments, holiday camps dormitories Libraries and documentation centres Exhibitions halls and rooms areas for reception of equipment and merchandise U Healthcare establishments bedrooms incineration operating rooms centralised sterilisation

20 20 20 20 20 24 21 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

08 08 02 02 02 07 07/08 02 02/07 08 08 07 08 08 b b b b b b

b b

b b

b b

b b

N O P R

20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21 20 24

08 02 07 02 08 02 02 07 02 07/08 07 02/07 b b b b b b b

S T

b b b v b

pharmacies and labs 21v/23b 02v/07b with more than 10 l of inflammable liquids V W X Places of worship Administrative premises, banks Indoor sports facilities halls 20 20 20 02 02 08 02 08 08 08v/10b b b b b

07v/08b v

premises containing 21 refrigeration facilities 20 44 44 21

Y PA

Museums Covered open air facilities

23v/25b 08v/10b

b b b

CTS Marquees and tents SG Inflatable structures PS Covered parking lots

400E43010

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-73

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

Type of premises

Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

IP43/IK08

Technical premises Battery rooms Lifts (machine rooms and pulley rooms) Electrical rooms Control rooms Workshops Laboratories Air conditioning washers Garages (used exclusively for parking vehicles) of an area not exceeding 100 m2 Machine rooms Water pressurisers Boiler rooms coal fuel other fuel electrical Fuel storage areas Cinder tips Pump rooms Pressure reduction rooms (gas) Steam or hot water facilities Expansion vessel room Parking lots Carwash areas (inside premises) Petrol stations inside outside Lubrication areas Battery recharging areas Workshops Offices Libraries Archives Computer rooms Design offices Rooms containing reprographic machines Sorting rooms Refectories in restaurants or canteens Large kitchens Sports rooms Barracks Meeting rooms Waiting rooms, lounges, halls Medical consulting rooms, not fitted with specific equipment Demonstration and exhibition rooms coal oil liquefied gas

23 20 20 20

02/07 07v/08b v 07 02 b b v v b b

21v/23b 07v/08b 21v/23b 02v/07b 24 21 31 23 07 07 07/08 07/08

b b b

b b v b b v b b b v b v b v b b b b b

Boiler houses and adjoining premises (power in excess of 70 kW) 51v/61b 07v/08b 21 21 20 20 50 20 07/08 07/08 07v/08b v 07v/08b v 08 07v/08b v

50v/60b 08

21v/23b 07v/08b 21v/23b 07v/08b 21 21 25 21 02 07v/10b 07 07

Garages and car parks of an area exceeding 100 m2

23 23 21 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 21

08 07 08 02 02 02 02 02 02 07 07 b b b b b b b

b b

Public building (other than for the general public)

b b

20 20 20 20 20 20

07v/08b v 07 02 02 02 02/07 b b b b

D-74

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E43010

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

Type of premises

Enclosure
Cubicle with fixed frame Min. IP/IK required IP IK IP30/IK07 with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

IP43/IK08

Farm premises or locations Alcohol (storage) Closed cattle sheds Laundries Wood storage rooms Threshing floors Distilling cellars Vat rooms (wine) Courtyards Poultry barns Stables Fertiliser (storage) Stables Manure heaps Haylofts Haystacks, forage (storage) Granaries, barns Straw (storage) Greenhouses Grain silos Milking rooms Pig sties Chicken houses Miscellaneous installations Fair facilities Water treatment facilities Height above ground from 0 to 1.10 m from 1.10 to 2 m above 2 m under evaporator or water drain pipe ceiling and up to 10 cm underneath Temperature y -10 C Compressor room

23 35 24 30 50 23 23 35 35 35 50 35 24 50 50 50 50 23 50 35 35 35 33 24/25 25 24 21

07 07 07 10 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 07/08 07 07 07 b

b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

Thermodynamic installations, air-conditioned rooms and cold rooms

23 23 21

07 07 08 08 b

b b

integral unit located 34 outside or on a terrace

400E43010

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-75

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

Type of premises

Cubicle

Enclosure
with fixed frame with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

Min. IP/IK required IP IK Industrial facilities Slaughter houses Batteries (manufacture) Acid (manufacture and storage) Alcohol (manufacture and storage) Aluminium (manufacture and storage) Asphalt and bitumen storage Wool beating and carding Industrial laundry Wood (processing) Meat packers Bakeries Breweries Brickworks Rubber (production and processing) Carbide (manufacture and storage) Ammunition factories Carton board (production) Quarries Celluloid (manufacture of objects) Cellulose (manufacture) Coal (depots) Pork products Boiler-making works Lime kilns Rag (storage) Chlorine (manufacture and storage) Chrome-plating Cement works Coking plant Adhesives (production) Bottling lines Liquid fuels (storage) Fats (processing) Leather (tanning and storage) Copper (ore processing) Paint stripping Detergents (manufacture) Distilleries Electrolysis Ink manufacturing Explosives (manufacture and storage) Iron (production and processing) Spinning mills Furriers (beating process) Cheese factories Gas (production and storage) tar (processing) Seed production Metal engraving Oils (extraction) Petroleum products (manufacture) Printworks 55 33 33 33 51 08 07 07 07 08 07 07 08 07 08 07 07 07 08 07 07 08 07 08 08 08 08 07 08 08 07 07 07 08 08 07 08

IP30/IK07

IP43/IK08

b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b v b

Livestock (raising, fattening and sale) 45 53 50 24/25 50 24/25 50 24 53 54 51 53 33 55 30 34 53 24/25 30 50 30 33 33 50 53 33 35 51 31 31 54 53 33 33 31 55 51 50 50 25 31 33 50 33 31 20

31v/33b 08 07 08 08 08 07 07 08 07 07 08 08 07 07 07 08 05 07 07 07 08

Fertilisers (manufacture and storage) 53

33v/34b 08

D-76

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E43010

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Selection of enclosures according to the premises

Type of premises

Cubicle

Enclosure
with fixed frame with door + IP30 cover IP30/IK08 with door + gasket + IP30 cover IP31/IK08 with door + IP55 cover IP55/IK10

Min. IP/IK required IP IK Industrial establishments (continued) Dairies 25 07 Public wash-houses Liqueurs (production) Halogenated liquids (use) Inflammable products (storage and workshops where they are used) Magnesium (production, storage and use) Machine rooms Plastics (production) Cabinet makers Metals (processing) Combustion engines (testing of) Ammunition storage Nickel (or processing) Household waste (processing) Paper (production) Paper (storage) Perfume (production and storage) Pulp mill Paint (production and storage) Plaster (processing and storage) Gunpowder factory Chemicals (production) Oil refineries Salt preserve factories Soap (production) Saw mills Metalwork shops Grain or sugar silos Silk and artificial hair factories Sodium carbonate (processing and storage) Sulphur (processing) Spirits (storage) Sugar mills Tanners Dye works Textile and fabric (production) Varnish (production and application) Glass works Zinc works No applicable 25 21 21 21 31 20 51 50 30 33 33 54 31 31 34/35 33 50 55 34/35 33 31 50 30 50 50 33 51 33 55 35 35 51 33 33 31 07 07 08 08 08 08 08 08

IP30/IK07

IP43/IK08

b b b b b

b b b b v b b b b v b b b b b b v b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b b

31v/33b 08 08 08 08 07 07 07 07 08 07 08 07 07 07 08 08 07 08 07 07 07 07 07 07 08 08 08 08

33v/34b 07

30v/50b 08

400E43010

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-77

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Properties of metal enclosures

Schneider Electric enclosures comply with standard EN 50298 for empty enclosures. The sheet metal used for Schneider Electric enclosures receives an anti-corrosion epoxy electrophoresis treatment and a coating of a thermosetting, polyesterresinmodified epoxy powder for colour and appearance. This two-coat system provides excellent finish and corrosion protection. The characteristics of this coating are much better than those of traditional epoxy powders: b improved colour stability b wider operating temperature range.

Mechanical properties of enclosures


Cubicle Cubicle door

Static load on doors, wall-mounted and floor-standing enclosures and cubicles


400 kg 12 kg

Mechanical properties of powder coated surfaces


Test conditions Test piece made of 1 mm thick steel sheet, degreased, iron phosphated, final rinsing with 100000 W cm DI water, 15 microns of anti-corrosion electrophoresis treatment and 35 microns of powder paint.
Adhesion (cross-hatch and pull-off) class 0 required (ISO 2409) > 1 kg/50 cm (ISO 6272) Impact strength (1) < 10 mm (ISO 6860) Mandrel bending test (2) Persoz hardness 300 s (ISO 1522) (1) No cracking of the paint film after dropping a weight of one kilogram on the test piece from a height of 50 centimetres. (2) Film cracks over a length of 10 millimetres maximum.

Artificial ageing test on powder coating


Test conditions: Two tests carried out on the same 1 mm thick steel sheet test piece. b cyclical damp-heat test: vv as per standard IEC 68-2-30 - six 24-hour cycles at temperatures higher than 40 C b continuous resistance to neutral salt mist: v the tests were carried out over a period of 400 hours, far more than the 48 hours required by the standard for indoor installations vv as per standard IEC 68-2-11 and ISO 7253 - 400 hours without blistering for normal surface on test piece - 250 hours for a scratched surface. Evaluation of corrosion as per ISO 4628: bb adhesion: class y 1 bb blistering: degree 1 dim.1 bb rusting: Ri 1 bb cracking: class 1 bb flaking imp. 1 dim. 1 propagation of corrosion under scratch with respect to the scratch axis: 3 mm max.

D-78

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E43020

Additional information
Enclosure characteristics

Properties of metal enclosures

Chemical properties of powder coating

Tests carried out at ambient temperature on phosphated test pieces coated with a 150 to 200 micron film.
Acids

Test duration (months)


Acetic Sulphuric Nitric Phosphoric Hydrochloric Lactic Citric Soda Ammonia Distilled water Seawater Tap water Diluted bleach Petrol High alcohols Aliphatics Aromatics Ketones, esters Tri-perchlorethylene Film intact.

Bases Water

Concentration 20 % 30 % 30 % 30 % 30 % 10 % 10 % 10 % 10 %

10

12

Solvents

Film damaged (blisters, yellowing, loss of shine).

400E43020

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-79

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards

Thermal management of switchboards


General
A switchboard is designed for operation under normal ambient conditions. Most devices do not operation correctly outside a temperature range of -10 and +70 C. It is therefore important to maintain the switchboard internal temperature within this temperature range by: bb correctly sizing the switchboard during design bb correcting the temperature using suitable means.

Management of the internal temperature

Cooling There are a number of way to dissipate heat from the switchboard. The drawings below present the various means. Convection
Dd381484.eps Dd381483.eps Dd381482.eps

Forced-air ventilation
Dd381481.eps

IP > 31

IP y 31

IP y 54

IP y 54

Ensured naturally in Prisma P enclosures.

Using fans, it significantly increases the thermal capacity of an enclosure.

Forced-air ventilation with air-air exchanger

Forced convection and cooling

Dd381920.eps

IP > 31 On special request.

Dd381921.eps

IP > 31

For these extreme cases, many installers prefer to set up the switchboards with other electrotechnical and electronic devices in air-conditioned electrical rooms.

Heating The means employed to raise the internal temperature in a switchboard is a resistor-based heater, used to: bb avoid condensation by limiting variations in temperature bb ensure that the switchboard does not freeze.

D-80

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E45000

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Calculation of the internal temperature

Thermal management of switchboards


General
Calculation of the temperature is the means to check that the enclosure can evacuate the dissipated power of the installed devices. Important note Correct thermal management of the switchboard depends on compliance with the installation requirements for the distribution system (power circuits). Incorrect installation will have major consequences on the connected device, but almost none on the internal temperature of the enclosure. Once the circuit has been correctly sized, it is necessary to check whether the assembly (devices + distribution system + cables) have a level of dissipated power P(W) y the P(W) that the enclosure can handle. Method defined by IEC 890 technical report This IEC guide for switchboards proposes a calculation method to determine three levels of internal temperature, depending on the dissipated power of the devices and distribution blocks installed in the switchboard. Users can consult this document when it is necessary to determine precisely the internal temperature in view of optimising the switchboard. On request, Schneider Electric can carry out a thermal study to check that the installed assembly and the thermal capacity of the enclosure are compatible.

Dd381401.eps

Comparative method A number of qualified and tested configurations serve as the basis for indicating the thermal capacity of Prisma P enclosures. This is en empirical means to check whether the dissipated power of the desired configuration is close to that of a tested configuration.

DD381350.eps

Method using charts taking into account enclosure characteristics To speed up calculations, Schneider Electric produces charts based on the companys experience and a number of assumptions on the installation. They can be used sufficiently precisely to determine the variations in temperature and the dissipated-power levels for the different types of wall-mounted enclosures, floor-standing enclosures and cubicles. For details on the calculation of the dissipated power in the device zone, see page D-83.

DD382422.eps

400E45000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-81

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm wide, 400 mm deep, IP30 Diversity factor: 0.7 and 0.8 Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 580 W Cubicle 2 : P(W) of device zone = 180 W

Thermal management of switchboards


General
DD385284.eps

LGY

NSX250

Linergy FM

Linergy FC distribution block NSX NSX NSX NSX

NSX400

Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30 Diversity factor: 0.7 Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 880 W Cubicle 2 : P(W) of device zone = 330 W

DD385281.eps

Linergy LGY

NSX400

NSX630

NSX

NSX

NSX

NSX

D-82

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E45000

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards
Two cubicles with busbar compartment, 800 mm wide, 1000 mm deep, two 300 mm wide ducts, IP30 Diversity factor: 0.7 Ambient temperature around the switchboard: 35 C Cubicle 1 : P(W) of device zone = 580 W Cubicle 2 : P(W) of device zone = 180 W

Thermal management of switchboards


Example
DD383958.eps

NSX250

NSX

NSX

NSX

NSX

NSX400

Application of the diversity factor

In the configuration below, the standardised diversity factor (K div.) for a total of 14 outgoing circuits is 0.6, i.e. 60 % of In for each outgoing circuit. Schneider Electric prefers a more conservative approach and therefore divides the installation into four main circuits: bb Compact NSX250 bb 200 A Linergy FM: 8 outgoers V K div. = 0.7 bb Linergy FC: 4 outgoers V K div. = 0.8 bb Compact NSX400. 1 Compact NSX250 + 1 Linergy FM 200 A + 1 Linergy FC + 1 Compact NSX400 V 4 outgoers, i.e. a diversity factor of 0.8. As a result, the current flowing in each circuit is at least 70 % and up to 80 % of In. Dissipated power of the NT1600 indicated by the manufacturer: 460 W. The power dissipated by the connections is approximately 30 % of the device P(W): 0.3 x 460 = 138 W. Power of circuit breaker + connections = 460 + 138 = 598 W at 1600 A. For I (the Watts are proportional to the square of the current) at 1410 A (In of the incoming device): 598 x 14102 = 405 W 16002 Dissipated power of the Compact NSX250 indicated by the manufacturer: 42 W. Dissipated power of the connections: 0.3 x 42 = 12.6 W. Power of circuit breaker + connections = 42 +12.6 = 54.6 W at 250 A. For 200 A (the tested value): 54.6 x 2002 = 35 W 2502 Dissipated power of the Linergy FC and its four Compact NSX250 circuit 4 x 35 W (same calculation as above) = 14 breakers: Sum of the dissipated power in the incoming cubicle: P(W) = 405 + 35 +140 = 580 W

Calculation of the power dissipated by devices in the incoming cubicle

400E45000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-83

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards

Thermal management of switchboards


Example
Once the dissipated power of the devices has been determined and the enclosure with its IP selected, transfer the results (sum of the dissipated power and width of the device zone) to the chart corresponding to the enclosure IP.
DD382423.eps

Draw a line parallel to the others on the chart and read the corresponding difference in temperature. For the given example, the heat rise is 22 C at mid-height in the enclosure. The internal temperature = external temperature + heat rise = 35 C + 22 C = 57 C 57 C < 60 C stipulated by the standard, i.e. the result is acceptable for an IP3 cubicle. This gives roughly: Internal temperature = 60 C at mid-height in the enclosure for a low IP value. Internal temperature = 70 C at mid-height in the enclosure for a high IP value.

D-84

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E45000

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Quick calculation charts for internal temperatures
DD382424.eps

Thermal management of switchboards


Charts
Test conditions: the cubicle is on the floor against a wall, the indicated internal heat rise is that measured at mid-height in the enclosure. IP3X cubicle, 400 mm deep
DD382425.eps

IP3X cubicle, 600 mm deep

For the enclosures not mentioned on the previous pages, use the equation: DT = P SxK

where: DT: internal temperature - external temperature P: power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts) S: total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m) K: thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m C)
DD382426.eps

IP3X cubicle, 800 mm deep


DD382427.eps

IP3X cubicle, 1000 mm deep

K=5.5 W/m C for painted sheet metal. Note: the dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately 30 % to account for the connections and the busbars.

IP55 cubicle, 400 mm deep


DD382428.eps DD382429.eps

IP55 cubicle, 600 mm deep

IP55 cubicle, 800 mm deep


DD382430.eps DD382431.eps

IP55 cubicle, 1000 mm deep

400E45000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-85

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Switchboard ventilation

Thermal management of switchboards


Ventilation
The air enters the lower section via the fans and exits the upper section: bb through a ventilated roof bb or through a ventilation opening. The air throughput of the fans is determined by the equation: D = 3.1 x

P DT

- KS

The chart below can be used to determine the necessary throughput, based on the dissipated power, the difference in temperature (internal - external) and the exposed surface area of the enclosure. Example Consider an IP3X cubicle, 650 mm wide and 400 mm deep, containing components (devices, connections, busbars, etc.) dissipating 1000 W. The ambient temperature around the cubicle is 50 C. Given that the average temperature at mid-height should not exceed 60 C, the difference in temperature DT is equal to 60 - 50 = 10 C. The exposed surface of the cubicle (non adjacent to a wall or other cubicle) is 4.46m. (back = 1.3 m, front = 1.3 m, roof = 0.26 m, side panels = 1.6 m). What is the necessary throughput of the ventilation system? The throughput can be calculated as: D = 3.1 x

1000 - 5.5 x 4.46 10

D = 234 m3/h. In the range of Prisma P accessories, select a system with a throughput of 300 m3/h.

Dd381391.eps

P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts) Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts) Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C) Ti : average internal temperature (in C) Te : average external temperature (in C) DTm = Tm Te DT = Ti Te S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m2) K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m2 C) K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal D: ventilation throughput (in m3/h) Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately 30% to account for the connections and the busbars.

Calculation data

D-86

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E45000

Additional information
Thermal characteristics of switchboards Switchboard heating

Thermal management of switchboards


Heating
The heating resistor, placed in the bottom of the switchboard, maintains the internal temperature 10 C higher than the external temperature. When the switchboard is not in operation, the heater compensates the dissipated power normally emitted by the switchboard. The power of the heating resistor is calculated: b using the equation: Pr = (DT x S x K) - P b or using the charts below, based on the exposed surface area of the enclosure and the desired difference in temperature. Chart to determine the heating resistor for small wall-mounted enclosures (exposed surfaces y 1 m2)
Dd381788.eps

Chart to determine the heating resistor for all types of enclosures and cubicles
Dd381789.eps

Calculation data P : power dissipated by the devices, connections and busbars (in Watts) Pr : power of the heating resistor (in Watts) Tm : maximum internal temperature in the device zone (in C) Ti : average internal temperature (in C) Te : average external temperature (in C) DTm = Tm Te DT = Ti Te S : total free surface area of the enclosure (expressed in m2) K : thermal-conduction coefficient of the material (W/m2 C) K = 5.5 W/m2 C for painted sheet metal D: ventilation throughput (in m3/h).
Note: The dissipated power of each device is provided by the manufacturer. Add approximately 30 % to account for the connections and the busbars.

400E45000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-87

Additional information
Practical information

Tools required for mounting and connection

bb Vacuum cleaner to clean the switchboards bb Ratchet wrench with sockets bb Torque wrench with sockets and ring bits to tighten the electrical connections to the correct torque (max. torque 50 Nm) bb Open-ended torque wrench bb Open-ended spanners (15 to 27 mm). bb Electrician's knife bb 7, 8, 10, 13, 16, 17 and 19 mm sockets bb Bit holder socket bb 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm hexagonal-head bits bb Pozidriv no. 1, 2 and 3 bits bb Rubber mallet bb Level. bb Measurement and inspection tools and instruments bb Drill bb Semi-circuit nosed pliers bb Cable-tie pliers bb Wire stripper bb Crimping tool bb Diagonal cutter bb Wire cutters bb Flat-nosed pliers bb Bit holder for screwdriver bb Extension bb Electric saw bb Jig saw bb Clamp for cubicle alignment bb Buzzer or tester bb 3, 5, 4, 5.5 and 8 mm flat screwdrivers bb Posidriv no. 2 crosshead screwdriver (to mount handle) bb Hydraulic jacks that can be operated in horizontal position to lift cubicles and move them sideways if necessary. bb Coloured, indelible and temperature resistant acrylic varnish. bb Electric screwdriver
Note: a Facom brand torque wrench is available with a capacity of 75 Nm and a thin shape. It is recommended for tightening under difficult access conditions.

DD383904.eps

Part numbers: bb SP3723 = wrench handle (essential) bb SP3721 = extra-flat ratchet adapter (essential) bb SP3722 = ratchet for ordinary sockets (optional) for mounting on handle SP3723 bb SP2709 = extra-flat 13 mm short socket bb SP2709A = extra-flat 13 mm long socket bb SP4369 = extra-flat 16 mm short socket bb SP4370 = extra-flat 16 mm long socket bb SP2710 = extra-flat 17 mm short socket bb SP4371 = extra-flat 19 mm short socket bb SP4372 = extra-flat 19 mm long socket.

D-88

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Cable sizes according to permissible current

Schneider Electric provides cabling recommendations according to the rating of the circuit breaker. The size of cables must be selected according to: bb the level of current bb the ambient temperature around the conductors bb the degree of protection of the switchboard. The tables below take into account the installation conditions for each type of device (permissible temperature at connection terminals, etc.). They follow the temperature derating values for installed devices in all cubicles with cover panels rated IP y 55: bb switchboard internal temperature is 60 C bb connections using copper cables.

Connection of circuit breakers

Size of cables (mm)


1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95

Permissible current (A) Cables tied individually IP y 31 IP > 31


16 25 32 40 63 90 110 135 180 230 275 14 25 29 39 55 77 100 125 150 190 230

Cable tied together IP y 31 IP > 31


14 22 28 36 55 80 100 125 12 20 24 33 50 70 93 120

Connection of other devices

Size of cables (mm)


1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95

Permissible current (A) Cables tied individually IP y 31 IP > 31


13 23 28 36 55 80 100 120 165 210 250 12 21 26 35 50 70 90 115 135 176 210

Cable tied together IP y 31 IP > 31


12 20 25 32 50 72 90 110 10 19 22 30 46 63 84 103

Connection of Compact NSX100 to 630 A

Devices

NSX100

NSX160

NSX250

25 50 95 Note: Schneider Electric recommends connecting Compact NSX400/630 circuit breakers with insulated flexible bars or rigid bars, see page D-44.

Note: the values indicated above have been validated for Prisma P switchboards.

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-89

Additional information
Practical information

Connection accessories

Tubular lugs for incoming connection blocks

Maximum size of lugs for connection to the different incoming connection blocks.
Standard Cu lugs Narrow Cu lugs Bimetal narrow lugs

Incoming connection block for Compact NSX-INS250 supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04066 or 04067 In-duct incoming connection block for Compact NSX630 supplied via the top or bottom, cat. no. 04076

150 mm 240 mm

240 mm 300 mm

185 mm 300 mm

DD382788.eps

Narrow bimetal lugs


Cat. no. selection
Cat. no. Cable size (mm) 150 150 185 185 240 240 300 300 Quantity

Lugs for aluminium cables (1)


29504 29505 29506 29507 32504 32505 32506 32507 (1) Supplied with 2 or 3 interphase barriers.

3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4

Customer connection of devices u 630 A

Maximum size and number of cables for connection to terminal extension bars (as per busbar drawing supplied) for customer connection of Compact NSX and Masterpact NT/NW devices.
Max. size (mm) Quantity

Maximum size and number of cables


Copper lugs Bimetal lugs 300 240 12 12

D-90

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Protective circuits

Designing the PEN conductor

The size of the PEN is determined in the same manner as a neutral conductor, i.e.: bb for copper single-phase circuits or circuits with conductors sized y 16mm, the PEN conductor must be the same size as the phase conductors bb for copper three-phase circuits with conductors sized > 16 mm, it can be: vv the same size as the phase conductors vv smaller on the condition that: - the current likely to flow in the neutral during normal operation is less than the permissible current for the conductor - the power rating of single-phase loads does not exceed 10 % of the total rating. The PEN conductor must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site, as well as checks on the tightness of connections.

Implementing the PEN protective conductor

According to standard IEC 60439-1, the practical guidelines for implementing the PEN are the following: bb at the head of the assembly, the PEN connection must be near the phase connections bb within the assembly, the PEN does not need to be insulated from the exposed conductive parts (except on sites where there is a risk of fire or explosion) bb the size of the conductor must be at least equal to that of the neutral bb the size must remain constant throughout the main busbars the change from the TNC to the TNS system must take place at a single place in the switchboard, via a marked neutral-disconnection bar that is accessible and can be dismantled to facilitate the impedance measurement of the fault loop bb after the TNS creation point, it is forbidden to recreate a TNC system. The PE and the neutral must meet their individual constraints.
DD384616.eps

PEN kit for Linergy LGY busbars


see page B-83.

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-91

Additional information
Practical information

Protective circuits

Designing the PE protective conductor


DD381471.eps

The protective conductor must be sufficiently sized and securely installed in the switchboard to accept the thermal and electrodynamic constraints of the fault current. It must be connected to the exposed conductive parts of the switchboard. It must be accessible to enable connections both in the factory and on site.

Optimised calculation method

Use the calculation equation indicated in standard IEC 60439-1 and 2:

SPE: cross-sectional area of the PE in mm I: value of the phase-to-earth fault current = 60 % of the value of the phase-tophase fault current (IEC 60439-1 8.2.4.2) t: time the fault current flows in seconds k: coefficient that depends on the type of metal, k = 143 for a copper conductor with PVC insulation. Simplified method (based on the equation above) Use the table below to determine the size of the PE conductor as a function of device short-circuit current Isc.
Size of PE conductor Isc y 40 kA Isc y 65 kA Isc > 65 kA All Schneider Electric devices 1 Linergy BS bar, 25 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 630 1 Linergy BS bar, 50 x 5 mm Linergy LGY 800

Schneider Electric prefabricated solution For Schneider Electric devices up to Isc values of 85 kA, see page B-82 .

D-92

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Connection of horizontal to vertical busbars

Horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars (Linergy LGY or Linergy BS) in two ways: bb in a duct (by a direct connection ordered from the catalogue) bb in the rear (with part of the connection to be fabricated by the installer). 5 mm thick horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars using connection plate 04634 (y 1000 A) or 04635 (> 1000 A) after drilling holes in the horizontal bars. 10 mm thick horizontal busbars can be connected to vertical busbars in 2 ways: bb using connection plate 04636 (y 1600 A) or 04637 (> 1600 A) without drilling holes in the horizontal bars bb or with a screw and socket assembly (04645) designed for assembly on a busbar that has already been mounted.
Connection plate (cat. no. 04635).
DD383907.eps DD383948.eps DD383906.eps

Screw + socket (cat. no. 04645).

This bolted solution requires: bb holes drilled in the bars (16 mm) for diagonal mounting of the sockets and screws bb conformity with the following mounting rules: vv respect the overlap length (2.5 to 5 times the bar thickness) vv tighten to a torque of 50 Nm vv fit the recommended number of screws, depending on the bar width as explained below.
DD383908.eps

In practice, the real contact area is limited to regions in which the pressure is applied effectively. In a bolted overlap assembly, these areas are made up of the areas adjacent to the bolts, and more precisely under the washers. Salt spray tests have demonstrated these contact areas. The number of screws thus determines the effective cross-sectional area through which the current flows, which corresponds to the area under the washer (minus the screw hole). This cross-section area must be close to that of the bar. Controlled temperature rise Whatever the connection solution used, the quality and reliability of the contact is guaranteed, in particular with respect to temperature rise, as long as assembly is carried out according to our recommendations.

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-93

Additional information
Practical information

Installation of the current transformer

The current transformers can be installed either on the main busbars or on the circuits upstream or downstream of devices. Installation must not affect the insulation level or the reliability of the busbars. Choice of a CT model depends on the type of installation: bb insulated cables bb Prisma P vertical busbars bb insulated flexible busbars bb Linergy LGY vertical busbars bb rigid busbars. When installing a CT, we recommend that you comply with the following mounting rules: bb install current transformers: vv on an easily dismountable busbars or copper connections vv between 2 connection points, by joints or bolted connection bb place the current transformer so that the identification markings remain readable. For large current transformers, a staggered installation is recommended to prevent arcing on fixing screws or excessive spacing between phase conductors. If they are installed on vertical busbars, secure the current transformers in place to prevent them from slipping downwards (for example using a bolt or a pin) bb when there are several busbars per phase, fit spacers between the busbars in order to: vv resist the tightening forces when installing the current transformer vv avoid vibrations that lead to current transformer breakdowns.

PD391279.eps

Dismountable vertical busbars.


PD391280.eps PD391281.eps

CT on vertical busbars.

Spacers between the bars.

D-94

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Installation of the current transformer

Our circuit breakers have trip units with a built-in ammeter (see Micrologic catalogue). Their use eliminates the need for installing a CT on the busbars.
DD383909.eps

The CT casing is a solution for installation of CTs up to 1600 A. CTs can be installed in the casing (cat. no. 03506). It is equipped with a frame made up of 2 uprights, adjustable in depth and 2 slotted cross-members to fix the cables, install CTs or install a busbar support with 75 mm spacing. It is secured in the switchgear compartment of a 400 or 600 mm deep cubicle. The 300 mm duct allows easier mounting of CTs. To install 2 CTs, downstream from a circuit-breaker for example, it is often easier to use a 300 mm wide duct (cat. no. 08403 for 400 mm depth or cat. no. 08603 for 600 mm depth).
PD391282.eps

Sealable CT casing with current transformers on bolted connections.

CT on circuit-breaker downstream connection busbars.

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-95

Additional information
Practical information

Installation of source changeover systems


Principle of the Prisma P solution
Prisma P simplifies the installation of source changeover systems. The source changeover solution is an integral part of the Prisma P offering and is designed for all installation cases: 2 or 3 devices side by side or 2 superimposed devices. The page opposite shows a few examples of installation in cubicles: bb 1 normal source/1 replacement source bb 2 normal sources with coupling (priority and non-priority circuits) bb 2 normal sources + 1 replacement source with coupling (priority and non-priority, circuits). Note that our configuration software can be used to produce the switchboard front panel drawings.

PD391283.eps

Source changeover system in the same cubicle.

For each source changeover configuration, various combinations of normal and replacement source circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors are possible: bb 1 normal source/1 replacement source: v NS630b to NS1600 / NS630b to NS1600 v NT / NT v NT / NW v NW / NT v NW / NW bb 2 normal sources with coupling: vv NW / NW / NW vv NT / NT / NT vv NW / NW / NW bb 2 normal sources + 1 replacement source with coupling: NW / NW / NW / NW or NT. Tables in the catalogue indicate the possible combinations normal and replacement devices according to the rating as well as the types of interlocking available for the different types of devices.

DD381617.eps

Source changeover system in 2 combined cubicles.

PD391284.eps

Highly economical vertical configurations are possible even for the largest devices. In this case, interlocking may be: b mechanical by cable + motor mechanism b via rotary handles (for NS630b/1600 only). To define the number of modules required to install superimposed devices, all you have to do is add up the number of modules required for each device with: b its connections b its cover and its partitioning. For combination possibilities and installation details, refer to the Compact and Masterpact source changeover systems catalogue ABTED201149EN or ABTED201149FR.

D-96

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Installation of source changeover systems

DD383910.eps

1 normal source 1 replacement source


DD210440.eps

2 normal sources and coupling on busbars

DD210441.eps

2 normal sources 1 replacement source and coupling on busbars

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-97

Additional information
Practical information

Storage recommendations

Cubicles must be stored in upright position in a dry and ventilated location, sheltered from rain, weather, dripping and running water, dust and chemical agents. Apart from IP55 cubicles, never store enclosures outdoors, even under an awning or tarp. The cubicles should if possible be left in their packing until they are installed. In this way they are protected against all risks that may be encountered on the site (impacts, splashes, etc.). Acceptable storage temperatures are -25 C to +55 C (or up to +70 C for short periods not exceeding 24 hours). Given their heavy weight, cubicles should be stored on a stable, rigid and flat floor to avoid any risk of tipping during storage or handling.

D-98

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Packing information

Receiving the switchboard


On receipt of the equipment and before handling it, check that the cases and packing materials used for transportation have not been damaged and that all items on the packing list have been effectively delivered. bb Even if the packing appears to be in good condition, do not hesitate to unpack the equipment in the presence of an authorised transport agent. bb Check the contents and weights of the shipping units. Thoroughly check the equipment to make sure that no damage or shocks have occurred that could impair insulation or operation. bb If necessary, check that the information on the switchboard nameplate, located on the incoming cubicle, complies with the information indicated on the delivery slip. bb In case of damage or missing parts, inform the transport agent by registered mail. bb After this inspection, refit the plastic protective cover. Prisma P switchboards are generally shipped as separate cubicles or in transport units comprising 2 cubicles side by side. Shipping units may exceptionally comprise 3 cubicles (see precautions given in the "On-site handling" chapter). Each shipping unit is marked with: bb project number bb weight bb packing unit information (packing unit number and total quantity) bb position of the centre of gravity bb storage and handling instructions.
DD383911.eps

Standard packing

The cubicles are protected by a plastic cover in a crate. The following accessories are attached inside the switchboard: bb installation accessories (lifting/fixing cross-members and external fixing lugs) bb preliminary installation accessories: plinth raisers bb horizontal busbar joints (if required) bb additional nuts and bolts and other mounting hardware bb panels to be fitted after on-site connection: canopies, roof panels, gland plates bb a set of drawings bb device user manuals bb a tube of Swiss white varnish. Large withdrawable or drawout circuit breakers installed at the top of the cubicle (Masterpact and Compact NS) are generally delivered separately.

DD383912.eps

Sea packing

The cubicles are protected by a heat-sealed plastic cover containing desiccant bags and are installed in a ventilated wooden or plywood crate. As a rule sea crates do not weigh more than 5 tons.

Sorting

In order to sort the different types of packing material, specific waste recovery bins are required.

DD383913.eps

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-99

Additional information
Practical information

Handling on the site

DD383914.eps

Final unpacking of the equipment will preferably take place just before the switchboard is installed, as close as possible to its final installation location. As a general guideline, the weight of an average 3200 A cubicle is around 400 kg. Cubicles should always be handled in the upright position with care, if possible by 2 persons. There is a risk of overtipping the cubicle due to the high position of the centre of gravity. When moving the cubicles, always turn slowly and smoothly, avoiding all bumps and jerks. Enclosures moved using a forklift truck must be lifted carefully and held in position or fastened to the forklift truck using slings during transport.

NX 08
Ue 690(V)

HA10 12kV
Uimp

Ui 1000V

50kA/1s
50/60Hz AS 947-2 UNE IEC BS CEI EN 60947-2 VDE UTE NBMA

II masterpact
GERIN

MERLIN

NX 08
Ue 690(V)

HA10 12kV
Uimp

Ui 1000V

50kA/1s
50/60Hz AS 947-2 UNE IEC BS CEI EN 60947-2 VDE UTE NBMA

II masterpact
GERIN

MERLIN

Handling by the bottom

Wooden beams (or framework stabilizers) are generally attached to the base of the cubicle framework. This allows the cubicles to be moved using a pallet mover or forklift truck. The forks must be placed symmetrically with respect to the cubicle's axis so as not to distort the base of the frame.

Dd381333.eps

For cubicles fitted with a plinth, the front and rear base panels must be removed to allow insertion of the pallet mover forks. Cubicles must be lifted with care and held in place during transport by strapping them onto the handling machine, especially for large distances or bumpy terrain.
Framework stabiliser.

For a Prisma P switchboard with a busbar compartment, lifting points must be shifted towards the busbars.

DD210573.eps

Cubicle with base.

D-100

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Handling on the site

Dd381541.eps

Handling by the top

If cranes or overhead hoists are used, only slings that are sufficiently strong and in good condition should be used. b The slings must be attached to the 4 cubicle lifting lugs. b Adjust the length of the slings according to the switchboard dimensions so that the angle formed does not exceed the angle indicated below depending on the switchboard weight. When 2 switchgear cubicles are combined, a lifting beam must be used. b Never tilt the cubicle during handling. b Take care to equally distribute the load on the 4 rings.
DD383915.eps

DD210574.eps

Position of lifting rings

The lifting rings can be installed and removed without dismantling the roof. Even with the lifting rings permanently installed, the switchboard retains its original degree of protection. For combined cubicles, only install lifting rings on cubicles with switchgear.
DD383379.eps

b Lifting several cubicles packed together In the special case of an assembly with more than 2 cubicles, you must: bb first of all move the assembly in its original packing as close as possible to where it is to be installed bb use a lifting beam and slings to support the switchboard from underneath.

DD383916.eps

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-101

Additional information
Practical information

Transport

The cubicles must be loaded vertically (stacking strongly discouraged). After loading, check that the equipment is firmly secured in the truck to avoid any risk of damage during transport.
DD383917.eps

Enclosures supplied as kits should be transported horizontally if possible.


DD383918.eps

D-102

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Cubicle handling and rolling base Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles
This type of base is designed to increase the rigidity of cubicle frameworks to avoid any risk of deformation during transport and handling. Five different catalogue numbers offer 27 width possibilities (1200 to 3050 mm) for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles. b Two catalogue numbers each include 2 end-pieces for handling bases for 400 and 600 mm deep cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. b Three catalogue numbers each include 2 lengths for the sides of handling bases for 1200 to 3050 mm wide cubicles respectively and the corresponding mounting hardware. Handling bases can be used for both side-by-side and back-to-back cubicle combinations. In this case, the mounting hardware for one of the sets is used. Designation
2 cubicle handling base end-pieces 2 cubicle handling base side-lengths D = 400 mm D = 600 mm W = 1200 to 1900 mm W = 2000 to 2550 mm W = 2650 to 3050 mm

50 mm high base
DD383845.eps

50

08714 + 08705.
DD383849.eps

Cat. no.
08714 08716 08705 08706 08707

Combined cubicles equipped with a handling base can be moved easily and safely on rollers.
DD380652.eps

08716

08705

DD383840.eps

Side-by-side and back-to-back combination of 4 cubicles equipped with a handling base.

Lifting reinforcement kit


DD383838.eps

b Kit 08722 is recommended for lifting combined cubicles and can be used together with handling base end-pieces 08714 for severe transport or handling conditions. bb Catalogue number 08722 includes 3 reinforcement brackets for 400 or 600 mm deep cubicles and the corresponding mounting hardware. Designation
Lifting reinforcement kit for combined cubicles W = 400/600 mm

Cat. no.
08722

DD383839.eps

08722

08722

08722

650

400

800

800

800

300

A lifting reinforcement kit should be installed every 800 mm.

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-103

Additional information
Practical information

Connection of busbar trunking

Prisma P switchboards come equipped with a special interface that allows them to be directly connected to Canalis KT trunking. The electrical connection between the Canalis KT trunking and the Prisma P switchboard is just as easy to carry out as jointing between two busbar trunking sections. The Canalis KT interface is totally integrated in the Prisma P switchboard volume. It comprises a Canalis KT joint block and interface/circuit breaker connection terminals.
DD383919.eps

Trunking connection via the top

bb Dismantle the roof. bb Cut out a passage for the busbar trunking. bb Adjust the guides according to the KT width that will be connected. bb Unscrew the junction block screws. bb Ensure that the busbar trunking length to be connected to the switchboard is correctly supported and that it is not resting on the interface. bb Lower the element until it is in contact with the interface frame, without bearing on it. bb Tighten the junction torque nuts. When the head breaks, the torque of 60 Nm has bb been reached.

In certain cases, it is recommended to only tighten the 2 middle nuts to 60 Nm and the 2 outer nuts to 10 Nm. bb A red plastic washer that is ejected when the head breaks provides visual evidence that the joint tightening operation has been carried out correctly. bb For dismantling or maintenance operations, a second head is available on the nut and can be retightened using a conventional torque wrench. The recommended tightening torque is then 60 Nm. bb Reassemble the roof.

Sealing kit

bb In order to retain the original IP index, use the roof sealing kit ordered with the busbar trunking. This kit guarantees an IP52 degree of protection at the trunking passage. bb The kit is installed by cutting out the roof of the Prisma P switchboard. This cut-out, which is the same dimension for all Canalis KT busbar trunking ratings, is made using the template delivered with the sealing kit.

D-104

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Connection of power cables

To ensure protection of persons, first connect the switchboard protective conductor to the earth electrode. bb Tie the cables as close as possible to the connections to avoid any mechanical stresses on the device terminals. When not using cable glands, also attach the cables near to the cubicle entry point. bb Cables must never be in contact with or passed between live conductors. bb Sharp edges of the framework must be protected where cables pass to avoid bb damaging the conductors. bb Comply with a minimum radius of curvature of 6 to 8 times the cable outside bb diameter. bb All power connections must be made with class 8.8 mounting hardware and bb elastic contact washers, tightened to the torque indicated in the table below. bb When connecting aluminium cables to copper terminals, use bimetal lugs or bb interfaces. bb Separate the different types of circuits into separate cable bundles (power, control, bb 48 V, 24 V, DC, AC, etc). Cable bundles
Cable cross-sectional area (mm ) CSA y 10 16 < CSA y 50 CSA u 50 Max. number of cables per bundle 8 4 Tie individually

Tying the cable bundles


Type of tie Width: 4.5 mm Load: 22 kg Width: 9 mm Load: 80 kg Maximum Icw (kA/rms 1s) 10 15 20 20 25 35 45 Distance between ties (mm) 200 100 50 350 200 100 70

For cable sizes of 50 mm or more, use 9 mm wide fixing ties. Recommended tightening torque for mechanical and electrical connections with 8.8 class screws.
Diameter of screw M3 M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 Tightening torque (Nm) (with nut + contact washer) 1,5 3,5 7 13 28 50 75

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-105

Additional information
Practical information

Connection of power cables

DD383380.eps

Connection via the top

bb Remove the roof. bb Drill the holes required to install cable glands or grommets. bb Install the cable glands or grommets. They must comply with the switchboards degree of protection (IP). bb Refit the roof. bb Run the cables through the glands or grommets. bb Run the cables in the intended compartments and secure them to cable tie-bars every 400 mm. bb Crimp the lugs and connect. bb When sealing does not call for cable glands or when sealing is achieved by means of foam, cables can be routed in a rectangular cut-out in the roof. The removable cross-member simplifies insertion of cables in the cubicle.

DD210587.eps

Connection via the bottom


Using a 2-part gland plate bb Drilling is not necessary with this type of gland plate. bb The gland plate avoids producing an induced current. bb The cables are protected by a polyurethane foam seal which provides a sealing function. Using a 1-part gland plate bb Remove the bottom plate. bb Drill the appropriate holes to assemble the cable glands or grommets (1-part gland plates should not be drilled within 30 mm of the edges). bb Install the cable glands or grommets. They must comply with the required degree of protection (IP). bb Refit the bottom plate. bb Run the cables through the glands or grommets. bb Run the cables in the intended compartments and secure them to cable tie-bars every 400 mm. bb If cable glands are not used, it may be easier to prepare the cable terminations outside the switchboard (e.g. lug crimping) and then to drop them inside the cubicle having first disassembled the bottom removable cross-member.

DD383377.eps

Covering a Masterpact incomer


For Masterpact NW/NT/NS1600b-3200 / Compact NS630b-1600 bb Disassemble the cover plate to access to the device connection terminals. bb Connect the cables, respecting the required electrical clearances. bb Cut out the part of the cover disassembled in order to let the cables pass through it, while preserving the necessary degree of protection.

D-106

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

400E41000

Additional information
Practical information

Connection of power cables

Dd380794.eps

Connecting to terminal extension bars

bb Check that the circuit and switchgear identification indications match. bb When connections are made to terminal extensions made up of several bars for each phase, position the lugs opposite one another and insert copper spacers between the bars. bb Comply with the minimum required electrical clearances between phases of 14 mm (conforming with IEC 60439-1). bb Mark all nuts and the terminal extension bars with a dot of varnish after tightening to the defined torque. bb Remove the top cross-member of the cubicle to simplify connection of the cables to the bars. bb Tie cables of the same phase together. bb When connections are made directly to the switchgear terminals, comply with the tightening torque recommended by the device manufacturer. bb Check that the length of the screws delivered with the switchgear is compatible with the lug thickness. bb Comply with the safety clearances around the switchgear devices, defined by the manufacturer to ensure correct operation. bb Refit the interphase barriers and terminal shields if applicable after connection the power cables. bb For the special case of connection with armoured cable, please consult us.

Connection directly to device terminals


Removable upper cross-member.

400E41000

Version : 3.0

16/04/2013

D-107

Schneider Electric Industries SAS


35, rue Joseph Monier CS 30323 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex France RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Capital social 896 313 776 www.schneider-electric.com DESW016EN As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication. Publication: Schneider Electric Industries SAS Design: Ameg Photos: Schneider Electric Printed:

 This document has

been printed on ecological paper.

04-2013

ART960003 2013 - Schneider Electric - All rights reserved

You might also like